Studer OnAir 1500

Digital Mixing Console

SW Version 4.1

Operating and Service Instructions

Disclaimer

The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate at the time of publica-
tion. However, no responsibility is taken by us for inaccuracies, errors, or omissions, nor is any liability assumed for
any loss or damage resulting either directly or indirectly from use of the information contained within it.

Prepared and edited by Copyright by Studer Professional Audio GmbH

Studer Professional Audio GmbH
Technical Documentation Order no. BD10.943002-D (0412)
Riedthofstrasse 214
CH-8105 Regensdorf - Switzerland
http://www.studer.ch Subject to change

Studer is a registered trade mark of Studer Professional Audio GmbH, Regensdorf

 Safety Information

For Your Own Safety and to Avoid Invalidation of the Warranty

Please Read This Section Carefully
• Read these instructions.
• Keep these instructions.
• Heed all warnings.
• Follow all instructions.
• Do not use this apparatus near water.
• Clean only with a dry cloth.
• Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
• Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
• Do not defeat the safety purpose of a polarised or grounding type plug. A
polarised plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or
the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not
fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete
outlet
• Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the
apparatus.
• Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
• Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use cau-
tion when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from
tip-over.
• Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as the power
supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
Note: It is recommended that all maintenance and service on the product
should be carried out by Studer or its authorised agents. Studer cannot
accept any liability whatsoever for any loss or damage caused by service,
maintenance or repair by unauthorised personnel.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus
to rain or moisture. Do not expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing
and do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the appara-
tus.
• No naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, should be placed on the
apparatus.
• Ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings
with items such as newspapers, table cloths, curtains etc.
WARNING: Do not use this apparatus in very dusty atmospheres, or in atmospheres
containing flammable gases or chemicals.
• THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED. Under no circumstances
should the safety earth be disconnected from the mains lead.
• The mains supply disconnect device is the mains plug. It must remain
accessible so as to be readily operable when the apparatus is in use.
• If any part of the mains cord set is damaged, the complete cord set should
be replaced. The following information is for reference only. The wires
in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:

I
Safety Information

• Protective Earth (Ground): Green/Yellow (US: Green or Green/

Yellow)
• Neutral: Blue (US: White)
• Live (Hot): Brown (US: Black)
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead may not correspond with
the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed
as follows:
• The wire which is coloured Green and Yellow must be connected to
the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the
earth symbol.
• The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal in
the plug which is marked with the letter N.
• The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal
in the plug which is marked with the letter L.
Ensure that these colour codes are followed carefully in the event of the
plug being changed
• This unit is capable of operating over a range of mains voltages, as
marked on the rear panel.
Lithium Battery Installed lithium batteries must be replaced by the same or an equivalent
! type. Danger of explosion if batteries are incorrectly replaced or when
terminals are shorted.
Installed lithium batteries must not be exposed to excessive heat such as
! direct sunshine, fire or the like.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment gen-
erates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
This Class A digital apparatus meets the requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règle-
ment sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

Working Safely With Sound Although your new console will not make any noise until you feed it signals,
it has the capability to produce sounds that, when monitored through a moni-
tor system or headphones, can damage hearing over time.The table below is
taken from the Occupational Safety & Health Administration directive on
occupational noise exposure (1926.52):
Permissible Noise Exposure: Duration per day [h] Sound level [dBA, slow response]
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
! 2
1.5
100
102
1 105
0.5 110
<0.25 115

II
 Safety Information

Conforming to this directive will minimise the risk of hearing damage caused
by long listening periods. A simple rule to follow is: The longer you listen, the
lower the average volume should be. Please take care when working with your
audio system – if you are manipulating controls which you don’t understand
(which we all do when we are learning), make sure your monitoring level is
turned down. Remember that your ears are the most important tool of your
trade. Look after them, and they will look after you. Most importantly: Don’t
be afraid to experiment to find out how each parameter affects the sound;
this will extend your creativity and help you to get the best results.

A1 Safety Symbol Guide

For your own safety and to avoid invalidation of the warranty, all text marked
with these symbols should be read carefully.
CAUTION To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove covers. No user-serviceable
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel (i.e., persons
ATTENTION
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware
ACHTUNG
GEFAHR: ELEKTRISCHER SCHLAG
of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a repair action, and of
NICHT ÖFFNEN
measures to minimize the danger of themselves).
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol is intended to alert the user to the
presence of un-insulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure
that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the
! user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.
Headphones safety warnings contain important information and useful tips
! on headphone outputs and monitoring levels.
Assemblies or sub-assemblies of this product can contain opto-electronic
CLASS 1 devices. As long as these devices comply with Class I of laser or LED prod-
LED PRODUCT
ucts according to EN 60825-1:1994, they will not be expressly marked on
the product. If a special design should be covered by a higher class of this
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT standard, the device concerned will be marked directly on the assembly or
sub-assembly in accordance with the above standard.

A2 First Aid

In Case of Electric Shock: Separate the person as quickly as possible from the electric power source:
• By switching the equipment off,
• By unplugging or disconnecting the mains cable, or
• By pushing the person away from the power source, using dry insulating
material (such as wood or plastic).
• After having suffered an electric shock, always consult a doctor.
Warning! Do not touch the person or his clothing before the power is turned off,
otherwise you stand the risk of suffering an electric shock as well!
If the Person is Unconscious: • Lay the person down
• Turn him to one side
• Check the pulse
• Reanimate the person if respiration is poor
• Call for a doctor immed­iately.

III
Installation

B General Installation Instructions

Please consider besides these general instructions also any product-specific
instructions in the “Installation” chapter of this manual.

B1 Unpacking

Check the equipment for any transport damage. If the unit is mechanically
damaged, if liquids have been spilled or if objects have fallen into the unit,
it must not be connected to the AC power outlet, or it must be immediately
disconnected by unplugging the power cable. Repair must only be performed
by trained personnel in accordance with the applicable regulations.

B2 Installation Site

Install the unit in a place where the following conditions are met:
• The temperature and the relative humidity of the environment must be
within the specified limits during operation of the unit. Relevant values
are the ones at the air inlets of the unit (refer to Appendix 1).
• Condensation must be avoided. If the unit is installed in a location with
large variation of ambient temperature (e.g. in an OB-van), appropriate
precautions must be taken before and after operation (refer to Appendix
1).
• Unobstructed air flow is essential for proper operation. Air vents of the
unit are a functional part of the design and must not be blocked in any
way during operation (e.g. by objects placed upon them, placement of the
unit on a soft surface, or installation of the unit within a rack or piece of
furniture).
• The unit must not be heated up by external sources of heat radiation (sun-
light, spotlights).

B3 Earthing and Power Supply

Earthing of units with mains supply (class I equipment) is performed via

the protective earth (PE) conductor integrated in the mains cable. Units with
battery operation (< 60 V, class III equipment) must be earthed separately.
Earthing the unit is one of the measures for protection against electrical shock
hazard (dangerous body currents). Hazardous voltage may not only be caused
by a defective power supply insulation, but may also be introduced by the
connected audio or control cables.
If the unit is installed with one or several external connections, its earthing
must be provided during operation as well as while the unit is not operated.
If the earthing connection can be interrupted, for example, by unplugging
the mains plug of an external power supply unit, an additional, permanent
earthing connection must be installed using the provided earth terminal.
Avoid ground loops (hum loops) by keeping the loop surface as small as
possible (by consequently guiding the earth conductors in a narrow, parallel
way), and reduce the noise current flowing through the loop by inserting an
additional impedance (common-mode choke).

IV
 Installation / EMC

Class I Equipment (Mains Operation)

Should the equipment be delivered without a matching mains cable, the
latter has to be prepared by a trained person using the attached female plug
(IEC 320 / C13 or IEC 320 / C19) with respect to the applicable regulations
in your country.
Before connecting the equipment to the AC power outlet, check that the local
line voltage matches the equipment rating (voltage, frequency) within the
ad­missible tolerance. The equipment fuses must be rated in accordance with
the specifications on the equipment.
Equipment supplied with a 3-pole appliance inlet (protection conforming to
class I equip­ment) must be connect­ed to a 3-pole AC power outlet in such a
way that the equipment ca­binet is connected to the protective earth.
For information on mains cable strain relief, please refer to Appendix 2.

Female Plugs (IEC320), Front-Side View:

L N
L N

PE
PE
IEC 320 / C13 IEC 320 / C19

European Standard North American Standard

(CENELEC) (NAS)
Brown L (Live) Black
Blue N (Neutral) White
Green/Yellow PE (Protective Earth) Green (or Green/Yellow)

Class III Equipment (Battery Operation up to 60 VDC)

Equipment of this protection class must be earthed using the provided earth
terminal if one or more external signals are connected to the unit (see expla-
nation at the beginning of this paragraph).

B4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

The unit conforms to the protection requirements relevant to electromagnetic

phenomena that are listed in guidelines 89/336/EC and FCC, part 15.
• The electromagnetic interference generated by the unit is limited in such
a way that other equipment and systems can be operated normally.
• The unit is adequately protected against electromagnetic interference so
that it can operate properly.
The unit has been tested and conforms to the EMC standards of the speci-
fied electromagnetic environment, as listed in the following declaration.
The limits of these standards ensure protection of the environment and cor-
responding noise immunity of the equipment with appropriate probability.
However, a professional installation and integration within the system are
imperative prerequisites for operation without EMC problems.
For this purpose, the following measures must be followed:
• Install the equipment in accordance with the operating instructions. Use
the supplied accessories.
• In the system and in the vicinity where the equipment is installed, use only
components (systems, equipment) that also fulfill the EMC standards for
the given environment.

V
EMC / Maintenance / ESD

• Use a system grounding concept that satisfies the safety requirements

(class I equipment must be connected with a protective ground conduc-
tor) and that also takes into consideration the EMC require­ments. When
deciding between radial, surface, or combined grounding, the advantages
and disadvantages should be carefully evaluated in each case.
• Use shielded cables where shielding is specified. The connection of the
shield to the corresponding connector terminal or housing should have a
large surface and be corrosion-proof. Please note that a cable shield con-
nected only single-ended can act as a transmitting or receiving antenna
within the corresponding frequency range.
• Avoid ground loops or reduce their adverse effects by keeping the loop
surface as small as possible, and reduce the noise current flowing through
the loop by inserting an additional impedance (e.g. common-mode choke).
• Reduce electrostatic discharge (ESD) of persons by installing an appropri-
ate floor covering (e.g. a carpet with permanent electrostatic filaments) and
by keeping the relative humidity above 30%. Further measures (e.g. con-
ducting floor) are usually unnecessary and only effective if used together
with corresponding personal equipment.
• When using equipment with touch-sensitive operator controls, please take
care that the surrounding building structure allows for sufficient capacitive
coupling of the operator. This coupling can be improved by an additional,
conducting surface in the operator’s area, connected to the equipment
housing (e.g. metal foil underneath the floor covering, carpet with conduc-
tive backing).

C Maintenance
All air vents and openings for operating elements (faders, rotary knobs) must
be checked on a regular basis, and cleaned in case of dust accumulation. For
cleaning, a soft paint-brush or a vacuum cleaner is recommended.
Cleaning the surfaces of the unit is performed with a soft, dry cloth or a soft
brush.
Persistent contamination can be treated with a cloth that is slightly humidified
with a mild cleaning solution, such as dishwashing detergent.
For cleaning display windows, commercially available computer/TV screen
cleaners are suited. Use only a slightly damp (never wet) cloth.
Never use any solvents for cleaning the exterior of the unit! Liquids must
never be sprayed or poured on directly!
For equipment-specific maintenance information please refer to the corre-
sponding chapter in the operating and service manuals.

D Electrostatic Discharge during Maintenance and Repair

Caution:
Observe the precautions for handling devices sensitive to electrostatic
discharge!
Many semiconductor components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). The lifespan of assemblies contain­ing such components can be dras-
tically reduced by improper handling during maintenance and repair. Please
observe the following rules when handling ESD sensitive components:
• ESD sensitive components should only be stored and transported in the
packing material specifically provided for this purpose.

VI
 ESD / Repair

• When performing a repair by replacing complete assemblies, the removed

assembly must be sent back to the supplier in the same packing material
in which the replacement assembly was shipped. If this should not be the
case, any claim for a possible refund will be null and void.
• Unpacked ESD sensitive components should only be handled in ESD
protected areas (EPA, e.g. area for field service, repair or service bench)
and only be touched by persons wearing a wristlet connected to the
ground potential of the repair or service bench by a series resistor. The
equipment to be repaired or serviced as well as all tools and electrically
semi-conducting work, storage, and floor mats should also be connected
to this ground potential.
• The terminals of ESD sensitive components must not come in uncontrolled
contact with electro­statically chargeable or metallic surfaces (voltage
puncture, discharge shock hazard).
• To prevent the components from undefined transient stress and possible
damage due to inadmissible voltages or compensation currents, electrical
connections should only be established or separated when the equipment
is switched off and after any capacitor charges have decayed.

E Repair
By removing housing parts or shields, energized parts may be exposed. For
this reason the following precautions must be observed:
• Maintenance may only be performed by trained personnel in accordance
with the applicable regulations.
• The equipment must be switched off and disconnected from the AC power
outlet before any housing parts are removed.
• Even if the equipment is disconnected from the power outlet, parts with
hazardous charges (e.g. capacitors, picture tubes) must not be touched until
they have been properly discharged. Do not touch hot components (power
semi­con­ductors, heat sinks, etc.) before they have cooled off.
• If maintenance is performed on a unit that is open­ed while being switched
on, no un-insulated circuit compon­ents and metallic semiconductor hous-
ings must be touched, neither with bare hands nor with un-­insulated tools.
Certain components pose additional hazards:
• Explosion hazard from lithium batteries, electrolytic capacitors and power
semiconductors (Observe the component’s polarity. Do not short battery
terminals. Replace batteries only by the same type).
• Implosion hazard from evacuated display units.
• Radiation hazard from laser units (non-ionizing), picture tubes (ionizing).
• Caustic effect of display units (LCD) and components containing liquid
electrolyte.
Such components should only be handled by trained personnel who are prop-
erly protected (e.g. protection glasses, gloves).

VII
Repair / Disposal

E1 SMD Components

Studer has no commercially available SMD components in stock for service

purposes. For repair, the corresponding devices have to be purchased locally.
The specifications of special components can be found in the service manual.
SMD components should only be replaced by skilled specialists using appro-
priate tools. No warranty claims will be accepted for circuit boards that have
been damaged. Proper and improper SMD soldering joints are illustrated
below.

SMD Soldering Iron

Component
Copper
Track Solder
PCB
Adhesive

Dismounting
Desoldering 2
Iron
1 3
Soldering
Iron Desolder Desolder
Wick Wick

Heat and Remove Cleaning

Mounting Examples

1

Solder
2 Ø 0.5...0.8 mm 3

Heating Time < 3 s per Side

F Disposal
Packing Materials
The packing materials have been selected with environmental and disposal
issues in mind. All packing material can be recycled. Recycling packing saves
raw materials and reduces the volume of waste.
If you need to dispose of the transport packing materials, please try to use
recyclable means.

Used Equipment Used equipment contains valuable raw materials as well as materials that
must be disposed of professionally. Please return your used equipment via an
authorized specialist dealer or via the public waste disposal system, ensuring
any material that can be recycled is.
Please take care that your used equipment cannot be abused. To avoid abuse,
delete sensitive data from any data storage media. After having disconnected
your used equipment from the mains supply, make sure that the mains con-
nector and the mains cable are made useless.

VIII
 Conformity

G Declarations of Conformity
G1 Class A Equipment - FCC Notice

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide a reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio com­munications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
This Class A digital apparatus meets the requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règle-
ment sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Also refer to relevant
information in this manual.

G2 CE Declaration of Conformity

We,
Studer Professional Audio GmbH,
CH-8105 Regensdorf,
declare under our sole responsibility that the product
Studer OnAir 1500, Digital Broadcast Mixing Console
(starting with serial no. 30270026),
to which this declaration relates, according to following regulations of EU
directives and amendments
• Low Voltage (LVD):
73/23/EEC + 93/68/EEC
• Electro­magnetic Compatibility (EMC):
89/336/EEC + 92/31/EEC + 93/68/EEC
is in conformity with the following standards or normative documents:
• Safety:
EN 60065:2002 and EN 60950:2001 (Class I equipment)
• Safety of laser products:
EN 60825-1:1994 + A11 + A2, EN 60825-2:2000
• EMC:
EN 55103-1/-2:2009, electromagnetic environment E2.

Regensdorf, November 28, 2011

B. Hochstrasser, General Manager M. Lienert, Manager R&D

IX
Appendix

Appendix 1: Air Temperature and Humidity

General

Normal operation of the unit or system is warranted under the ambient condi-
tions defined by EN 60721-3-3, set IE32, value 3K3.
This standard consists of an extensive catalogue of parameters, the most
important of which are: ambient temperature +5...+40 °C, relative humidity
5...85% (i.e., no formation of condensation or ice); absolute humidity 1...25 g/
m³; rate of temperature change < 0.5 °C/min. These parameters are dealt with
in the following paragraphs.
Under these conditions the unit or system starts and works without any prob-
lem. Beyond these specifications, possible problems are described below.

Ambient Temperature

Units and systems by Studer are generally designed for an ambient tempera-
ture range (i.e. temperature of the incoming air) of +5 °C to +40 °C. When
rack mounting the units, the intended air flow and herewith adequate cooling
must be provided. The following facts must be considered:
• The admissible ambient temperature range for operation of the semicon-
ductor components is 0 °C to +70 °C (commercial temperature range for
operation).
• The air flow through the installation must provide that the outgoing air is
always cooler than 70 °C.
• Average heat increase of the cooling air shall be about 20 K, allowing for
an additional maximum 10 K increase at the hot components.
• In order to dissipate 1 kW with this admissible average heat increase, an
air flow of 2.65 m³/min is required.
Example: A rack dissipating P = 800 W requires an air flow of 0.8 * 2.65 m³/min which
corresponds to 2.12 m³/min.
• If the cooling function of the installation must be monitored (e.g. for fan
failure or illumination with spot lamps), the outgoing air temperature must
be measured directly above the modules at several places within the rack.
The trigger temperature of the sensors should be 65 °C to 70 °C.

Frost and Dew

The unsealed system parts (connector areas and semiconductor pins) allow
for a minute formation of ice or frost. However, formation of dew visible to
the naked eye will already lead to malfunctions. In practice, reliable opera-
tion can be expected in a temperature range above –15 °C, if the following
general rule is considered for putting the cold system into operation:
If the air within the system is cooled down, the relative humidity rises. If it
reaches 100%, condensation will arise, usually in the boundary layer between
the air and a cooler surface, together with formation of ice or dew at sensi-
tive areas of the system (contacts, IC pins, etc.). Once internal condensation
occurs, trouble-free operation cannot be guaranteed, independent of tempera-
ture.

Before putting into operation, the system must be checked for internal for-
mation of condensation or ice. Only with a minute formation of ice, direct

X
 Appendix

evaporation (sublimation) may be expected; otherwise the system must be

heated and dried while switched off.
A system without visible internal formation of ice or condensation should be
heated up with its own heat dissipation, as homogeneously (and subsequently
as slow) as possible; the ambient temperature should then always be lower
than the one of the outgoing air.
If it is absolutely necessary to operate the cold system immediately within
warm ambient air, this air must be dehydrated. In such a case, the absolute
humidity must be so low that the relative humidity, related to the coldest
system surface, always remains below 100%.
Ensure that the enclosed air is as dry as possible when powering off (i.e. before
switching off in winter, aerate the room with cold, dry air, and remove humid
objects such as clothes from the room).
These relationships are visible from the following climatogram. For a con-
trolled procedure, thermometer and hygrometer as well as a thermometer
within the system will be required.
Example 1: An OB-van having an internal temperature of +20 °C and a relative humidity
of 40% is switched off in the evening. If the temperature falls below +5 °C,
the relative humidity will rise to 100% (7 g/m³); dew or ice will be forming.
Example 2: An OB-van is heated up in the morning with air of +20 °C and a relative
humidity of 40%. On all parts being cooler than +5 °C, dew or ice will be
forming.

XI
Appendix

Appendix 2: Mains Connector Strain Relief

For anchoring connectors without a mechanical lock (e.g. IEC mains connec-
tors), we recommend the following arrangement:

Procedure: The cable clamp shipped with your unit is auto-adhesive. For mounting please
follow the rules below:
• The surface to be adhered to must be clean, dry, and free from grease, oil,
or other contaminants. Recommended application temperature range is
+20 °C to +40 °C.
• Remove the plastic protective backing from the rear side of the clamp and
apply it firmly to the surface at the desired position. Allow as much time as
possible for curing. The bond continues to develop for as long as 24 hours.
• For improved stability, the clamp should be fixed with a screw. For this
purpose, a self-tapping screw and an M4 bolt and nut are included.
• Place the cable into the clamp as shown in the illustration above and firmly
press down the internal top cover until the cable is fixed.

XII
 Appendix

Appendix 3: Software License

Use of the software is subject to the Studer Professional Audio Software
License Agreement set forth below. Using the software indicates your accep-
tance of this license agreement. If you do not accept these license terms, you
are not authorized to use this software.
Under the condition and within the scope of the following Terms and Con-
ditions, Studer Professional Audio GmbH (hereinafter ‘Studer’) grants the
right to use programs developed by Studer as well as those of third parties
which have been installed by Studer on or within its products. References
to the license programs shall be references to the newest release of a license
program installed at the Customer’s site.

Programs Covered by the Agreement

License Programs of Studer The following Terms and Conditions grant the right to use all programs of
Studer that are part of the System and/or its options at the time of its delivery
to the Customer, as well as the installation software on the original data disk
and the accompanying documentation (‘License Material’). In this Agreement
the word ‘Programs’ shall have the meaning of programs and data written in
machine code.
Using the software indicates your acceptance of this license agreement. If you
do not accept these license terms, you are not authorized to use this software.
Programs of Third Parties Programs of third parties are all programs which constitute part of the System
and/or its options at the time of delivery to the Customer but have not been
developed by Studer. The following conditions are applicable to programs of
third parties:
• The right to use third parties’ programs is governed by the License Agree-
ment attached hereto (if applicable), which is an integral part of this
Agreement. The Customer shall sign any and all License Agreements for
all further programs of third parties installed on the system. The Customer
shall be deemed to have received all License Agreements upon delivery
of the system and/or its options.
• Studer shall accept no responsibility or liability for, and gives no warran-
ties (express or implied) as to the programs of third parties. The Customer
waives any and all claims versus Studer for any consequential damages,
which might occur due to defects of these programs.

Right of Use

Principle Studer grants the Customer the non-exclusive right to use the License Ma-
terial in one copy on the system and/or its options as laid down by the Sales
Agreement concluded between the parties and all Terms and Conditions
which shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of the Sales
Agreement. This right is assignable according to the ‘Assignability’ paragraph
hereinafter.
Customized Configurations The Customer is not entitled to alter or develop further the License Material
except within the expressly permitted configuration possibilities given by the
software installed on the system or elsewhere. All altered programs, includ-
ing but not limited to the products altered within the permitted configuration
possibilities, are covered by this License Agreement.

XIII
Appendix

Reverse Engineering Reverse engineering is only permitted with the express consent of Studer.
The consent of Studer can be obtained but is not limited to the case in which
the interface software can not be provided by Studer. In any case Studer has
to be informed immediately upon complete or partial reverse engineering.

Copying the License Material The Customer is entitled to make one copy of all or parts of the License
Material as is necessary for the use according to this Agreement, namely for
backup purposes. The Customer shall apply the copyright of Studer found on
the License Material onto all copies made by him. Records shall be kept by
the Customer regarding the amount of copies made and their place of keeping.
The responsibility for the original program and all copies made lies with the
Customer. Studer is entitled to check these records on first request. Copies
not needed anymore have to be destroyed immediately.

Disclosure of License Material The License Material is a business secret of Studer. The Customer shall not
hand out or in any way give access to parts of or the complete License Material
to third parties nor to publish any part of the License Material without prior
written consent of Studer. The Customer shall protect the License Material
and any copies made according to the paragraph above by appropriate defense
measures against unauthorized access. This obligation of non-disclosure is a
perpetual obligation.
Third parties are entitled to have access to the License Material if they use the
License Material at the Customer’s site in compliance with this Agreement.
Under no circumstance are third parties entitled to have access to the instal-
lation software on the original data media. The Customer shall safeguard the
original data media accordingly.

Assignability The rights granted to the Customer according to this License Agreement shall
only be assignable to a third party together with the transfer of the system
and/or its options and after the prior written consent of Studer.

Rights to License Material

With the exception of the right of use granted by this License Agreement all
proprietary rights to the License Material, especially the ownership and the
intellectual property rights (such as but not limited to patents and copyright)
remain with Studer even if alterations, customized changes or amendments
have been made to the License Material.
Studer’s proprietary rights are acknowledged by the Customer. The Customer
shall undertake no infringements and make no claims of any patent, registered
design, copyright, trade mark or trade name, or other intellectual property
right.

Warranty, Disclaimer, and Liability

For all issues not covered herewithin, refer to the ‘General Terms and Condi-
tions of Sales and Delivery’ being part of the sales contract.

XIV
 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

CHAPTER 1

1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................... 3

1.1 OnAir 1500 Audio Block Diagram.............................................................................................................................. 4

1.2 Definitions, Acronyms, Abbreviations........................................................................................................................ 6
1.3 Color Code................................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.4 Momentary/Latching Key Activation ..................................................................................................................... 6
1.5 Options / License Key Code........................................................................................................................................ 7
1.6 USB Memory Devices................................................................................................................................................. 7

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Introduction  1-1

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

1-2  Introduction SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

1 Introduction

Main Features • Modular design with extremely low-profile desk; I/O and DSP in separate
Nano SCore
• 6-fader layout with 100 mm manual faders, may be upgraded to 12 faders by
adding/attaching an optional 6-fader module
• OLED (Organic LED) displays in fader strips and central section for clear,
high-contrast indication
• Red lights for on-air and open mic indication in control room and studio
• I/O in established signal formats (16 analog mic/line inputs, 16 line outputs, 4
stereo AES/EBU inputs with SRC, 4 stereo AES/EBU outputs, 8 channels of
I/O on a USB socket). Additional, optional I/O in AES/EBU, MADI, ADAT,
TDIF formats etc. available. 8 GPI/O for control purposes
• Every channel input with four-band parametric EQ and full dynamics (com-
pressor, limiter, noise gate, expander, de-esser)
• One stereo program bus, one stereo record bus, one audition bus, and four
stereo Mix-Minus (N–1/N–X/AUX) busses
• USB track recorder/player and USB jingle player
• Easy networking and integration thanks to I/O sharing (‘Relink’) and CMS
(Studer Call Management System) support
• Complete integration with Radio Automation Systems; optional Ember and
Monitora protocols via serial interface or tunnelled via TCP/IP
• Configurable router control via ProBel
• Connections for DVI computer screen and USB mouse/keyboard used during
initial setup
• Configurable key functions in case customization is needed.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Introduction  1-3

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

1.1 OnAir 1500 Audio Block Diagram V4.0

Nano SCore
INPUTS INPUT CHANNELS

AES
1/2
SFC D +
D +
3/4 PP INS SEND
D
SFC
D +
AP
5/6
SFC D OVL GR METER CH METER
CHANNEL OUT +
D De-S DYN N–X AF
7/8 D PF
SFC
D
CH INP PHASE
INS EQ INS CHANNEL PGM
STEREO
PP
DE-ESSER
4-band
DYNAMICS
AP
FADER BALANCE
ON/OFF +
CAL
REC
+
REC PF
PROCESSING
MIC / LINE
1 A INS RET PP
D
2 A AP
D
3 A
D
4 A
D STEREO INPUT AUDITION
+
5 A CHANNEL 1 to n AF
PF
N–X 1
+
D
6 A AF N–X 4
+
7 A
D
n = max 12 PF

D
8 A
D

9 A
D
10 A
D
11 A
D
12 A EXT PFL 1
D +
EXT PFL 2
+
#
13 A CUE
D +
14 A
D TB
15 A
TB to STUDIO HP

D
TB to Ext. 1...4
TB to STUDIO

TB to Int.
TB to CR HP

TB to Extern

16 A
D
TB to CR

6
1

6
+
TRACK
d 2
USB REC/PLAY +
PLAYER D +
d 2 D
JINGLE
PLAYER +
TB from EXT 1...4 4 4 +
TB from EXTERN
TB from CR
MCH Slot (D21m) TB from STUDIO 4 4
d 64 D +
D +

STUDIO SOURCE
+
CLOCK
AES
WCLK

44k1 48k CR SOURCE

CR ADD SOURCE
+
+

CR SP SOURCE
+
GPIO
16 TEST GEN.
GPIN
16 SINE WAVE
GPOUT WHITE NOISE
PINK NOISE

Backplane +
+

1-4  Introduction SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Nano SCore
Σ MASTER / SEND AND MONITORING OUTPUTS
Master Listen N–X
AUDITION
N–X 1
N–X 4
PGM
REC
PFL

AES
DIR OUT PP
+ DIR OUT AP D 1/2
+ D
INS SEND D 3/4
+ D
CHANNEL OUT
+ D 5/6
D
D 7/8
PGM MASTER L (M) LOGICAL D
TB R (M)
FADER DIM + INS LIM M/S
M
OUT 1
+ PFL SLATE

L (M)
+ REC MASTER
TB R (M) LINE
FADER
DIM + INS LIM M/S
M 1
PFL D
SLATE 2
A
3
LOGICAL D 4
OUT 96 A
D 5
6
A
D 7
8
A
+ 9
D
10 SP
+ A
11
D L CR MON LSP
12 R
A
+ N–X L (M) 13
ΣN–X 1 TB R (M) D L ST MON LSP
14
FADER ON
DIM + M/S
M A R
CUE PFL 15 L ST DJ HP
TALK D 16
L (M) A R
N–X
ΣN–X 4 TB R (M)
FADER ON
DIM + M/S
M
CUE PFL TALK

FIXED
Audition OUT 1
D L
+ A R CR DJ HP
PFL CR
+ D L
+
# A R GUEST HP

FIXED
OUT 64

GUI Meter
CR SP SRC TB CR SP
SP SRC
CUT MONO CUT DIM + DIM
TB TB
CUT
SLATE/TALK PFL CR
+
TB to Extern TB to Extern
+ TB to Ext. 1...4 TB to Ext. 1...4
+ 4
CR TB RET
+ TALK
+ TB
TB to STUDIO CUT ST GUEST HP
USB REC/PLAY
TB ST MON LSP
STUDIO TB RET
CUT
DIM + DIM D 2d
RECORDER
D
+ STUDIO SRC TB ST DJ HP
+ DIM +
TB to STUDIO HP TALK

STUDIO SRC STUDIO

+
MCH Slot (D21m)
TB to CR TALK
D 64 d
TB D
CUT CR GUEST HP
ADD MODE
NONE with PFL SP
TB
CR SRC TB CR MON LSP
+ Mono Mono CUT DIM + DIM Backplane
CR ADD SRC
+ Mono
SPLIT
DJ HP MODE
MIX MON
+
SP SRC
MON to L / MON TB
Mono TB CR DJ HP
+ CR SP SRC
Mono DIM +
TB
SP SRC

TB to CR HP TALK
0.2 23.9.10 HuR 0.3 10.11.10 HuR 0.4 22.12.11 SoG
CONTROL ROOM
OnAir 1500
AUDIO BLOCK
+ Regensdorf
DIAGRAM
+ Switzerland SW V4.0

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Introduction  1-5

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

1.2 Definitions, Acronyms, Abbreviations

Description
AF After-fader (as opposed to PF, ‘pre-fader’)
Bal Balance (for stereo input sources)
If the ‘broadcast PFL mode’ (also referred to as ‘PFL cut on channel active’ function) is enabled, audio
Broadcast PFL signals are cut from the PFL bus if the channel is ON and the fader is open. In such a case the PFL
key on the fader strip is illuminated in amber.
CAB Computer-assisted broadcast (system)
CR Control room
CUE Listening after Pan, but before channel ON switch
DJ Disk jockey
Masters Main sums = PGM A, PGM B, REC
Mic Microphone
N–X Similar to N–1 / mix-minus / clean-feed
Pan Panorama (for mono input sources)
PF Pre-fader (as opposed to AF, ‘after-fader’)
PFL Pre-fader listening
If the ‘PFL cut on channel active’ function (also referred to as ‘broadcast PFL mode’) is enabled, audio
PFL Cut on Channel Active signals are cut from the PFL bus if the channel is ON and the fader is open. In such a case the PFL
key on the fader strip is illuminated in amber.
S2 Studio
TB Talkback
USB Universal Serial Bus
DVI Digital Video Interface

1.3 Color Code

A consistent color coding of the different functions has been implemented.
The color coding conventions are as follows:
Blue Input functions, including high-pass filter and test generator
Green Dynamics/De-Esser functions
Red Equalizer (EQ) functions
Orange AUX functions
Yellow Fader and bus functions, including sums and N–X
Purple Monitoring and talkback (TB) functions
Gray / Steel Blue Other functions, such as routing, insert, snapshot and system administration

1.4 Momentary/Latching Key Activation 

A lot of key presses during console operation are repetitive for comparing
settings or to make quick checks for monitoring purposes. Studer has reduced
the amount of needed key presses tremendously by incorporating a special
logic for these cases. The control surface distinguishes long and short key
presses and reacts accordingly: Pressing and holding a key will automatically
reverse its activation upon release of the key – this is, however, applied only
where appropriate. All keys featuring momentary/latching activation are
labeled with a  symbol throughout this guide.
For example, holding down a talkback key for one second or longer will auto-
matically cancel the talkback connection upon key release. If the connection
should continuously be activated, just ‘hit’ the key without holding it.
Further examples are for momentary/latching operation are switching audio
functions on and off (e.g. EQ, filters, dynamics), or PFL.

1-6  Introduction SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

1.5 Options / License Key Code

When adding an option to the system (CAB, ProBel or CMS support, I/O shar-
ing, USB track player/recorder), the System ID code is used together with the
option’s license key in order to generate the Option Key code that is entered
using the configuration tool. Unavailable options will not be displayed.
For details on configuration refer to chapter 6.5.31.

1.6 USB Memory Devices

Important Any USB memory device MUST NOT BE REMOVED from its socket
! DURING DATA ACCESS – only remove it after its LED has stopped flash-
ing in order to avoid data loss!

The REC / PLAY USB socket may, of course, also be used for an external hard
drive. If this drive takes its power supply from the USB socket, its consump-
tion must not exceed 500 mA. Supplying the unit from an external supply unit
is strongly recommended.

REC / PLAY USB Media For formatting memory devices for track recorder/player and jingle player
refer to chapter 5.15.1.3.

Login USB Stick For creating a login USB stick refer to chapter 5.16.4.1.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Introduction  1-7

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

1-8  Introduction SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

CHAPTER 2

2 General................................................................................................................................................................................. 3

2.1 Utilization for the Purpose Intended............................................................................................................................ 3

2.2 First Steps.................................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2.1 Unpacking and Inspection...................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2.2 Accessories and Options........................................................................................................................................ 3
2.2.3 Adjustments, Repair, Cleaning............................................................................................................................... 4
2.2.4 USB Sockets.......................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................................. 5
2.3.1 Mic/Line Input....................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.3.2 Line Output............................................................................................................................................................ 5
2.3.3 Ambient Conditions............................................................................................................................................... 5
2.3.4 Power Supply......................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.3.5 Weights................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.3.6 Dimensions............................................................................................................................................................. 6
2.3.6.1 Desk Unit........................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.3.6.2 Core Frame........................................................................................................................................................ 7
2.3.6.3 6-Fader Extension (Optional) ........................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.6.4 Desk Unit + 19” Rack / Table Mount Kit (Optional)........................................................................................ 9
2.3.6.5 6-Fader Extension + Table Mount Kit (Optional)........................................................................................... 10

Date printed: 13.04.12 SW V4.1 General  2-1

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

2-2  General SW V4.1 Date printed: 13.04.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

2 General
2.1 Utilization for the Purpose Intended
The OnAir 1500 mixing console is intended for professional use.
It is presumed that the unit is operated only by trained personnel. Servicing
is reserved to skilled technicians.
The electrical connections may be connected only to the voltages and signals
designated in this manual.

2.2 First Steps

2.2.1 Unpacking and Inspection
Your new mixing console is shipped in a special packing which protects the
units against mechanical shock during transit. Care should be exercised when
unpacking so that the surfaces do not get marred.
Verify that the content of the packing agrees with the items on the enclosed
shipping list.
Check the condition of the equipment for signs of shipping damage. If there
should be any complaints you should immediately notify the forwarding agent
and your nearest Studer distributor.
It is recommended to retain the original packing material because it offers
the best protection in case your equipment ever needs to be transported.

2.2.2 Accessories and Options

A943.074501, for 6-Fader Desk Qty Description Part no.
2 Rotary knobs, black C042.010520
2 Caps for Rotary knobs, black C042.010613
2 Fader knobs, red A911.000042
2 Fader knobs, orange A911.000043
2 Fader knobs, yellow A911.000044
2 Fader knobs, green A911.000045
2 Fader knobs, blue A911.000046
6 Key caps, printed OFF A943.071033
6 Key caps, printed CUE/TB A943.071035
12 Key caps, 12.5 × 12.5 mm A943.071029
20 Key caps, 16 × 12.5 mm A943.071030
+ Cat5 cable to Nano SCore, 5 m C054.201048
+ RJ11 cable for PFL speaker, 5 m A943.071094
+ Sheet with self-adhesive meter labels A943.071019

A943.074503, for Nano SCore Qty Description Part no.

1 Allen key 2,5 mm C098.002023
2 USB-Sticks (User login / track recorder/player) C089.200308
+ Mains cable, international tbd
+ Quick start guide BD10.943001
+ DVD-ROM BD10.471000

Date printed: 13.04.12 SW V4.1 General  2-3

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

A943.074503 to 6-Fader Ext. Qty Description Part no.

6 Key caps, printed OFF A943.071033
6 Key caps, printed CUE/TB A943.071035
20 Key caps, 16 × 12.5 mm A943.071030
1 Linking Set (2 threaded plates, 4 screws M4 × 8 A943.074600
1 Allen key 3 mm C098.002024
+ Cable Cat5/RJ45 shielded, to Nano SCore, 5 m C054.201048

Options: Description Part no.

Rack/table mount kit for 6-fader desk A943.074000
Table mount kit for 6-fader extension module A943.074100
Monitoring/TB box OnAir 1500 A943.073000
+ Cable Cat5/RJ45 shielded, to Nano SCore, 20 m C054.201078

2.2.3 Adjustments, Repair, Cleaning

Danger: All internal adjustments as well as repair work on this product must be per-
formed by expert technicians!
Replacing the Supply Unit: The primary fuse is located within the power supply module and cannot be
changed. In case of failure, the complete power supply unit must be replaced.
Please ask your nearest Studer representative.
Cleaning: Do not use any liquids to clean the exterior of the unit. A soft, dry cloth or
! brush will usually do.
For cleaning the display windows, most of the commercially available
! window or computer/TV screen cleaners are suited. Use only a slightly damp
(never wet) cloth. Never use any solvent!

2.2.4 USB Sockets

The OnAir 1500’s Nano SCore is equipped with different USB slots that are
used for different purposes:
Core, Front: Used for user login as well as for saving/loading console snapshots. This also
DATA / LOGIN
offers a convenient possibility for backup purposes or for copying parameter
settings from one console to a next one. For creating a login USB stick refer
to chapter 15.4.1.
REC / PLAY A USB memory device for recording or playing audio data connects here.
MCH I/O Direct connection to a DAW for recording/playback of up to 8 channels.
These two sockets cannot be used simultaneously.
The REC / PLAY USB socket may, of course, also be used for an external hard
drive. If this drive takes its power supply from the USB socket, its consump-
tion must not exceed 500 mA. Supplying the unit from an external supply unit
is strongly recommended.
Important USB memory devices MUST NOT BE REMOVED from the socket
! DURING DATA ACCESS – only remove any of them after its LED has
stopped flashing in order to avoid data loss!
For information on formatting USB memory devices refer to chapter 1.6.
Core, Rear: The two USB sockets at the rear allow connecting a USB mouse and keyboard
in order to facilitate configuration settings if required.

2-4  General SW V4.1 Date printed: 13.04.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

2.3 Technical Specifications (preliminary; subject to change without notice)

2.3.1 Mic/Line Input

Conditions/Details Value
Gain Individually adjustable per input in steps of 1 dB –5 to +58 dB
Phantom power +48 V and low-cut filter individually switchable per input for 0 dBFS
Impedance Electronically balanced tbd
Frequency Response 0 dB gain, 20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.1 dB / –1 dB
58 dB gain, 20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.1 dB / –3 dB
THD + Noise –30 dBFS, 0 dB gain, 20 Hz to 20 kHz –107 dBFS
–1 dBfs, 0 dB gain, 1 kHz –80 dBFS
Equivalent Input Noise Max. gain, Ri = 200 W –123 dBu
Crosstalk 0 dB gain, 1 kHz 105 dB
Max. gain, 1 kHz 87 dB
Common Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR) 50 Hz to 16 kHz –55 dB

2.3.2 Line Output

Conditions/Details Value
Impedance Electronically balanced tbd
Frequency Response 20 Hz to 20 kHz +0 dB / –0.3 dB
THD + Noise –1 dBFS, 1 kHz –90 dB
–30 dBFS, 20 Hz to 20 kHz –103 dB
Crosstalk 1 kHz –115 dB
Output Level Globally adjustable with hardware switch (steps: +6, +9, +12, +15, +18, +6 to +24 dBu
+20, +22, +24 dBu) for 0 dBFS

2.3.3 Ambient Conditions

Operating Temperature Range 0 to 40 °C
(32 to 104 °F)

2.3.4 Power Supply

Primary Input Voltage Range Auto-ranging, with power factor correction; EN/UL approved 80 to 240 V AC,
50 to 60 Hz
DC Input For redundancy purposes 24 V DC
Power Consumption max. 100 W

2.3.5 Weights
Desk 4 kg
6-Fader Extension 2.7 kg
Core 8.8 kg

Date printed: 13.04.12 SW V4.1 General  2-5

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

2.3.6 Dimensions
2.3.6.1 Desk Unit
447 mm / 17.6”

141 mm / 5.5”

CORE SP

18 mm / 0.7” 204 mm / 8.1” (M4 fixation points. Max. screw length: 15 mm / 0.6”)

356 mm / 14”
39 mm
1.5”
46 mm / 1.8”
25 mm / 1”

3.6°

89 mm / 3.5”
(M4 fixation points)

2-6  General SW V4.1 Date printed: 13.04.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

2.3.6.2 Core Frame

177 mm / 7”
483 mm / 19”

38 mm / 1.5”
52 mm
2”

2 mm / 0.1”
42 mm
1.7” 363 mm / 14.3”

Date printed: 13.04.12 SW V4.1 General  2-7

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

2.3.6.3 6-Fader Extension (Optional)

287 mm / 11.3”

67 mm / 2.6”

CORE

82 mm / 3.2”
(M4 fixation points. Max. screw length: 15 mm / 0.6”)

356 mm / 14”
39 mm
1.5”
46 mm / 1.8”
25 mm / 1”

3.6°

89 mm / 3.5”
(M4 fixation points)

2-8  General SW V4.1 Date printed: 13.04.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

2.3.6.4 Desk Unit + 19” Rack / Table Mount Kit (Optional)

483 mm / 19”

140 mm / 5.5”

355 mm / 14” (8 HU)

280 mm / 11”
466 mm / 18.4”

7 mm
5 mm

0.3”
0.2”

CORE SP

443 mm / 17.4”
7 mm
0.3”
23 mm
0.9”

35 mm
1.4”

75 mm / 3”

Studer OnAir 1500 Desk, Rack-/Table-Mount Dimensions

Date printed: 13.04.12 SW V4.1 General  2-9

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

2.3.6.5 6-Fader Extension + Table Mount Kit (Optional)

323 mm / 12.7”

140 mm / 5.5”

355 mm / 14” (8 HU)

280 mm / 11”

306 mm / 12”
7 mm
5 mm

0.3”
0.2”

CORE

283 mm / 11.2”
7 mm
0.3”
23 mm
0.9”

35 mm
1.4”

75 mm / 3”

2-10  General SW V4.1 Date printed: 13.04.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

CHAPTER 3

3 Setup..................................................................................................................................................................................... 3

3.1 Desk Rear View........................................................................................................................................................... 4

3.2 Core Front View........................................................................................................................................................... 4
3.3 Core Rear View............................................................................................................................................................ 5
3.4 Connector Pin Assignments......................................................................................................................................... 6
3.5 System Power.............................................................................................................................................................. 7

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Setup  3-1

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

3-2  Setup SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

3 Setup
Important It is presumed that all the preparatory steps described in the OnAir 1500
! Quick Start Guide shipped with your console have been carefully performed.
Nevertheless some information is repeated here for easy reference.

Location The console must be set up on a flat surface. In any case, free air circulation
must be guaranteed through all the air vents on the Nano SCore’s bottom
and sides. The air vents must never be covered. The Nano SCore must not be
placed on a soft surface, and the rubber feet at its bottom must not be removed.

Temperature Regulations The unit must not be used in conditions of excessive heat or cold, near any
source of moisture, in excessively humid environments, or in positions where
it is likely to be subjected to vibration or dust. The ambient temperature range
for normal operation of the unit is 0 to +40° C (+32 to +104° F).

Signal Connection Connect your input and output signals. For a basic test hookup a digital signal
(AES/EBU IN) or an analog microphone/line source (MIC/LINE IN) and a pair
of active monitor loudspeakers (CR MON LS) or headphones (CR DJ HP) will
be fine.

Mains Voltage The power supply unit is auto-ranging; it can be used for mains voltages in
a range of 100 to 240 V AC, 50 to 60 Hz.

Power Connection Connect your signal input and output cables before connecting the console to
the mains outlet. The supplied mains cable (with female IEC 320/C13 socket)
must be connected to a mains plug matching your local standard (German/
French, UK and US versions supplied) by a trained technician, respect-
ing your local regulations. Plug the mains cable to the 100-240V ~ 100W
50-60Hz mains inlet.

External PSU An optional external/redundant power supply unit (PSU) can be connected
to the 24V EXT socket.

Earthing Some consideration must be given to the earthing arrangement of the sy­stem,
at the center of which is the console chassis. The chassis is earthed to the
! mains earth via the power supply or the GND earth terminal. Ground loops
may occur where signal processing equip­ment, patched to the console, has
its signal earth commoned to the console chassis.

The console must be earthed, due to the mains input filter network be­ing
connected to the mains earth. If the earthing connection can be interrupted,
! for example, by unplugging the mains plug of an external power supply unit,
an additional, permanent earthing connection must be installed using the
provided GND earth terminal.

For additional information on ambient temperature, mains connection

and earthing please refer to the Safety chapter at the very beginning of this
manual.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Setup  3-3

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

3.1 Desk Rear View

CORE SP

The OnAir 1500 desk has two connectors only:

CORE (RJ45) for the Cat5 link to the core, and
SP (RJ11) for the analog audio link from the core’s (SPEAKER) XLR socket to
the integrated PFL speaker.
Note: The CORE cable is not only used for communication between desk and core
but also for supplying power to the desk.

3.2 Core Front View

CR DJ HP / CR GUEST HP Stereo TRS headphones sockets for the DJ and a guest in the control room.
DATA / LOGIN USB socket used for the user login memory stick and for data backup pur-
poses.
REC / PLAY USB socket used for a USB memory device for jingle playback or track
recording and playback; current consumption must by all means be less than
500 mA.
For USB hard disk drives connected to this socket an external power supply
! is strongly recommended.
MCH I/O USB 8-channel digital audio link to a DAW (digital audio workstation).
Note: REC / PLAY and MCH I/O cannot be used simultaneously; the desired socket
must be selected with the slide switch between them.

3-4  Setup SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

3.3 Core Rear View

The rear side of the Nano SCore features the following elements:
MIC/LINE IN 16 electronically balanced inputs on female XLRs with remote-controlled
individual gain, low-cut filter and 48 V phantom power.
LINE OUT 16 electronically balanced line outputs on male XLRs with globally jumper-
selectable output level.
Please note that the line outputs no. 10-16 are per default assigned to moni-
toring lines (10: (SPEAKER), 11/12: CR MON LS, 13/14: ST MON LS, 15/16:
ST DJ HP).
AES/EBU IN / OUT 4 stereo AES/EBU digital inputs and outputs each.
SYNC 3 different external SYNC inputs:
AES for synchronization to an external AES/EBU signal on a female XLR,
WCLK IN for synchronization to an external word clock signal on a BNC
socket (looped through to WCLK THRU for daisy-chaining several units),
VIDEO IN for synchronization to an external video signal on a BNC socket.
For syncing external units to the internal word clock, WCLK OUT is used.
AUTOMATION 9-pin D-type connector for communication with a CAB system.
DESK / EXTENSION / TB BOX 3 RJ45 sockets for the links to the desk, to an optional 6-fader extension unit
and to an optional, external talkback box.
DVI and USB These sockets may be used for a computer screen, keyboard and mouse. They
are used for the initial console setup or later, if an individual system configu-
ration is required. They can also be thought of as an emergency scenario if
the desk should fail – the user GUI is very similar to the one known from the
OnAir 2500 and OnAir 3000 consoles, with the exception that, of course, the
computer screen has no touch functionality.
ETHERNET RJ45 network socket used for RELINK (I/O sharing) and other networked
applications.
100-240V ~ 100W 50-60Hz Mains input on an IEC 320/C13 socket.
MAIN Main power switch for the whole system.
GND 4 mm ground/earth terminal.
24V EXT Connector for an external 24 V DC power supply (may be used for redundant
supply, too).
11, 12 D21m card slots for two single-width or one double-width card(s) for input
and/or output expansion.
GPI / GPO 1-8 General-purpose inputs and outputs for control signals, such as red light or
fader start.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Setup  3-5

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

3.4 Connector Pin Assignments

MIC/LINE IN (XLR 3f)
LINE OUT (XLR 3m)
AES/EBU / SYNC IN / AES/EBU OUT (XLR 3f/m)
Pin Signal (Input) Signal (Output)
2 1 1 2 1 Screen Screen
3 3
2 In + Out +
3 In – Out –

CR DJ HP / CR GUEST HP (Headphones, 6.3 mm TRS socket)

Pin Signal
Sleeve Ring Tip
Tip Left
Ring Right
Sleeve Screen/GND

GPI / GPO 1-8 General purpose I/O (25-pin D-type, fem., UNC 4-40 thread; plugs supplied)
Pin GPI 1-8 GPO 1-8 Pin GPI 1-8 GPO 1-8
1 GPI 1a GPO 1a 14 GPI 1b GPO 1b
2 GPI 2a GPO 2a 15 GPI 2b GPO 2b
3 GPI 3a GPO 3a 16 GPI 3b GPO 3b
13 1
4 GPI 4a GPO 4a 17 GPI 4b GPO 4b
5 GPI 5a GPO 5a 18 GPI 5b GPO 5b
25 Plug Solder/Crimp View 14 6 GPI 6a GPO 6a 19 GPI 6b GPO 6b
(or Socket Front View)
7 GPI 7a GPO 7a 20 GPI 7b GPO 7b
8 GPI 8a GPO 8a 21 GPI 8b GPO 8b
9 GND (0 V) GND (0 V) 22-25 VCC (+5 V) * VCC (+5 V) *
10-13 GND (0 V) GND (0 V) * 600 mA max. total

Inputs Control inputs (GPI Xa/b) are fully independent and electrically isolated.
They may be used either with the internal +5 V DC (VCC) supply voltage, or
with external voltages of 5...24 V DC, regardless of the polarity.
Outputs Control outputs (GPO Xa/b) are fully independent, electrically isolated relay
contacts, active closed. Contact rating is max. 0.5 A / max. 170 V DC / max.
10 VA. The internal +5 V DC (VCC) supply and/or the ground (GND) termi-
nals may be used to generate an output signal.
Note: Total current drawn from all +5 V DC terminals must not exceed 600 mA.

24V DC IN (10-pin Hirose, male)

Pin Signal
1 +22...28 V DC
2 +22...28 V DC
3 n.c. (no internal connection)
1 2 3
4 Power alarm output
4 7 5 n.c. (no internal connection)
6 n.c. (no internal connection)
8 9 10
7 n.c. (no internal connection)
8 GND
9 GND
10 Power alarm enable

3-6  Setup SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

3.5 System Power

Power Supply The OnAir 1500’s Nano SCore is equipped with an autoranging primary
power supply unit (input voltage range 80...240 V AC/50...60 Hz) with power
factor correction. The mains switch is located at its rear, next to the power
inlet.
The power supply is EN and UL approved.

Redundancy The console can be equipped with a second, external 1U power supply unit
supplying 24 V DC for redundancy, in addition to the mains power inlet.

UPS For extra safety against line loss cases, supplying the console by an UPS
(un-interruptible power supply) is recommended.

The console is normally switched on and off with the studio master mains
switch; it may also be switched on and off with the mains switch on the core
or with the one of the external PSU (if used) without any audio parameter
settings getting lost.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Setup  3-7

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

3-8  Setup SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

CHAPTER 4

4 Operating Elements............................................................................................................................................................ 3

4.1 Fader Section............................................................................................................................................................... 3

4.2 Central Section............................................................................................................................................................. 6
4.2.1 FUNCTION Controls (‘Rotary Assign Keys’)...................................................................................................... 6
4.2.2 MASTER Controls................................................................................................................................................. 7
4.2.3 MONITORING and Talkback Controls................................................................................................................. 7
4.2.4 Meter Bridge.......................................................................................................................................................... 8
4.3 Compact Monitoring/TB Box.................................................................................................................................... 11

Date printed: 13.04.12 SW V4.1 Operating Elements  4-1

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

4-2  Operating Elements SW V4.1 Date printed: 13.04.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

4 Operating Elements
4.1 Fader Section

The fader section with the OLED (organic LED) display contains six fader
OLED
strips (only one of them shown in the illustration on the left; approx. 60%
Display original size).
The fader strip has been designed with a minimum of operating elements.
Parameter settings are ava­­ilable through the new feature nicknamed ‘Mini
Rotary
Encoder
Vistonics’ or via an external screen, mouse and keyboard. Rarely used and
+ Key system administration functions (such as system configuration) can be
Ch Assign accessed via the external elements only. These are normally connected to the
Select console only if used.
Every fader strip contains 3 large keys the functions of which depend on
Record the selected setup, the fader, a rotary encoder with associated key, and a
Overload graphical OLED channel label display.
Ch Active
There is an additional indicator field with a red overload LED, six yellow
Talkback* LEDs for channel assignment indication, and a blue channel-active LED. A
channel is considered as ‘active’ if it is switched ON, its fader is open, this
channel is assigned to an master bus, and the master control is open.
* The large keys have snap-on caps for convenient labeling. This allows for
example to have ON and OFF keys at the lower end of the channel strip if
required, or to assign a different function such as fader start to the TB key if
100 mm the source is e.g. a CD player. These settings are input source-related and will
Fader
automatically follow the source in case the routing is changed. The illustration
at the left shows the factory default key labeling.

Pressing the key toggles the channel on/off function (default configuration).
ON
In the audio path, the on/off switch is located after fader and panning. On
status is indicated by illuminating the key.
* This key may also be a channel ON key only (if setup 2 is active).
Channel on/off is disabled if the channel strip is configured as master fader.

The purpose of PFL (‘pre-fader listening’) is to feed the pre-fader audio signal
 PFL
of the desired channel, AUX send or master (program, record) to the PFL bus.
If active, the key is illuminated in yellow.
If the ‘PFL Cut on Channel Active’ function (also referred to as ‘broadcast
PFL mode’) is enabled, audio signals are temporarily cut from the PFL bus
Channel
as long as the channel is ON and the fader is open. In such a case the PFL key
ON/OFF* is illuminated in amber.
* This key may also be a channel OFF key (if setup 2 is active).
PFL*
For N–X owner channels, this key’s function is TB (talkback) to the N–X
 TB
return. If more than one owner is configured to the same N–X output, all
corresponding TB keys work in parallel.
* This key may also be a TB/CUE key (if setup 2 is active). The purpose of

CUE is to feed the after-fader, after-pan and pre-ON audio signal of the desired
channel, AUX send or master (program, record) to the PFL bus. If active, the
key is illuminated in yellow.

REC The REC function is used to assign the channel signal directly to the record
bus, regardless of the fader position, the ON key, and the bus assignment. If
active, the key is illuminated in red.

Date printed: 13.04.12 SW V4.1 Operating Elements  4-3

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

SEL If one of the oval function keys in the central section is active, the ‘Mini Vis-
tonics’ view for parameter editing is activated for this channel upon pressing
this key.

Assignment Display At the left of the REC and SEL keys an indicator field with a red overload LED,
six yellow LEDs for channel-to-bus assignment indication (for PGM, REC,
and N–1 1-4 busses) and a blue channel-active LED. A channel is considered
as ‘active’ if it is switched ON, its fader is open, this channel is assigned to
an master bus, and the master control is open.

Fader Since the audio path is fully digital, the signal does not pass through the
faders; linear-track mono faders with a stroke length of 100 mm are used.
When opening the fader, fader start or signaling commands can be released,
depending on the configuration.

Rotary A rotary encoder and its key are available in every fader strip. The function
of these elements can be assigned with the FUNCTION keys in the central sec-
tion. If the rotary knob in the fader strip is touched, the channel label display
shows the corresponding value, depending on the selected function. Several
functions are selectable, such as input routing, input gain, balance, N–X level,
etc. The adjacent key can be, e.g., ‘Enter’ or ‘On’/’Off’, depending on the
selected function.

OLED Display, Global View Mode The OLED display in the channel strip normally is in global view mode; i.e.
it displays what is selected either with the four FUNCTION keys or the 34
rotary knob in the central section. If a logical input is assigned to the chan-
nel strip, it indicates the channel label, a second label (blank except in I/O
sharing mode or during input routing), level and gain reduction bar graphs,
the rotary graph as well as the function currently assigned to the rotary knob
(‘rotary parameter’).
As long as the rotary knob is touched, the channel label displays the current
parameter value.
There is a function called ‘screen saver’ available for the OLED displays. It
automatically reduces the display’s brightness after a configurable period of
time. The original brightness is restored as soon as a desk key is operated or a
touch-sensitive knob is touched. Using this function is strongly recommended
in order to increase the lifetime of the OLED channel displays.

Channel Label / (Value)

Second Label

Level Meter Rotary Graph

Gain Reduction Meter Rotary Parameter

Label The 8-digit channel label area normally indicates the (local or remote) channel
label if a logical input is assigned to the channel strip. As long as its rotary
knob is touched, the display shows the current parameter value, depending
on the selected function.

Rotary Touch

4-4  Operating Elements SW V4.1 Date printed: 13.04.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Second Label The 2nd label area is used exclusively for indication of the I/O sharing
producer system name. It is blanked as long as the rotary is touched, except
during input channel routing.

Rotary Parameter The rotary parameter area indicates the parameter name if a rotary function
is assigned to this channel.

Rotary Graph The rotary graph area shows a graphical representation of the value of the
assigned rotary function.

Level MeterA small bar graph input level meter is provided in each channel’s OLED
display, either indicating the input level, or the N–X or AUX send level of
the channel (configurable). The value indicated on the meter is depending on
the console’s headroom setting (default value: 0 dB indication for –9 dBFS).
N–X or AUX Send Level Indication: In this mode the level meter indicates the N–X or the AUX send level of the
channel.
Overload Indication, Analog Inputs: As soon as one sample at an analog input reaches full scale modulation, the
overload indicator is on for approx. 300 ms (the idea is that the probability
of an A/D converter reaching full scale without clipping is close to zero. Any
full scale levels within the path are considered to be overloads).
Overload Indication, Digital Inputs: Full scale modulation at a digital input is not considered to be an overload – it
is simply the output level of a source.
Overload Indication, REC/PGM Outputs:
If one sample of an output signal reaches full scale, the corresponding over­
load indication is on for approx. 300 ms.
Auto Take-Over Indication: The physical value and the internal, processed value of the fader may be dif-
ferent. This can be the case after routing, snapshot, or CAB changes. If the
values are different, auto take-over mode is enabled. The channel display
indicates by FDR UP or FDR DOWN in which direction the fader knob
has to be moved. As soon as the fader knob has been moved a bit, the display
changes to a numerical value, such as -15 UP or 27 DOWN. When the
fader position matches the internal value, TAKEOVER flashes three times;
the whole process is quite self-explanatory.

Gain Reduction Meter The narrow, upside-down bar graph in each channel’s OLED display is used
as a gain reduction meter. It is activated if the channel’s compressor/limiter
is active; it can also be configured to be active in De-Esser mode.

OLED Display, Local View Mode Local view mode is also referred to as ‘Mini Vistonics’ view. When pressing,
e.g., the EQ key in the central section’s FUNCTION area, it is illuminated in
red. If selecting now any of the channels by pressing its SEL key, the light
bars at the bottom of the channel OLED displays are illuminated in red as
well. Only this channel’s label is displayed, and its SEL key is illuminated
now. All other channel labels are blanked, so that the user clearly sees what
he adjusts and in which channel. The parameters of this particular channel are
displayed on the OLED displays and can be adjusted with the corresponding
rotary encoders. The different parameters can be switched on or off using the
corresponding keys. Inactive parameters are indicated by greying them
out. If a complete parameter set such as the EQ section can also be switched
on/off as a whole, always the key at the far right is used for this purpose.
If a function has more than six parameters – such as the EQ or DYN sections
– pressing its oval key successively toggles through all available parameter
‘pages’. This whole process is very intuitive, just have a go with it! For more
details refer to chapter 5.2.2.

Date printed: 13.04.12 SW V4.1 Operating Elements  4-5

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

4.2 Central Section

4.2.1 FUNCTION Controls (‘Rotary Assign Keys’)

Rectangular Keys The four rectangular keys in the top row - INPUT, GAIN/CAL, 1 and 2) are
used for input routing, gain/cal and AUX bus 1/2 settings. Less important
functions without dedicated keys – such as pan(orama) or bal(ance) – are
selected with the 34 rotary knob in the FUNCTION field. These elements
assign so-called ‘global views’ to the channel OLED display and to the key
and rotary knob directly below it.

The single OFF AIR key activates the off-air recording functionality for all
channels that are in REC mode. This is an exclusive routing to the recording
bus, in contrary to a simple bus routing to a recording output in parallel to
the program output.

4-6  Operating Elements SW V4.1 Date printed: 13.04.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Oval Keys The oval keys in the FUNCTION area (INPUT, DEES, EQ, DYN, 1-4, ASN)
are dedicated to assign functions to the encoders and their keys in the fader
strips. The function of the key depends on the selected parameter and can
be, e.g., On/Off or Enter.
When pressing, e.g. the oval EQ key, it is illuminated in red. If selecting now
one of the channels by pressing its SEL key, the light bars at the bottom of
the channel OLED displays are illuminated in red as well. This is called local
view mode (nicknamed ‘Mini Vistonics’).
Only the selected channel’s label is displayed, and its SEL key is illuminated
now. All other channel labels are blanked. The parameters of this particular
channel are displayed on the OLED displays and can be adjusted with the
corresponding rotary encoders. The different parameters can be switched on
or off using the corresponding keys. Inactive parameters are indicated by
greying them out. If a complete parameter set such as the EQ section can also
be switched on/off as a whole, always the key at the far right is used for
this purpose.
If a function has more than six parameters – such the EQ or DYN – pressing
its oval key successively toggles through all available parameter ‘pages’. This
whole process is very intuitive, just have a go with it! For more details refer
to chapter 5.2.2.

4.2.2 MASTER Controls

There is one master rotary control in this section for setting the N–X 1-4 bus
send levels (or AUX send levels, if configured). Its function can be assigned
to the desired bus with the 1-4 keys. The send level of the currently selected
bus is displayed by the LED ring around the rotary control; if the user has
no access to send levels the red LED at the bottom of the ring is on. In addi-
tion, the currently selected bus can be switched on/off with the ON key and
switched to mono with the MONO key; these keys are illuminated if active.
The PGM and REC bus send levels can be set on the GUI’s Sum - Master
page (refer to chapter 5.12.3.1), or with a dedicated fader if configured.

4.2.3 MONITORING and Talkback Controls

The monitoring section primarily controls the control room (CR) and studio
monitoring. Two rotary controls with LED rings by default set and indicate
the volumes of the DJ headphones and the CR monitor loudspeakers.
CR/ST Shifts the whole monitoring section to control the studio monitoring, if illu-
minated; all functions indicated are now displaying the studio settings.
By pressing the momentary keys below the rotary controls, their functions
are modified to control:
SP The volume of the built-in PFL speaker
TB RET The volume of the talkback return signal
GUEST HP The volume of the guest headphones.
HP SPLIT Activates split mode for the DJ headphones – where the left ear listens to
mono PFL, and the right ear follows the mono monitoring source.
6.3 mm TRS jack sockets for the DJ and Guest headphones as well as line
outputs dedicated to CR and studio monitoring are available on the core.
CUT Cuts (mutes) the monitor loudspeakers if pressed, or indicates a cut event if
illuminated.

Date printed: 13.04.12 SW V4.1 Operating Elements  4-7

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

DIM Dims (attenuates) the monitor loudspeakers if pressed, or indicates a dim

event if illuminated.
MONO Sets the monitor loudspeaker signal to mono if pressed.
PFL TO MON If active, the PFL signal is switched to monitoring as soon as at least one
channel PFL key is activated.
CR/ST Shifts the whole monitoring section to control the studio monitoring, if illu-
minated; all functions indicated are now displaying the studio settings.

The 24 square keys in the lower part of this section have transparent snap-on
caps; if their functions need to be re-configured, corresponding transparent
labels (i.e. printed onto OHP transparencies) may be inserted below the caps.
The factory default configuration is as follows:
Monitoring Source Selectors:
PGM, REC, OFF AIR, PFL For listening to the PGM, REC, OFF AIR, and PFL busses.
1-4 For listening to the AUX and N–X busses.
Talkback Destination Selectors:
TB ST For communication to the studio,
TB EXT to an external line, and
TB 1, TB 2 to the AUX1 and AUX2 busses.
Jingle Player Keys: For selecting two different station identifier jingles (JINGLE 1 and JINGLE
2) and sound effects (such as APPLAUSE and BOOing sounds) from a USB
stick plugged to the core.
Snapshot Keys: SNAP 1-SNAP 4 For recalling and saving snapshots. These keys have to be pressed while LOAD
SNAP or LOAD SNAP is held.
LOAD SNAP For loading a global snapshot from the console’s memory to the desk.
SAVE SNAP For saving the current console settings in a private user snapshot.

SYS MSG Whenever there is a system message from the console (such as a user warning
or an error message), this key starts flashing. If pressing it, the OLED display
next to the 34 rotary knob will display the corresponding help or error
information. Should more than one message be active, they can be recalled
one after the other by multiple presses of SYS MSG. Once all messages have
been displayed, the key becomes dark again.

4.2.4 Meter Bridge

The most important section of the meter bridge is the one with the PROGRAM
and MONITOR level meters. Both are 29-segment stereo bargraph meters
with an additional correlation display. 6 different meter characteristics may
be configured (but only identical characteristics for both the PROGRAM and
MONITOR meters are possible). A yellow correlation meter bargraph is avail-
able in both PROGRAM and MONITOR level meter fields.
The ON AIR, CR and ST lamps indicate red light conditions.
The 7-segment display normally indicates time-of-day but can be switched
over to act either as a fader or user stop watch or a countdown timer (refer to
chapter 5.8).

4-8  Operating Elements SW V4.1 Date printed: 13.04.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Note: The USB player/recorder keys (PGM BUS, REC BUS, REC=, STOP;/<,
REC INFO) are supported since SW V4.1. For details refer to chapter 5.15.

Level Meter Characteristics:

One out of six different meter characteristics can be selected for the main
level meters. The selection is performed with the configuration tool.
Available characteristics: PPM DIN (peak program meter), NordicAnalog,
NordicDigital, VU Standard, British Standard or Digital FS (full scale) meter.
Additional, red clipping indicators are provided at the top of the LED bar-
graphs.
PPM DIN

NordicAnalog

NordicDigital

British Standard, L/R Mode

British Standard, M/S Mode

VU Standard

Digital FS

Note: For the Digital FS meter scale, the transition between the green and red areas
depends on the current headroom setting; the picture above shows the default
headroom setting of 9 dB.

Correlation Meter: The correlation meter gives a clear indication of the signal’s mono com-
patibility. The higher (i.e. the more positive) the indication, the better the
compatibility. In case of a strong and persistent negative indication, a phase
inversion problem may be present.

Meter Scale Labels: For each of the meter characteristics two self-adhesive meter scale labels are
provided. Attach the desired labels in the two meter recesses.
Proceed with care – labels once attached are difficult to be removed without
! damaging the surface of the LED bargraph modules or the label itself. If you
are sure that the label will have to be changed sometime, you may want to
consider either not to fix it at all by attaching it on a thin, transparent material
such as OHP transparency film and laying it into its recess (however it may

Date printed: 13.04.12 SW V4.1 Operating Elements  4-9

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

get lost in this case), or by attaching it with a thin, transparent, double-sided

adhesive tape that can easily be removed (such as Scotch® Poster Tape).

If a label needs to be removed after the adhesive has settled, there are two
possibilities. In both cases first power the console off and disconnect the 2
cables at the desk’s rear.
• If you don’t mind losing the label, cut it in two parts with a sharp knife at
about 16-17 mm from the right-hand edge (there is a narrow gap between
the level and correlation bargraph modules underneath the label). The two
parts can be peeled off easier then. Residual adhesive on the bargraph mod-
ules can easily be rubbed off (with your fingers or a soft vinyl eraser) or
patted away with some adhesive tape. Do not use any solvent for cleaning
the bargraph modules!
• If you want to retain the label, the procedure is somewhat more complicated
and requires removing the desk’s top panel.
- Remove the front, rear and side trim strips (or rack mount hardware –
Allen key no. 3).
- Pull off all rotary and fader knobs and set all fader sliders to approx.
their center position. Cover your work surface with a clean layer of soft
material such as foam rubber and place the desk upside-down on it.
- Remove the 20 screws accessible through the holes in the bottom cover
and lift it off (Allen key no. 2.5). The smaller screws (Allen key no. 2)
fix the cross brace to the bottom cover and should not be removed.
- The large PCB is fixed to the top panel with several latches at its edges.
Start in one corner and manually unclip the latches one by one while
carefully lifting the PCB up. Once the PCB is completeley loose it can
be flipped over.
- Thoroughly heat the label to approx. 50-60 °C (120-140 °F) with a hair
dryer before attempting to remove it. Pulling it away very slowly may
help that most of the adhesive remains on the label.
- Store the label on the label sheet for later use. Any residual adhesive
on the bargraph modules can easily be rubbed off (with your fingers
or a soft vinyl eraser) or patted away with some adhesive tape. Do not
use any solvent for cleaning the bargraph modules!
- Reassembly is in the opposite order. Make sure to set the fader sliders
to approx. their center position before positioning the PCB in the top
panel. When inserting the screws make sure that they smoothly fit into
their threads by turning them counterclockwise first until you hear/
feel a click. Then turn clockwise to tighten them – but don’t overdo it.
Remember: Right after very tight comes very loose :-)

4-10  Operating Elements SW V4.1 Date printed: 13.04.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

4.3 Compact Monitoring/TB Box

This box allows connecting up to 32 additional monitoring places for roles

or functions in the studio environment who need to select monitoring sources
and talkback functions, such as the Producer, Presenter or Studio Manager.
Versions with or without a level control knob are available.
It may also be regarded as an intercom system built into the console. For
handling the corresponding audio signals, additional headphone boxes are
available.

Date printed: 13.04.12 SW V4.1 Operating Elements  4-11

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

4-12  Operating Elements SW V4.1 Date printed: 13.04.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

CHAPTER 5

5 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................. 5

5.1 Mouse and Keyboard Operation (Advanced Users Only)........................................................................................... 5

5.2 User Login................................................................................................................................................................... 6
5.3 Desk Operation............................................................................................................................................................ 8
5.3.1 Global View........................................................................................................................................................... 8
5.3.1.1 Global View Operation.................................................................................................................................... 10
5.3.2 Local View Operation.......................................................................................................................................... 13
5.3.2.1 Input Local Views............................................................................................................................................ 14
5.3.2.2 DEES (De-Esser) Local Views........................................................................................................................ 16
5.3.2.3 EQ (Equalizer) Local Views............................................................................................................................ 17
5.3.2.4 DYN (Dynamics) Local Views........................................................................................................................ 18
5.3.2.5 1-4 (AUX / N–X Bus Send) Local View......................................................................................................... 20
5.3.2.6 ASN (Bus Assignment) Local View................................................................................................................ 20
5.4 Monitoring, Talkback................................................................................................................................................. 21
5.4.1 Control Room Monitoring................................................................................................................................... 21
5.4.2 Studio Monitoring................................................................................................................................................ 23
5.4.3 Talkback............................................................................................................................................................... 24
5.5 Signaling.................................................................................................................................................................... 25
5.6 Snapshots................................................................................................................................................................... 26
5.6.1 Basic Snapshot Operation.................................................................................................................................... 26
5.6.2 Extended Snapshots (Advanced Users Only)...................................................................................................... 26
5.6.2.1 Snapshot Files.................................................................................................................................................. 26
5.6.2.2 Saving Initial Snapshots.................................................................................................................................. 27
5.6.2.3 Snapshot File Contents.................................................................................................................................... 27
5.6.2.3.1 Initial Snapshots............................................................................................................................................................27
5.6.2.3.2 User Snapshots..............................................................................................................................................................28
5.6.2.4 External Media................................................................................................................................................ 28
5.6.2.5 Snapshot Operation Details............................................................................................................................. 29
5.6.2.6 Snapshot/Ext. Media Operation Details.......................................................................................................... 30
5.6.2.7 Snapshots During Login.................................................................................................................................. 32
5.6.2.8 Snapshots During Power-up............................................................................................................................ 32
5.6.2.9 User Warnings................................................................................................................................................. 32
5.7 Routing...................................................................................................................................................................... 33
5.7.1 Audio Routing...................................................................................................................................................... 33
5.7.1.1 Physical Audio Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................................ 33
5.7.1.2 Logical Audio Inputs....................................................................................................................................... 34
5.7.1.3 Logical Audio Outputs.................................................................................................................................... 35
5.7.2 Channel Format.................................................................................................................................................... 35
5.7.3 Routing Protection............................................................................................................................................... 35
5.7.4 Routing Operation................................................................................................................................................ 36
5.7.5 Hot-Swapping...................................................................................................................................................... 37
5.8 Watch and Stopwatches............................................................................................................................................. 38
5.8.1 Watch.................................................................................................................................................................... 38
5.8.2 Fader Stopwatch................................................................................................................................................... 38
5.8.3 User Stopwatch.................................................................................................................................................... 39
5.8.4 Countdown Timer................................................................................................................................................ 39
5.8.5 GUI Watches........................................................................................................................................................ 40
5.8.5.1 Time and Date Setting..................................................................................................................................... 40
5.8.5.2 Watch Configuration........................................................................................................................................ 40
5.8.5.3 Fader Stopwatches........................................................................................................................................... 41

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-1

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.9 User Access and Management (Advanced Users Only)............................................................................................ 42

5.9.1 Purpose................................................................................................................................................................. 42
5.9.2 General................................................................................................................................................................. 42
5.9.3 Users..................................................................................................................................................................... 42
5.9.4 Privileges.............................................................................................................................................................. 43
5.9.5 Policies................................................................................................................................................................. 43
5.9.6 Department Snapshots.......................................................................................................................................... 43
5.9.7 Parameters............................................................................................................................................................ 44
5.9.8 Internal Access Handling .................................................................................................................................... 48
5.9.8.1 User GUI......................................................................................................................................................... 48
5.9.8.2 Desk................................................................................................................................................................. 49
5.9.8.3 Configuration Tool........................................................................................................................................... 49
5.9.8.4 Other Extensions............................................................................................................................................. 49
5.9.9 Central User Management................................................................................................................................... 49
5.9.9.1 Principles......................................................................................................................................................... 50
5.9.9.2 Standalone Systems......................................................................................................................................... 50
5.9.9.3 In Case of a Failure.......................................................................................................................................... 50
5.10 External Audio Synchronization (Advanced Users Only)......................................................................................... 51
5.11 Diagnostics (Advanced Users Only)......................................................................................................................... 51
5.11.1 Error Handling..................................................................................................................................................... 51
5.11.1.1 Principle........................................................................................................................................................... 51
5.11.1.2 Error Types...................................................................................................................................................... 52
5.11.1.3 Log System...................................................................................................................................................... 52
5.11.2 System Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................. 52
5.11.3 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)................................................................................................. 53
5.11.3.1 Requirements for SNMP Operation................................................................................................................. 54
5.11.4 Error Messages..................................................................................................................................................... 55
5.11.4.1 System............................................................................................................................................................. 55
5.11.4.2 Core Driver...................................................................................................................................................... 55
5.11.4.3 I/O 21 .............................................................................................................................................................. 56
5.11.4.4 GPIO Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 56
5.11.4.5 Desk / User GUI / Configuration Tool ........................................................................................................... 57
5.11.4.6 Snapshot Handling........................................................................................................................................... 57
5.11.4.7 Routing............................................................................................................................................................ 58
5.11.4.8 System (a)........................................................................................................................................................ 58
5.11.4.9 Option Manager............................................................................................................................................... 58
5.11.4.10 System (b)........................................................................................................................................................ 58
5.11.4.11 CAB Extension................................................................................................................................................ 59
5.11.4.12 ProBel Controller Extension............................................................................................................................ 59
5.11.4.13 CMS Controller Extension.............................................................................................................................. 59
5.11.4.14 I/O Sharing...................................................................................................................................................... 59
5.11.4.15 Backup/Restore................................................................................................................................................ 60
5.11.4.16 Custom Logic ................................................................................................................................................. 60
5.11.4.17 Time Sync ....................................................................................................................................................... 60
5.11.4.18 Audio Clock .................................................................................................................................................... 60
5.12 GUI Operation (Advanced Users Only).................................................................................................................... 61
5.12.1 Home Page........................................................................................................................................................... 61
5.12.2 Channel Pages...................................................................................................................................................... 63
5.12.2.1 Input Page........................................................................................................................................................ 63
5.12.2.2 De-Esser Page.................................................................................................................................................. 69
5.12.2.3 Equalizer Page................................................................................................................................................. 70
5.12.2.4 Dynamics Page................................................................................................................................................ 71
5.12.2.5 AUX Page........................................................................................................................................................ 72
5.12.2.6 N–X Page......................................................................................................................................................... 73
5.12.2.7 FDR/Bus Page................................................................................................................................................. 74

5-2  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.3 Sum Pages............................................................................................................................................................ 76

5.12.3.1 Master Page..................................................................................................................................................... 76
5.12.3.2 AUX Page........................................................................................................................................................ 77
5.12.3.3 N–X Pages....................................................................................................................................................... 78
5.12.4 Monitoring Pages................................................................................................................................................. 79
5.12.4.1 CR (Control Room) Page................................................................................................................................ 79
5.12.4.2 CR LSP (Loudspeakers) Page......................................................................................................................... 80
5.12.4.3 CR HP (Headphones) Page.............................................................................................................................. 80
5.12.4.4 CR CUE Page.................................................................................................................................................. 81
5.12.4.5 Studio 2 Page................................................................................................................................................... 82
5.12.4.6 TB SP Page...................................................................................................................................................... 83
5.12.5 Routing Pages...................................................................................................................................................... 84
5.12.5.1 Input Page........................................................................................................................................................ 84
5.12.5.2 Output Page..................................................................................................................................................... 85
5.12.5.3 Insert Page....................................................................................................................................................... 86
5.12.5.4 Mic Group Page............................................................................................................................................... 87
5.12.5.5 XL Assign Page............................................................................................................................................... 88
5.12.5.6 Bus Assign Page.............................................................................................................................................. 89
5.12.6 Snapshot Pages .................................................................................................................................................... 90
5.12.6.1 Shot Page......................................................................................................................................................... 90
5.12.6.2 Route Page (‘Partial Output Routing’)............................................................................................................ 91
5.12.6.3 EXT Page ........................................................................................................................................................ 92
5.12.7 Admin (System Administrator) Pages ................................................................................................................. 93
5.12.7.1 Brightness Page............................................................................................................................................... 93
5.12.7.2 Fader Cal Page................................................................................................................................................. 94
5.12.7.3 Firmware Page................................................................................................................................................. 95
5.12.7.4 Date Time Page................................................................................................................................................ 96
5.12.7.5 Config Page..................................................................................................................................................... 97
5.12.7.6 SCRN CAL Page (not available for OnAir 1500)........................................................................................... 98
5.12.7.7 Setup Page....................................................................................................................................................... 99
5.12.7.8 GEN Page...................................................................................................................................................... 101
5.12.8 Login Page......................................................................................................................................................... 102
5.12.9 Screen Level Meters........................................................................................................................................... 103
5.13 RELINK (Advanced Users Only)............................................................................................................................ 105
5.14 External Router Control .......................................................................................................................................... 105
5.14.1 Operation ........................................................................................................................................................... 106
5.14.2 Interactions......................................................................................................................................................... 107
5.14.3 Configuration..................................................................................................................................................... 108
5.15 USB Player/Recorder............................................................................................................................................... 109
5.15.1 Basics................................................................................................................................................................. 109
5.15.1.1 Supported Audio Files................................................................................................................................... 110
5.15.1.2 Files and File Names..................................................................................................................................... 110
5.15.1.3 Memory Formatting....................................................................................................................................... 111
5.15.2 Physical I/O........................................................................................................................................................ 111
5.15.3 Jingle Player Operation...................................................................................................................................... 112
5.15.4 Track Recorder Operation.................................................................................................................................. 113
5.15.5 Track Player Operation...................................................................................................................................... 114
5.15.5.1 Track Selection.............................................................................................................................................. 115
5.15.5.2 Track Pre-Listening....................................................................................................................................... 116
5.15.5.3 Track Playback.............................................................................................................................................. 116
5.16 Remote Operation.................................................................................................................................................... 118
5.16.1 Preparation......................................................................................................................................................... 118
5.16.2 System Viewer Application................................................................................................................................ 118
5.16.3 Remote Console Application............................................................................................................................. 120
5.16.4 Remote Configuration Tool................................................................................................................................ 124
5.16.4.1 Login USB Stick............................................................................................................................................ 128

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-3

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5-4  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5 Operation
The user surface is based on the desk hardware. In case an additional GUI is
desired, a DVI monitor screen and a USB keyboard/mouse can be connected
to the Nano SCore, in the same way as for the initial console setup.
The standard OnAir 1500 operating mode makes use of the direct access keys
supported by the OLED displays in the fader strip. The very same parameters
can be accessed by going through the menu pages on the external screen and
selecting the desired channel there.
In addition to these hardware elements on the desk and the optional GUI,
the OnAir 1500 can also be operated by a PC or laptop computer running
Windows 2000 or XP, remotely emulating the OnAir 1500 user GUI over a
network. All hardware controls, such as keys and rotary encoder emulations
(except the user stopwatch START and STOP keys) are available in the remote
GUI and can also be operated with a mouse device. This is convenient for
service personnel, but may also be thought of as a further redundancy scenario
for the desk hardware.

5.1 Mouse and Keyboard Operation (Advanced Users Only)

For the initial setup, the console must be operated from an external USB
keyboard and mouse, together with a DVI monitor screen. Experience showed
that an (S)VGA monitor with a DVI adapter will not work. The screen display
will be familiar for users having operated the OnAir 2500 or OnAir 3000
systems before, except that the external screen doesn’t feature the touch func-
tionality. The following rules apply for operation:

Button ‘Touch’ Left-click (e.g. for user login, or for switching phase inversion on the CHAN
Input page on/off, as shown left).
List Selection Either right-click on the desired item (e.g. selection from the snapshot list),
or use the rotary emulation mode, as described below.
Routing Matrix On every routing page displaying the routing matrix (input, output, mic group,
bus assign) a cross point is quickly selected by a right-click. Rotary emulation
mode can be used as well, as described below.
Rotary Emulation Set the mouse pointer to the black field, hold the right mouse button down,
and move the mouse left or right in order to change the displayed value or to
select from a list (e.g. on the SNAP or ROUT pages).
Scroll Bars
Scroll bars are displayed in the user GUI and also in the configuration tool
whenever the screen cannot display all items. They can be moved by left-
clicking-and-holding the mouse pointer on the bar followed by a mouse
movement, as known from Windows operation.
In case of selection lists with a vertical scroll bar, also the mouse wheel is
supported for scrolling the list.
Keyboard Entries Enter the desired label, user name, or password etc., either by clicking with
the left mouse button on the on-screen keyboard or with the external key-
board. Please note that the /Shift and Caps Lock functions of screen and
external keyboards are independent; this is important when entering user
passwords. Confirm with Enter, cancel with Esc.
On the screen keyboard, Caps Lock is active (i.e., dark) by default, as shown
left. Please note that the shift function activated by the Shift button on the
screen is automatically canceled after having entered one character.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-5

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Window Size When the configuration tool is displayed on the external screen, the page
windows may be minimized, maximized, or resized, as commonly known
from standard Windows operation: By double-clicking on the window’s title
bar, or by clicking on the (minimize), (maximize), or (restore down)
buttons in the window’s upper right corner. Window size may also be con-
tinuously varied by dragging its edge or frame to the desired size.

External USB Keyboard

For the keyboard layout, the language settings made with the configuration
tool under User GUI... – Settings – Keyboard Layout are valid (for the
time being, English US and Danish are provided for selection). This is
independent of how the keyboard’s keys are labeled. Factory default setting:
English US.
When using the external keyboard, some extended functionality is available,
such as expanding/collapsing items in the configuration menu tree with the
arrow keys, or the copy/paste function using the Windows standard keyboard
shortcuts Ctrl-C and Ctrl-V; this is convenient when entering multiple, similar
labels or user names.
Please note that the /Shift and Caps Lock functions of the on-screen key-
board and the one connected via USB are independent; this is particularly
important when entering passwords since these are case-sensitive.

Details For further details on console operation with external screen, mouse and
keyboard please refer to chapter 5.12.

5.2 User Login

It is presumed that during normal operation neither screen nor keyboard/
mouse are connected to the OnAir 1500 system. Without them, user login
from the user GUI is not possible. The default user is automatically selected
when powering the console on.
Since SW V4.1 there is a second, convenient option available for users to
login using a USB memory stick.

Important Not all USB sticks are recognized by the system if plugged in before or during
! start-up. The USB stick shipped with the console permits start-up recognition;
it is recommended therefor that this stick is used for login.
In case two different login USB sticks are connected to the system, the last
one ‘wins’.
A USB stick intended for user login must contain a file named Login.ID.
For creating this file the Remote Config Tool is required, refer to chapter
5.16.4.1.

Each time the USB stick containing the login information is plugged into
or removed from the DATA / LOGIN USB socket, the user is automatically
logged in/out. The user name and his last loaded snapshot are displayed for
a few seconds in the FUNCTION OLED display after logging in. If a default
snapshot was saved for this user, it is automatically loaded to the desk as well.

5-6  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

This information can also be displayed during operation by pressing the

FUNCTION rotary knob.

When logging out (i.e. pulling out the login USB stick), the system auto-
matically activates the default user. The previously loaded console snapshot
remains active.

If a screen is connected to the system, the user currently logged in is also
shown on the Home page. Upon login the screen automatically changes to
the Home page regardless of what has been displayed before.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-7

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.3 Desk Operation

Note: Most of the following functions are available for users with appropriate access
rights only, as defined by the system administrator.
For desk operating elements please refer to chapter 4 and to the printed OnAir
1500 Quick Start Guide shipped with your console.

5.3.1 Global View

The OLED display in the channel strip normally is in global view mode; i.e.

it displays what is selected with one of the four rectangular FUNCTION keys
or the 34 rotary knob in the central section. If a logical input is routed to the
channel strip, it indicates the channel label, the second label (which normally
is blanked except in I/O sharing mode or during input routing), input level
and gain reduction bar graphs, and the graph as well as the function currently
assigned to the rotary knob (‘rotary parameter’).

Channel Label / (Value)

Second Label

Level Meter Rotary Graph

Rotary Parameter
Gain Reduction Meter
Colour Bar

As long as the rotary knob is touched, the channel label displays the current
parameter value.
Note: There is a function called ‘screen saver’ available for the OLED displays. It
automatically reduces the display’s brightness after a configurable period of
time. The original brightness is restored as soon as a desk key is operated or a
touch-sensitive knob is touched. Using this function is strongly recommended
in order to increase the lifetime of the OLED channel displays.

5-8  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Channel Label The 8-digit channel label area normally indicates the (local or remote) channel
label if a logical input is assigned to the channel strip. As long as its rotary
knob is touched, the display shows the current parameter value, depending
on the selected function.

Rotary Touch

Second Label The 2nd label area is used exclusively for indication of the I/O sharing
producer system name. It is blanked as long as the rotary is touched, except
during input channel routing.

Rotary Parameter The rotary parameter area indicates the parameter name if a rotary function
is assigned to this channel.

Rotary Graph The rotary graph area shows a graphical representation of the value of the
assigned rotary function.

Level Meter A small bar graph input level meter is provided in each channel’s OLED
display, either indicating the input level, or the N–X or AUX send level of
the channel (configurable). The value indicated on the meter is depending on
the console’s headroom setting (default value: 0 dB indication for –9 dBFS).

N–X or AUX Send Level Indication: In this mode the level meter indicates the N–X or the AUX send level of the
channel.
Overload Indication, Analog Inputs: As soon as one sample at an analog input reaches full scale modulation, the
overload indicator is on for approx. 300 ms (the idea is that the probability
of an A/D converter reaching full scale without any clipping is close to zero.
Any full scale levels within the path are considered to be overloads).
Overload Indication, Digital Inputs: Full scale modulation at a digital input is not considered to be an overload – it
is simply the output level of a source.
Overload Indication, REC/PGM Outputs:
If one sample of an output signal reaches full scale, the corresponding over­
load indication is on for approx. 300 ms.
Auto Take-Over Indication: The physical value and the internal, processed value of the fader may be dif-
ferent. This can be the case after routing, snapshot, or CAB changes. If the
values are different, auto take-over mode is enabled. The channel display
indicates by FDR UP or FDR DOWN in which direction the fader knob
has to be moved. As soon as the fader knob has been moved a bit, the display
changes to a numerical value, such as -15 UP or 27 DOWN. When the
fader position matches the internal value, TAKEOVER flashes three times;
the whole process is quite self-explanatory.

Gain Reduction Meter The narrow, upside-down bar graph in each channel’s OLED display is used
as a gain reduction meter. It is activated if the channel’s compressor/limiter
is active; it can also be configured to be active in De-Esser mode.

Colour Bar The colour bar is only active (illuminated) in the OLED local view (see
below).

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-9

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.3.1.1 Global View Operation

In global view all OLED displays show the same parameter for every channel
strip, while the light bar below the OLED displays remains dark. Any changes
to settings as well as the currently active global view will automatically be
reset to the default values (i.e. N-X bus 1) when powering the console off
and on again. Individual settings may, of course, be saved in a user snapshot
if they should remain available for later use.
For selecting the most important global views, four dedicated desk keys
(INPUT, GAIN/CAL, 1, 2) are provided in the FUNCTION desk area. More
global views are available by turning the 34 rotary knob.

Input Channel Routing

In order to select an input signal for a channel, first press INPUT in the
FUNCTION field. Input channel routing is a three-step process intended for
assigning (‘routing’) physical inputs to fader strips.
If the rotary graph field in the desired channel’s OLED display shows the
normal matrix symbol, this channel is enabled for input routing.
If the matrix symbol in the rotary graph field is crossed out, input routing is
disabled since the channel strip is either locked or virtual.
Touch the rotary knob of the desired channel strip and turn it in order to
select one of the displayed input source groups (such as MIC in the example
below).
Rotary Touch
and Turn

To select, press the illuminated key. Then turn the rotary knob again
to select the desired input source from this group (such as MIC 4 in the
example below).

If the rotary graph field shows the adjacent symbol, the selected input is
not yet assigned to a channel strip. A short* press on the illuminated key
assigns the signal to the corresponding channel strip.
The selected input is already assigned to a channel strip on the desk, it will
be swapped against the current channel strip by a short* press on the lighted
key.
The selected input is not yet assigned to a channel strip; however, it cannot
be assigned or swapped for one of the following reasons:
• the input currently assigned to the strip is on-air
• the selected channel strip is locked, or
• there are not sufficient DSP channels available.
*Note: There is an additional function here for your convenience: After selecting
an input signal as described above and e.g. MIC 4 is displayed, but you
would rather select a signal from a different group (such as AES 3/4 from
the AES/EBU inputs), you would have to wait for approx. 5 seconds until
the display switches back to group selection. When pressing the key for
longer than approx. 1 second instead, the display switches back immediately.

5-10  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Input Gain / Calibration In order to set input gain or calibration for a channel, first press GAIN/CAL in
the FUNCTION field. For local microphone inputs, gain mode is displayed.
The rotary knob adjusts either the input gain level for local microphone
inputs, or the calibration level for non-microphone inputs as well as shared
mic inputs. The key has no function in this case.
Gain Mode:
Rotary Touch

Cal(ibration) mode is displayed instead of gain mode for analog line and digi-
tal inputs. It allows adjusting the calibration level in a range of ±18 dB. Also
when accessing a shared microphone input (i.e., consuming a microphone
signal from a remote system, see chapter 5.13), gain mode automatically
switches over to local cal mode since an input gain on a remote system must
not be modified.
Calibration Mode:
Rotary Touch

AUX / N–X Contribution Level The contribution and level setting of the desk channels to the busses no. 1 or
2 is selected with the 1 or 2 keys in the FUNCTION field. The N–X busses
no. 3 and 4 have no dedicated desk keys but can be selected with the 34
rotary knob anyway. The busses no. 1 and 2 are configured as AUX busses,
no. 1 is pre-, bus no. 2 is after-fader by default.
Note: By default, the cannels’ contributions to the two (AUX) busses no. 1 and 2
are switched off and set to –¥ (Mute), the ones to the two (N–X) busses no.
3 and 4 are switched on and set to 0 dB.
The corresponding keys switch the contribution to the selected bus on/off.
The rotary graph is greyed out if switched off, but the adjusted value remains
displayed. If the bus contribution is switched on, the display is highlighted,
and the key and the corresponding LEDs 1 to 4 in the channel strip’s LED
field are lighted. For busses configured as AUX these LEDs are lighted in
amber, as N–X in yellow.

Rotary Touch

The default bus configuration (N–X or AUX pre-/after fader) can be changed
using the configuration tool.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-11

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Panorama / Balance In order to set input pan (L/R panning, for mono channels) or balance (for
stereo channels), first use the 34 rotary knob in the FUNCTION field to
select PAN/BAL mode. The channel rotary knob then adjusts panning or
balance, both in 30 steps to the left or right from the center position. Using
the corresponding key, balance or panning is set to the adjusted value (on,
key is lighted) or to center position (off, key is dark, rotary graph is greyed
out), while the adjusted value remains displayed.

Rotary Touch

PGM A Bus Assignment In order to change the channels contributing to the PGM A bus, first use the
34 rotary knob in the FUNCTION field to select PGM A mode. The chan-
nel strip key switches the contribution to the bus on (key is lighted) or off.
The rotary knob has no function in this mode.

Note: Since the N–X busses (bus no. 3 and 4) contain the PGM A signal minus
the signal of the own channel, this channel contributes nothing to an N–X
bus when the channel’s contribution to PGM A is switched off. All N–X bus
LEDs (3 and 4) in the channel’s LED field become dark together with the
one labeled PGM.

Fader Stopwatch (Timer) Setting For activating the fader stopwatch of a channel, first use the 34 rotary knob
in the FUNCTION field to select TM SEL mode. The channel strip key
activates (key is lighted) or deactivates the channel fader stopwatch. The
channel rotary knob has no function in this mode.

Only one channel can have the fader stopwatch active. When selecting the
fader stopwatch with the FADER key below the 7-segment display in the meter
bridge section. The stopwatch starts at 00:00:00 as soon as the channel goes
on air (i.e., fader opened and channel switched ON). When closing the fader
or switching the channel off, the stopwatch stops. The next time the channel
goes on air, the stopwatch restarts at 00:00:00.

OFF (Clear Displays) The OFF global view can be used to clear the displays; only the channel label
and the input level/GRM meters remain.

5-12  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12
 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.3.2 Local View Operation

Note:
Most of the following functions are available for users with appropriate access
rights only, as defined by the system administrator.
In the local view (also nicknamed ‘Mini Vistonics’), a set of up to six param-
eters is displayed for one selected channel. Selection is done by first select-
ing one of the oval local view functions in the FUNCTION area followed by
pressing the desired channel’s SEL key that will illuminate afterwards. The
oval local view key – the DEES key in the example below – is illuminated in
its function group’s colour, the light bars at the bottom of the channel OLED
windows are illuminated in the same colour for a clear indication of what is
currently shown. Colours correspond to the convention given below.
Blue Input functions, including high-pass filter and test generator
Green Dynamics and De-Esser functions
Red Equalizer (EQ) functions
Orange AUX functions
Yellow Fader and bus functions, including sums and N–X.
These colours are repeated on a GUI screen if one should be connected to the
system; however the screen display will not automatically follow the selected
channel.

Only this channel’s label (e.g. LINE 7/8) and only this channel’s input
level and gain reduction meters are displayed while local view is active.
AutoTakeover indication is suppressed in local view mode.

The current parameters, according to the selected function group, are dis-
played at the bottom of the OLED displays, while their values are indicated in
the center line (2nd label area). While the rotary knobs are touched or turned,
the parameter value jumps into the label area. The OLED display’s graph area
gives a graphical representation of the current parameter and value (such as
center frequency, boost/cut, threshold setting etc.).
The example above shows the de-esser adjustment selected for the 6th channel
strip; this strip’s SEL key is illuminated. The key of this channel strip is
used to switch the de-esser on and off, it is illuminated if on; if off, the on/
off display is dimmed.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-13

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Parameter sets of functions consisting of more than 6 parameters (such as EQ

or Dynamics) can be toggled through using their oval local view key.
Local view can be switched over to a next channel directly with this channel’s
SEL key, or canceled by pressing the currently active SEL key again.

5.3.2.1 Input Local Views

Local View 1 for a Microphone Input:

Input Channel Routing * Generator Phase CAL

ON/OFF Normal/Inverted Level

* Input Channel Routing The local view input channel routing works exactly as described in chapter
5.3.1.1 ‘Global View Operation’.
Generator ON/OFF To switch the test generator ON and OFF; the key is illuminated if ON;
default setting is OFF.
Phase Normal/Inverted Phase inversion; the key is illuminated if inverted; default setting is normal.
CAL (Calibration) Level The input level calibration value can be adjusted from –18 to + 18 dB in
0.5 dB steps; default setting: 0 dB.

Local View 2 for a Microphone Input:

Input Phantom HP Filter

Gain ON/OFF ON/OFF

Input Gain Input gain setting of this channel from –5 to +58 dB in 1 dB steps; default
setting: 0 dB.
Phantom ON/OFF Activation of the +48 V phantom power of this channel; the key (and the
red LED next to the corresponding XLR input socket) is illuminated if ON;
default setting is OFF.
HP Filter ON/OFF Switches an analog high-pass (low-cut) filter into the signal path; the key
is illuminated if ON; default setting is OFF.

5-14  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Local View 1 for a Stereo Analogue Line or Digital Input (e.g. USB or AES/EBU):

Input Channel Routing * Generator Generator Phase Stereo/ Stereo CAL

ON/OFF Routing Normal/Inv. Mono Mode Level

* Input Channel Routing The local view input channel routing works exactly as described in chapter
5.3.1.1 ‘Global View Operation’.
Generator ON/OFF To switch the test generator ON and OFF; the key is illuminated if ON;
default setting is OFF.
Generator Routing For stereo inputs it can be selected to which channel the generator signal is
routed: To none (None), left channel only (L), right channel only (R) or to
both the left and right channel (L/R); default setting: L/R.
Phase Normal/Inverted Phase inversion of the left stereo channel signal, except in RR Stereo Mode
setting (see below); the key is illuminated if inverted; default setting is
normal.
Stereo/Mono Selects either normal stereo mode or combining the L and R signal to a mono
signal. The key is illuminated if mono; Default setting: stereo.
Stereo Mode Selects left signal-to-left channel/right signal-to-right channel (LR), swapped
(RL), left signal-to-both channels (LL), or right signal-to-both channels (RR)
modes; default setting: LR
CAL (Calibration) Level The input level calibration value can be adjusted from –18 to + 18 dB in
0.5 dB steps; default setting: 0 dB.

Local View 1 for a Mono Digital Input (e.g. MADI):

Input Channel Routing * Generator Phase CAL

ON/OFF Normal/Inverted Level

Mono digital inputs have the same functionality as stereo inputs, but without
the stereo mode and mono selectors, as shown above.
Local View 2 for Analogue Line or Digital Inputs:
While this view is available, all displays are blanked; only the selected chan-
nel and its input level meter are displayed.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-15

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.3.2.2 DEES (De-Esser) Local Views

Center Q Attenuation AutoThr DEES

Frequency ON (/OFF) ON/OFF

DEES ON/OFF Enables/disables the de-esser section of this channel; the key is illuminated
if ON; default setting is OFF.
Center Frequency Center frequency of the de-esser’s filter band. It is indicated in kHz and can
be adjusted in a 4-14 kHz range.
Q Q factor (bandwidth) of the de-esser’s filter, adjustable from 0.27 (wide)
through 8.7 (narrow).
Attenuation If Auto Thr is set to ON (see below), the de-esser’s attenuation can be adjusted
here in a range of 0 to –50 dB (Max).
Auto Thr ON/OFF Automatic threshold setting depending on the current signal content; the
key is illuminated if ON; default setting is ON, and the THR display at the
far left is greyed-out.
If Auto Thr is set to OFF, the Attenuation setting changes to ‘Ratio’, and the
THR display at the far left is displayed with the normal brightness, as shown
below:

Threshold Center Q Ratio AutoThr DEES

Frequency (ON/) OFF ON/OFF

Ratio Level reduction ratio within the filter range if an ‘s’ component is detected
in the audio signal. The ratio be set in a range of 1:1 (no effect) through 20:1
(heavy de-essing).
Threshold The threshold is the signal level above which the de-esser starts to act within
the selected filter band. It can be set with the rotary knob between +9 and
–87 dB.

5-16  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.3.2.3 EQ (Equalizer) Local Views

Local View 1 (Low and Low-Mid Bands):

LF Gain LF LF Q LMF Gain LMF EQ LMF Q

(Boost/Cut) Frequency (Boost/Cut) Frequency ON/OFF

Local View 2 (High-Mid and High Bands):

HMF Gain HMF HMF Q HF Gain HF EQ HF Q

(Boost/Cut) Frequency (Boost/Cut) Frequency ON/OFF

LF/LMF/HMF/HF Gain The gain (i.e. the boost or cut value) of the selected band is adjusted in a
±18 dB range.
LF/LMF/HMF/HF Frequency The center frequency of the selected band can be set from 20 Hz through
20 kHz for each band.
LF/LMF/HMF/HF Q Q-factor (bandwidth) of the selected band, adjustable from 0.27 (wide)
through 8.7 (narrow).
EQ ON/OFF The complete EQ section can be switched ON or OFF with the key in
either view; the key is illuminated if ON; default setting is OFF.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-17

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.3.2.4 DYN (Dynamics) Local Views

The dynamics section consists of four different views, one each for limiter,
compressor, expander, and gate. Each part can be switched ON/OFF individu-
ally, in addition to the ON/OFF switch for the complete dynamics section.
Readings in dB automatically consider the console’s current headroom set-
ting; 0 dB indication = 0 dBFS – the selected headroom. Default headroom is
9 dB.

Local View 1 (Limiter):

Limiter Limiter Limiter Limiter Dynamics

ON/OFF Threshold Attack Time Release Time ON/OFF

Limiter ON/OFF Individual ON/OFF switch for the limiter part; the key is illuminated if
ON; default setting is OFF.
Limiter Threshold The threshold can be set in a range of 9 through –39 dB.
Limiter Attack Time The attack time can be set in a range of 0.2 through 20 ms (milli-seconds).
Limiter Release Time The release time can be set in a range of 10 ms through 10 s.
Dynamics ON/OFF ON/OFF switch for the whole dynamics section, i.e. for limiter, compressor,
expander and gate at once; the key is illuminated if ON; default setting is
OFF.

Local View 2 (Compressor):

Compr. Compr. Compressor Compressor Compressor Compressor Dynamics

ON/OFF Threshold Ratio Attack Time Release Time Gain ON/OFF

Compr. ON/OFF Individual ON/OFF switch for the limiter part; the key is illuminated if
ON; default setting is OFF.
Compr. Threshold The threshold can be set in a range of 0 through –96 dB.
Compressor Ratio The compression ratio can be set in a range of 1:1 (no compression) through
20:1 (heavy compression).

5-18  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Compressor Attack Time The attack time can be set in a range of 0.2 through 20 ms (milli-seconds).
Compressor Release Time The release time can be set in a range of 10 ms through 10 s.
Dynamics ON/OFF ON/OFF switch for the whole dynamics section, i.e. for limiter, compressor,
expander and gate at once; the key is illuminated if ON; default setting is
OFF.

View 3 (Expander):

Expander Expander Expander Expander Expander Dynamics

ON/OFF Threshold Ratio Attack Time Release Time ON/OFF

Expander ON/OFF Individual ON/OFF switch for the expander part; the key is illuminated if
ON; default setting is OFF.
Expander Threshold The threshold can be set in a range of 9 through –87 dB..
Expander Ratio The expansion ratio can be set in a range of 1:1 (no expansion) through 20:1
(heavy expansion).
Expander Attack Time The attack time can be set in a range of 0.2 through 1 ms (milli-seconds).
Expander Release Time The release time can be set in a range of 10 ms through 10 s.
Dynamics ON/OFF ON/OFF switch for the whole dynamics section, i.e. for limiter, compressor,
expander and gate at once; the key is illuminated if ON; default setting is
OFF.

View 4 (Gate):

Gate Gate Gate Gate Gate Dynamics

ON/OFF Threshold Attenuation Attack Time Release Time ON/OFF

Gate ON/OFF Individual ON/OFF switch for the gate part; the key is illuminated if ON;
default setting is OFF.
Gate Threshold The threshold can be set in a range of 9 through –87 dB.
Gate Attenuation The attenuation can be set in a range of 0 dB (zero attenuation) through –48 dB
(heavy attenuation) and ‘Max.’ (muted).

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-19

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Gate Attack Time The attack time can be set in a range of 0.2 through 1 ms (milli-seconds).
Gate Release Time The release time can be set in a range of 10 ms through 10 s.
Dynamics ON/OFF ON/OFF switch for the whole dynamics section, i.e. for limiter, compressor,
expander and gate at once; the key is illuminated if ON; default setting is
OFF.

5.3.2.5 1-4 (AUX / N–X Bus Send) Local View

N–X 1 Send Send N–X 2 Send Send N–X 3 Send Send N–X 4 Send Send
ON/OFF Level ON/OFF Level ON/OFF Level ON/OFF Level

Send ON/OFF ON/OFF controls for the individual AUX/N–X sends; the key is illumi-
nated if ON; default setting is OFF for N–X sends 1 and 2, ON for N–X sends
3 and 4.
Send Level The individual send levels can be set in a range from Mute to +12 dB. Default
values are Mute for N–X sends 1 and 2, 0 dB for N–X sends 3 and 4.

5.3.2.6 ASN (Bus Assignment) Local View

PAN / BAL PAN / BAL Assign to Assign to

ON/OFF Setting PGM A Bus ON/OFF REC Bus ON/OFF

Assign to PGM A Bus ON/OFF Assigns the selected channel to the PGM A (Program) bus; the key and the
yellow PGM LED in the indicator field are illuminated if ON; default setting
is ON.
Assign to REC Bus ON/OFF Assigns the selected channel to the REC (Record) bus; the key, the yellow
REC LED in the indicator field are illuminated if ON. In addition, the REC
key is illuminated in red. Default setting is OFF.

5-20  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.4 Monitoring, Talkback

The following description refers to the monitoring part of the desk’s cen­
tral section. All functions may also be handled from the GUI, refer to chapter
5.12.

5.4.1 Control Room Monitoring

In the control room (CR), three possibilities are provided for signal moni-
toring: control room loudspeakers (LSP), DJ headphones (HP) and Guest
headphones (GUEST HP). The corresponding sockets all are located on the
Nano SCore; headphone sockets (CR DJ HP and CR GUEST HP) at its front,
control room loudspeakers (CR MON LS, L and R) at its rear.

Source selection and volume settings are provided for both control room and
studio with the CR/ST key at the top right of the monitoring area; if the key
is dark, controls for the control room are active. If illuminated, the controls
affect the studio settings.

The monitor source selector has eight keys for quick selection of the most
important sources (PGM, REC and OFF AIR busses, PFL and AUX/N–X
busses 1-4). The picture above shows the standard configuration, the key of
the selected source is illuminated. Only one source can be selected at a time.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-21

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Control Room Loudspeakers The CR loudspeaker’s volume is adjusted with the LSP VOL knob; if set to
0 dB, the LED ring shows a red segment, as in the picture above.
Three keys are used to control the CR monitoring loudspeakers:
DIM The level of the CR monitor speaker output is dimmed (attenuation is con-
figurable, default value 20 dB). DIM is illuminated if the DIM function has
been activated either by the key or by one of the TALKBACK keys.
CUT The CR monitor speakers output is muted. CUT is illuminated if active.
As long as one of the microphones in the control room is on (with configura-
tion ‘Sign. = CR’), the CR monitor speakers are automatically muted and the
CUT key is illuminated.
MONO When selected, both left and right CR monitor speakers are fed with a mono
mix of the selected source.

PFL TO MON If PFL is active on any channel or if the external PFL input signal is selected,
PFL TO MON feeds the PFL signal not only to the DJ headphones but also to
the CR monitor speakers. If no signal is routed to the PFL bus, the signal for
the monitor loudspeakers is identical to the one selected by the CR monitor
source selector. PFL TO MON is illuminated if active.
LSP VOL Output level setting of the CR monitor speakers. If talkback is active, the CR
monitor speaker level is dimmed and the DIM key is illuminated. If the CR
microphone is on, the CR monitor speakers are automatically muted and the
CUT key is illuminated.

DJ Headphones HP VOL This control sets the level of the DJ headphones.

If the studio’s talkback key is pressed, the headphones monitoring signal is
dimmed and the talkback signal is fed to the headphones. CUT and DIM have
no effect on the headphones signal, and the headphones output is not muted
if one of the control room microphones is on.
HP SPLIT Headphones split mode is only valid for the DJ headphones and has no effect
on the CR monitor speakers.
If active, one or more channels are routed to the PGM bus, and some chan-
nel’s PFL is also on, the PGM bus signal is fed to the left, and the PFL signal
to the right headphones system.

Guest Headphones The guest headphones are always fed with the same signal as the CR monitor
speakers, but without cut or dim functions.

Internal Speaker The PFL and talkback return signals are mixed and fed to the internal speaker.
If the PFL signal is listened on the CR monitor speakers, it is automatically
muted on the internal speaker.
If the CR red light is active, the internal speaker is automatically muted.
SP For setting the internal speaker’s level the HP VOL knob is used while press-
ing the SP key. Then adjusted level is indicated by the knob’s LED ring.
TB RET If pressed, the corresponding contribution level to the internal speaker is
indicated on the LED ring around the HP VOL knob and can be adjusted
individually. The mix ratio of the PFL and talkback return signals also influ-
ences the TB return signal on the DJ headphones.

5-22  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.4.2 Studio Monitoring

Compact Monitoring/TB Box:

The compact monitoring/TB box offers an array of configurable buttons for

monitoring source selection and talkback destinations, red light indication,
and studio loudspeaker/headphone control. Talkback between any locations
is possible, as well as to external lines, the master, AUX, and N–X outputs
but needs to be configured as desired.

Studio Source Selection Selection of the studio monitoring source can be done on the CR desk or on
the compact monitoring/TB box.
Studio Muting The studio monitoring speakers are automatically muted if at least one of the
microphones in the studio (Configuration: Input Location = Studio2) is on.
The studio headphones are not muted in such a case.
Talkback During talkback from studio to CR and vice versa, the studio speaker level
is automatically dimmed. The talkback signal from CR to studio is not
dimmed and has the normal listening level on both the studio speakers and
headphones.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-23

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.4.3 Talkback
 Momentary/Latching Talkback Keys
A short press on one of the talkback keys latches this talkback function, mean-
ing that talkback remains active until the same key is pressed a second time.
A long press on one of the talkback keys makes this talkback function work
in momentary mode, meaning that talkback is automatically canceled upon
release of the key.

 Control Room Talkback: In the Control Room, talkback to one or several destinations is triggered by
pressing one of the configurable keys on the compact monitoring/TB box. The
TB key in the channel strip normally is used for talkback to the N–X output.
It is possible to talk to any destination at a time. Talkback to the main buses
(PRG A, REC) is not allowed in the default configuration. To do this, one of
the talkback keys needs to be assigned to the slate function; then, this slate
key must be used in addition to the the talkback key of the main bus in order
to prevent talkback from going to these destinations unintentionally.
If talkback (to or from the control room) is active, the corresponding key(s)
is/are illuminated.
To simplify talkback to several destinations at a time, talkback groups can be
configured.
The input configured as ‘TB Source = CR’ is the audio source for talkback
from the CR. This can either be the DJ microphone or any other desired input.
The talkback return signal can be listened to with the internal speaker and/or
the DJ headphones.

 Channel Strip TB Key In general, each channel strip has a TB key for that particular channel. In
default mode, the input routing defines the talkback destination. However, it
is configurable what the destination shall be. In cases where talkback does
not make sense (e.g. if the input source is a CD player), the button can be
used for another purpose (not supported by the default configuration).

SLATE Allows talkback to the main buses (PGM, REC).

In order to prevent talkback from going to these destinations unintentionally,
the SLATE key must be pressed together with the PGM or REC master talkback
keys.
Note: The SLATE function is not available in the default console configuration but
may be activated with the configuration tool.

Studio Talkback:
The control interface to the studio can be configured via the GPIO function
pool, where different inputs for talkback destination selection from the studio
are available. Possible destinations are: To CR or to N–X.
Inputs that have been configured as ‘TB Source = Studio’ are the audio sources
for talkback from the studio. Four studio talkback sources are supported, they
are mixed together in the console.
Talkback to the studio is listened to over the studio speakers and headphones.
The signaling and the talkback sources can be defined separately for each
input if required; this is done in the configuration tool.

Signaling Incoming Talkback: If incoming talkback is activated, the corresponding talkback key illuminates.

Red-Light Signaling: The ON AIR red-light indicator is doubled on the compact monitoring/TB
box.

5-24  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

TB Source Configuration: Router sources (i.e. physical inputs) of the different talkback inputs must be
defined using the configuration tool (see chapter 6.5.25). The following TB
sources are available:
TB Sources No. of TB Buses
1 TBFromExtern 1
1 TBFromExt1 1
1 TBFromExt2 1
1 TBFromExt3 1
1 TBFromExt4 1
4 TBFromCR (exclusive) 1
4 TBFromStudio (simultaneous) 4

Since only one of the four specified physical inputs can be the source for
TBFromCR at a time, the user has to select one of them. Up to four keys may
be configured, e.g. in the talkback key section, that allow the user selecting
the desired physical input without having to start the configuration tool.

5.5 Signaling
The OnAir 1500 has full-way red light signaling, which means that the audio
path must be open from the microphone to the master output in order that red
light indication becomes active. Signaling settings are performed with the
configuration tool.

Signaling is provided for control room and studio; it works with the config-
ured behavior of the inputs describing the microphone locations. Red light
indication in the control room is provided in the desk’s meter bridge. Possible
locations are CR (control room) and ST (studio).

The ON AIR indication may be AND-linked with an external signal, e.g.

coming from the master control room, indicating that the signal is actually
routed to the antenna (see GPIO section).

Example
Red light indication for a particular location is active if:
• at least one microphone input in this location is routed to a channel, AND
• this channel’s fader is open, the channel is switched ON and is routed to a
main master,
AND
• this main master’s fader (if configured) is open.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-25

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.6 Snapshots
5.6.1 Basic Snapshot Operation
The four snapshot keys SNAP 1-SNAP 4 can, together with LOAD SNAP and
SAVE SNAP, be used for recalling (load) global snapshots from the console-
internal memory to the desk, and, after modification (if required) for saving
them as user snapshots of the user currently logged in.

5.6.2 Extended Snapshots (Advanced Users Only)

Initial Snapshots Initial snapshots contain information used for the start-up of the system (also
referred to as ‘container’); they are saved locally in the DSP core. Four dif-
ferent initial snapshot types are used.
User Snapshots There exist different user snapshot types with different read and write autho-
rizations, depending on the user currently logged-in. A user snapshot consists
of up to four files containing audio, input routing, output routing, and/or
assignment parameters. When creating a snapshot, the user decides which
of the four parameter groups are contained in his new snapshot, although he
always sees his snapshots as a whole. The individual snapshot files are hidden
from him.
Inp. Rout- Outp. Add.
Snapshot Type Read Write Audio Assignment
ing Routing Param.
System, on power-up of
Initial Admin * X X X X X****
core sub-system
Global All Admin X ** X ** X ** X ** -
System, on login; Admin,
Default X ** X ** X ** X ** -
User Admin, every user *** every user ***
Admin,
Private Admin, every user *** X ** X ** X ** X ** -****
every user ***
* possible either from the Admin-Config page of the user GUI (desk settings) or from within the configuration tool (other parameters)
** depending on user selection
*** ‘every user’ signifies that the user has access to his own snapshots only
**** The FaderGain and ChannelOn parameters can be included in the initial and user snapshots for SW V3.0 and up. They can be
activated in the Configuration GUI. However, to retain snapshot downward compatibility with earlier versions, they must not be used.

5.6.2.1 Snapshot Files

All snapshot files are stored in the snapshots folder on the local file system of
their respective container; for backup purposes or transfer between consoles
they may be copied to an external medium.
The snapshots folder contains the initial snapshot files, a folder for global
snapshots, and one folder each for every user.
The user’s folder name is a unique user ID (administrator = 0, default user = 1,
etc.) that makes the file structure independent from the user data man­age­ment
and allows changing a user’s name.
Each user folder contains two additional folders: default and private. The
default folder contains default snapshot files (optional); the private folder
contains all private snapshot files (optional). The number of snapshots is
limited by the profile assigned to the user.
Only the initial and the default snapshots have fixed file names. The snapshot
file type is distinguished by its DOS file name extension.

5-26  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Category Data Type File Name (SW V3.1 & up) Extension
Configuration Part containerID_initial .cfg
Operational Part containerID_initial .ops
Initial
User Parameters containerID_initial .usr
License Key Info containerID_initial .key
Audio (any individual name) .aud
Input Routing (any individual name) .irt
User
Output Routing (any individual name) .ort
Assignment (any individual name) .ass

5.6.2.2 Saving Initial Snapshots

Manual Save Mode When touching either the Desk Settings - Save button on the Admin -
Config page of the user GUI or one of the Save ... buttons in the configura-
tion tool, the corresponding parameters are saved in the corresponding data
file(s).
AutoSave Mode Automatic saving of the initial operational (i.e., desk setting) snapshot can
be activated with the configuration tool (refer to chapter 6.5.24.1). If active,
writing a new data file is triggered no longer than 10 seconds after a desk
setting has been changed.
Note: AutoSave mode must be switched Off whenever initial snapshot files are
copied or moved manually.

5.6.2.3 Snapshot File Contents

5.6.2.3.1 Initial Snapshots
The initial snapshots contain all configuration parameters of the correspond-
ing sub-system (‘container’).

*.cfg Configuration Snapshot All parameters of the configuration type, set by the Config Tool, e.g.
• all I/O sharing-relevant parameters set by the Config Tool
• desk resource definition parameters
• partial output routing snapshots.
.
*.ops Operational Snapshot All settings within the user GUI and the desk surface:
• the same parameters as an audio snapshot
• the same parameters as the input routing snapshot
• the same parameters as the output routing snapshot
• the same parameters as the assignment snapshot
• monitoring parameters, such as CR or ST2 source

*.usr User Snapshot • all user-relevant parameters set by the Config Tool
• all policies-relevant parameters set by the Config Tool
• all department-relevant parameters set by the Config Tool.

*.key License key Snapshot This is the only file that belongs to the start-up configuration of the console
(initial snapshot), but is not handled by the snapshot extension.
• all license keys for optional software functions.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-27

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.6.2.3.2 User Snapshots

The user snapshots consist of up to four files containing audio, input routing,
output routing, and/or assignment parameters.

*.aud Audio Snapshots

The audio snapshots contain the following parameters:
• Logical inputs: most of the logical input parameters, including fader gain
and channel on/off
• Inserts: assignment and on/off status
• Master channels: fader gain, mono function
• Send channels (AUX, N–X): N–X mode, fader gain, channel on/off, fader
gain, mono function
All logical inputs are saved within the audio snapshot.

*.irt Input Routing Snapshots The input routing snapshots contain the complete input routing information.

*.ort Output Routing Snapshots The output routing snapshots contain the output routing information; this is
each logical output’s source.

*.ass Assignment Snapshots

The assignment snapshots contain:
• the currently selected rotary assignment for all the rotary and fader modules
• the input meter mode (AF, PF, N–X send)
• the GRM (gain reduction meter) mode (de-esser, dynamics)
• the MIC group assignment
• the XL input assignment
• TB groups.
All desk parameters are saved for each desk in the system.

5.6.2.4 External Media

Snapshots may be copied from the local flash file system to a USB memory
device. The directory structure on the external media is different from the one
on the local file system. On the external media, the files are always saved in
a folder, due to the fact that a user may have different user IDs on different
systems.
Important! The USB memory device MUST NOT BE REMOVED from the socket
DURING DATA ACCESS – only remove it after its LED has stopped flash-
ing.

5-28  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.6.2.5 Snapshot Operation Details

For in-depth snapshot operation the user GUI is required.

The available snapshot operations depend on the current selection within the
local snapshot list:
Selected Item >> << Rename Delete
Creates a new global
Global – snapshot – –
(Administrator only)
Overwrites the selected Renames the selected Deletes the selected
Recalls the selected
Any Global Snapshot global snapshot global snapshot global snapshot
snapshot
(Administrator only) (Administrator only) (Administrator only)
User Name – – – –
Creates a new default
snapshot,
Default – or – –
Overwrites the default
snapshot
Recalls the default snap- Overwrites the default Deletes the default snap-
The Default Snapshot –
shot snapshot shot
Creates a new private
Private – – –
snapshot
Recalls the selected Overwrites the selected Renames the selected Deletes the selected pri-
Any Private Snapshot snapshot private snapshot private snapshot vate snapshot

The <<, >>, Rename, and Delete buttons are only visible if the correspond-
ing operation is allowed.

‘Recall’ Loads the selected snapshot parameters into the console.

‘Overwrite’ Updates the selected snapshot parameters within the selected snapshot. Un-
selected parameter files remain unchanged.
A dialog box ‘Snapshot ‘name’ already exists. Do you want to overwrite
it?’ pops up. When answering Yes, all selected parameter files will be over-
written.

‘Create’ Creates a new snapshot and saves the selected snapshot parameter files. The
keyboard appears for entering a snapshot name; a generic name (such as New
Snap) is automatically suggested.
If a name is entered of which at least one snapshot file (audio, input/output
routing, assign) already exists, a dialog box ‘Snapshot ‘name’ already
exists. Do you want to overwrite it?’ pops up. When answering Yes, all
selected parameter files will be overwritten.

‘Rename’ Renames all snapshot parameter files of the selected snapshot. The snapshot
parameter selection buttons (audio, input/output routing, assign) are ignored
in order to be consistent.
If a name is entered that already exists for at least one snapshot file, a dialog
box ‘Snapshot ‘name’ already exists. Do you want to overwrite it?’ pops
up. When answering Yes, all selected parameter files will be overwritten.

‘Delete’ Deletes the selected parameters of the selected snapshot. A dialog box ‘Do
you really want to delete the selected snapshot parameters’ pops up.
When answering Yes, all selected parameter files will be deleted.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-29

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.6.2.6 Snapshot/Ext. Media Operation Details

For snapshot/external media operation also refer to chapter 5.12.6.3.

The available snapshot operations depend on the current selection within the
local snapshot and the card snapshot lists:
Selected Item
<< >>
in Local List in Card List
Global – –
Copies the selected snapshot into the selected user’s
Any Global Snapshot –
folder (only if the own user name is selected)
User Name – –
Default – –
Any User Name
Copies the selected snapshot into the selected user’s
The Default Snapshot –
folder (only if the own user name is selected)
Private – –
Copies the selected snapshot into the selected user’s
Any Private Snapshot –
folder (only if the own user name is selected)
Copies the selected snapshot
from the external medium to
Global –
the local file system as a global
snapshot (administrator only)
Overwrites the selected local Overwrites the snapshot selected on the external
snapshot with the snapshot medium with the selected local snapshot (either for
Any Global Snapshot selected from the external the administrator, or if one of the current user’s own
medium (administrator only) snapshots is selected)
User Name – –
Overwrites the local default snap-
Default shot with the snapshot selected –
from the external medium
Any Snapshot
Overwrites the snapshot selected on the external
Overwrites the local default snap-
medium with the selected local snapshot (either for
The Default Snapshot shot with the snapshot selected
the administrator, or if one of the current user’s own
from the external medium
snapshots is selected)
Copies the selected snapshot
from the external medium to the
Private –
local file system as a private
snapshot
Overwrites the selected local Overwrites the snapshot selected on the external
snapshot with the snapshot medium with the selected local snapshot (either for
Any Private Snapshot selected from the external the administrator, or if one of the current user’s own
medium snapshots is selected)

The << and >> buttons are only visible if an operation is allowed.

‘Copy’ Copies all available snapshot parameter files with the same name to the des-
tination.
If there already exists a snapshot with the same name, a user warning appears
in a modal dialog: ‘Snapshot ‘name’ already exists. Do you really want
to overwrite it?’ When answering Yes, all selected parameter files will be
overwritten.

‘Overwrite’ Updates the selected snapshot parameters within the selected snapshot. Un-
selected parameter files remain unchanged.

5-30  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

A dialog box ‘Snapshot ‘name’ already exists. Do you really want to

overwrite it?’ pops up. When answering Yes, all selected parameter files
will be overwritten.
Note: If a snapshot containing audio, input routing, output routing, and assignment
parameters is overwritten by a snapshot only containing e.g. audio param-
eters, the old input/output routing and assignment parameters will be lost!

Selected Item in Local List Add User

Creates a new folder for the selected user on the external medium
Any User Name (either for the administrator, or if the current user is selected)

‘Add User’ The Add User button is visible only if the operation is allowed and no user
folder with the current user’s name exists.

Selected Item in Card List Rename Delete

Deletes the selected user folder, including all
Renames the selected user folder on the
Any User Name snapshots, from the external medium
external medium (administrator only)
(administrator only)

Rename Renames the selected user folder on the external medium.

The keyboard appears and the user is prompted to enter a new folder name.
If there already exists a folder with the same name, a dialog box appears: ‘A
user with the name ‘username’ already exists’; if desired, confirm with
OK.

Delete Deletes the selected user folder from the external medium after having con-
firmed the dialog box ‘Do you really want to delete the selected user?’
with Yes.
If the selected folder is not empty, a dialog box ‘The selected user cannot
be deleted. The user’s snapshots have to be deleted first’ appears. If
desired, confirm with OK.

Selected Item in Card List Rename Delete

Renames the selected snapshot on the Deletes the selected snapshot from the
external medium external medium
Any Snapshot (either for the administrator, or if one of the (either for the administrator, or if one of the
current user’s own snapshots is selected) current user’s own snapshots is selected)

Rename Renames the selected snapshot on the external medium.

The keyboard appears and the user is prompted to enter a new snapshot name.
If there already exists a snapshot with the same name, a dialog box appears: ‘A
snapshot with the name ‘snapshotname’ already exists. Do you really
want to rename the selected snapshot?’. When continuing with Yes, all
parameter files of the existing snapshot will be deleted before renaming all
parameter files of the selected snapshot.

Delete Deletes the selected snapshot from the external medium after having con-
firmed the dialog box ‘Do you really want to delete the selected snap-
shot?’ with Yes.
All parameter files of the selected snapshot will be deleted.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-31

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.6.2.7 Snapshots During Login

• On login of any user, this user’s default snapshot is loaded if available
• On login of the default user (or logout of any other user, respectively), the
default user’s default snapshot is loaded if available.
The default snapshot may include audio, input routing, output routing, and/
or assignment parameters, such as any other snapshot.
Please note that login is possible only while the core is powered up, since the
user data are stored within the core.

Example: If a user desires his preferred rotary assignment only loaded when logging in,
he simply creates in the ‘default’ folder a snapshot named ‘default’ that only
contains his rotary assignment parameters.

5.6.2.8 Snapshots During Power-up

At system power-up the behavior is the same as a desk power-up, followed
by a core power-up. Finally, the default user is logged in, and his default
snapshot is automatically loaded.

5.6.2.9 User Warnings

In contrast to the abovementioned local user dialog boxes and warnings gen-
erated by the user GUI itself, the snapshot extension also generates its own
user warnings, as shown in the table below.
SNAPSHOT, Snapshot cannot
SNAPSHOT, Snapshot File ‘my
be loaded. Incompatible SNAPSHOT, Snapshot File ‘my
Warning: FirstSnap’ not found or invalid!
snapshot file version ‘my First- FirstSnap’ corrupted!
Snapshot not loaded.
Snap’.
Context: Warning No.: 5000 5002 5003
User Login No Yes... Yes...
Load Snap via GPInput Yes... Yes... Yes...
Load Snap via Desk Key Yes... Yes... Yes...
Load Snap from User GUI Yes... Yes... Yes...
Shot Page
... if none of the requested snap- ... if the file cannot be opened,
... if no snapshot file version is
shot files (.aud, .irt, or if the snapshot file version
found, or if the CRC checksum is
.ort, .ass) could be doesn’t match the current soft-
invalid.
opened. ware status.

5-32  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.7 Routing
The OnAir 1500 has an integrated audio input/output router. The intelligent
Input Router can be set during operation from the desk or the GUI. The output
router can be set from the GUI.

Definition of Terms • Physical audio input: Input connector and input interface (analog mic,
analog line, or digital). One physical audio input can be assigned to one
or more logical inputs at a time. Physical audio inputs are located at the
rear of the Nano SCore.
• Logical audio input: Set of input-related audio parameters including the
input name (label). Can be assigned to any one of the physical audio inputs,
and on the other hand to one of the physical console channels (channel
strips). Logical audio inputs are located within the DSP section of the Nano
SCore.
• Physical console channel, or console channel strip: Set of operating ele-
ments on the desk (or on the GUI) to which one of the logical audio inputs
can be assigned.
• Logical audio output: Link between the output router and the physical
audio output, contains the output’s name (label). Logical audio outputs
are located within the DSP section of the Nano SCore.
• Physical audio output: Output interface (analog or digital) and output con-
nector. Physical audio outputs are located at the rear of the Nano SCore.

The routing functionality in an on-air console is different from the routing

in a production console. While the OnAir 1500 keeps the channel settings at
the input, a re-routed input has the same channel settings as were set the last
time it was used.
The OnAir 1500’s intelligent input router automatically handles the internal
routing and channel layering functionality and so allows easy and intuitive
operation.
A source that is always in use can be hot-layered to another channel strip
without interruptions to its audio signal.
All physical inputs and outputs can be used for every purpose (e.g. input
channel, monitoring, talkback, master, etc.) which is only depending on the
configuration of the logical I/Os.

5.7.1 Audio Routing

Audio signals are generally handled as a mono stream, regardless of the audio
interface format (mono, stereo). and are put together with the logical inputs.

5.7.1.1 Physical Audio Inputs and Outputs

The OnAir 1500’s physical audio inputs are internally handled as mono sig-
nals, regardless of their audio interface format (mono, stereo) and can be put
together with the logical inputs.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-33

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.7.1.2 Logical Audio Inputs

Logical audio inputs are the link between the physical audio inputs and the
input router. Only logical inputs/outputs can be routed and will be visible on
the operating surface.
Because the logical audio input holds the channel parameters, a logical input
can be assigned only to one channel at a time. However, it is possible to have
more than one logical audio input with the same physical audio input line.
The example below shows one logical stereo input (CD 1), and two logical
mono inputs (EXT 1, EXT 2) that consist of the left and right signals of one
physical AES/EBU input (AES 1).

Physical Inputs Logical Inputs Input Router

AES 1 1L
CD 1
1R CD 1

AES/EBU PCB 2L
EXT 1
EXT 1
#
EXT 2
2R
EXT 2

Input-related Channel Parameters Every logical audio input holds its own set of channel parameters, even if it
is currently not routed to a channel. If a previously un-routed logical audio
input is re-routed to a channel, its last parameter settings (such as gain, EQ,
dynamics, etc.) are automatically activated. The fader setting and the status
of the ON and PFL keys remain at the current channel status.

MIC 1/2 MIC 3

CD 1 CD 2
Sources

Physical
Inputs

IN IN IN IN IN

De-S De-S De-S De-S De-S

EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ
Logical
Inputs
DYN DYN DYN DYN DYN

AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX

# Input
Router

Physical
Console
Channels
1 2 3

The following information affects the routing and is contained in the configu-
ration of a logical audio input:
• Input label
• Format (mono or stereo)
• Left-channel audio input (physical input)
• If stereo: right-channel audio input (physical input)
• Listen only (inputs that can not be routed to channels, used e.g. for moni-
toring)
• Talkback audio signals.

5-34  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.7.1.3 Logical Audio Outputs

Each stereo master has a stereo and a mono output simultaneously. They can
both be routed to logical audio outputs. The example below shows a situation
where the PGM master is used for a simultaneous transmission of the program
in stereo (FM) and in mono (AM).
Masters Output Logical Physical FM
Router Outputs Outputs
AM
L
PGM ANT FM R L
R

REC M
ANT AM M

AUX 1
# LINE OUTPUTS

L L
AUX 2 CD REC R R

N–X 1...

A logical stereo output is connected to the master’s stereo output, and a logi-
cal mono output is connected to the master’s mono-mixed output. If a logical
stereo output is assigned to a mono master output, as the N–X 1in the example
above, the mono master signal is fed to both the left and right output connec-
tors. The mono/stereo output format is automatically handled and thus not
shown in the output router page, from which results a very easy handling of
the output router.

5.7.2 Channel Format

The channel format is not fixed as it usually is in a production console, but
it automatically follows the format of the routed input source instead. This
means that when routing a mono input source to a console channel forces the
channel to operate in mono mode, and routing a stereo input source forces
the channel to operate in stereo mode.
The channel format affects the controls in the channel page. This is visible in
the channel input page, where the LR/RL/LL/RR/Mono buttons are shown
for stereo channels only, and in the channel FDR/Bus page, where either a
PAN field is shown for mono channels or a BAL field for stereo channels.
Formats are automatically adjusted. This means that if a channel is currently
in stereo mode and its signal is routed to a mono AUX output, the system
automatically inserts a mono summing matrix into the signal path between
the channel and this AUX output.

5.7.3 Routing Protection

If a channel is currently on-air (i.e., channel ON, channel fader open, channel
routed to a master being on-air, master fader open), the input source cannot
be changed before the channel becomes inactive. However, hot-swapping of
channels is always allowed. In addition, connections can be protected in the
configuration tool (e.g. the master channels).

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-35

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.7.4 Routing Operation

Input Routing Input routing is either done with the channel’s rotary encoder in INPUT global
view mode (chapter 5.3.1.1), or in the user GUI’s Routing Input page.
Example: Routing a new source (MIC 2 instead of CD 1 to channel strip #6).

MIC 1 MIC 2
CD 1

IN IN IN

DeEs DeEs DeEs

EQ EQ EQ
CD 1
DYN DYN DYN

AUX AUX AUX

Unused Inputs

6

• Select INPUT global view mode and select the MIC input group with the
rotary encoder of channel strip #6.
• Press the corresponding key.
• Turn the rotary encoder again until the desired source is displayed in the
channel label display (MIC 2 in the example above).
• Press the key again.

MIC 1 MIC 2
CD 1

IN IN IN

DeEs DeEs DeEs

EQ EQ EQ
MIC 2
DYN DYN DYN

AUX AUX AUX

Unused Inputs

6

Now, the MIC 2 input is routed to channel strip #6, as shown above. All
channel settings are as they were set when this input was used the last time,
except for the fader value and the status of the ON and PFL keys; these are
not overwritten and remain in the current channel status before the re-routing
took place.
Output Routing For output routing the user GUI is required; use the Routing Output page.

5-36  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.7.5 Hot-Swapping
The hot-swapping feature allows 24-hour console operation without an audio
interruption, even if the routing is changed and snapshots are loaded. Hot-
swapping also works if the source is currently on-air. However, the destination
channel must be inactive, otherwise channel protection is active.
Example: Routing the MIC 3 input from channel strip #1 to channel strip #6 without
audio interruption.
MIC 3
CD 1

MIC 3 MIC 3

1
6

• Select INPUT global view mode and select the MIC input group with the
rotary encoder of channel strip #6.
• Press the corresponding key.
• Turn the rotary encoder again until the desired source is displayed in the
channel label display (MIC 3 in the example above).
• Press the key again.
MIC 3
CD 1

CD 1 MIC 3

1
6

Now, all channel settings (EQ, DYN, Fader, ON, etc.) are swapped in real
time, without audio interruption. Only the physical fader position does not
correspond to the internal fader position, indicated by FDR UP or FDR DOWN
on the fader strip’s OLED display.

• Move the fader knob to the internal fader position with the help of the fader
take-over indication in the fader strip’s OLED display.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-37

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.8 Watch and Stopwatches

5.8.1 Watch
The OnAir 1500 displays the time-of-day in the meter bridge section as long
as the CLOCK key is illuminated (default setting).
The standard time reference is an internal real-time clock (RTC) with bat-
tery back-up. The RTC continues to run when the console is switched off.
Therefore, it is unnecessary to set the watch on each power up. Depending on
configuration time display is either in 24 h mode (default setting) or in 12 h
mode with PM indication.

The FADER and MAN keys switch the display over to a fader or user (manual)
stopwatch display, respectively. If the user stopwatch is selected with the
MAN key, the COUNT DOWN key activates a countdown timer.

The time-of-day clock and the fader stopwatch are fully independent; if active
but not selected, they run in the background. The same applies for the user
stopwatch/countdown timer.

5.8.2 Fader Stopwatch

The fader stopwatch is controlled by the channel(s) for which the Timer Start
option has been enabled in the configuration tool under Config – LogicalIn-
puts – Timer Start – on/off (refer to chapter 6.5.1).
Start / Restart / Stop The fader stopwatch always (re-) starts at 00:00:00 (hh:mm:ss) when any of
the configured channels goes on-air, i.e. it is switched ON while its fader is
open, or its fader is opened while it is switched ON. It stops when the fader
is closed or when the channel is switched off.
It can display a time range of up to 23:59:59. Should this value be exceeded,
it restarts at 00:00:00.
It is also operative in the background, i.e. if the time-of-day clock or the user
stopwatch (or the countdown timer) is currently displayed.

5-38  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.8.3 User Stopwatch

If activated with the MAN stopwatch key, the user stopwatch acts as a normal
time counter. It always starts from 00:00:00.
Start The user stopwatch is started with START. While running, the START key is
illuminated.
Restart While running, the user stopwatch can be restarted from 00:00:00 with a
second press on START.
Pause When pressing STOP the user stopwatch is paused at the current reading;
pause is indicated by a flashing START key. Pressing START again resumes
the counting on from the current reading.
Stop Pressing STOP two times stops the user stopwatch and resets it to zero.
It can display a time range of up to 23:59:59. Should this value be exceeded,
it restarts at 00:00:00.
It is also operative in the background, i.e. if the time-of-day clock or the fader
stopwatch are selected after a START command.
Please note that the user stopwatch and the countdown timer cannot be used
simultaneously. However, when activating COUNT DOWN while the user
stopwatch is running simply reverses the counting direction.

5.8.4 Countdown Timer

If both the MAN stopwatch and the COUNT DOWN timer keys are active the
display shows a countdown timer.
Entering a Start Time The start time can be adjusted with the 3(down) and 4(up) keys. Pressing
one of these keys for an extended time continually increases the setting speed
for quick and convenient adjustment. Maximum start time is 23:59:59.
Start Once the start time is adjusted the countdown timer is started with START.
While running, the START key is illuminated. When reaching zero, the count-
down timer stops, the START key becomes dark, and the original start time
flashes for a few seconds in the display. Afterwards it is displayed steadily.
Restart While running, the countdown timer can be restarted from the adjusted start
time by pressing START.
Pause When pressing STOP the countdown timer is paused at the current reading;
pause is indicated by a flashing START key. Pressing START again resumes
the countdown from the current reading.
Stop Pressing STOP two times stops the countdown timer and resets it to the origi-
nal start time.
It is also operative in the background, i.e. if the time-of-day clock or the fader
stopwatch are selected after a START command.
Please note that the countdown timer and the user stopwatch cannot be used
simultaneously. However, when deactivating COUNT DOWN while the
countdown timer is running simply reverses the counting direction.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-39

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.8.5 GUI Watches

If a user GUI screen is connected, the watch in the upper left corner of the
screen gives a permanent display of the current time and date. The standard
time reference is an internal real-time clock (RTC) with battery back-up.
The RTC continues to run when the console is switched off. Therefore, it
is unnecessary to set the watch on each power up. Three different display
modes (from left to right: analog, radio and digital clock), and two different
date formats (20.Jul.2010 or Jul-20-2010) are available, they can be selected
in the configuration tool (see chapter 6.5.33.1).

5.8.5.1 Time and Date Setting

Both he meter bridge and user GUI watches are simultaneusly set in the
Admin - Date Time page (see chapter 5.12.7.4). The following parameters
can be set:
• Time and date (only if free-running, i.e. Time Sync Source = None)
• Offset; used whenever a temporary offset between the actual watch time
and the time display is desired. If a temporary offset is set, the Offset
indicator in the upper right corner of the dial turns red, as shown left. This
offset is automatically reset to 0:00 when the console is restarted.
On the Admin - Date Time page, the selected time sync source is displayed
for reference.

5.8.5.2 Watch Configuration

The configuration tool allows specifying the time display mode and the time/
date format (User GUI - Settings, see chapter 6.5.33.1) as well as the time
sync reference, a time zone selection, and automatic daylight saving time
switchover for use with NTP or Monitora synchronisation (Config - System
Time, see chapter 6.5.15).

Possible synchronization sources for the watch:
• None (i.e. free-running, controlled by the internal RTC). The sync indica-
tor is displayed in gray, as shown in chapter 5.8.5.1.
• Network (NTP time server)
• Monitora
In NTP and Monitora modes, the sync indicator is displayed in white on
black background, as shown in chapter 5.8.5. If the synchronization fails, it
turns red, as shown left.

5-40  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

In free-running as well as in NTP sync modes, automatic daylight saving

time switchover needs to be activated. In NTP mode, time zone selection
is important for correct time and date display since the time information
received corresponds to UTC, no matter in which time zone the console is
located.
If the watch is synchronized using the Monitora protocol (e.g. from a DigiMe-
dia CAB system), it depends on what time information is sent to the console.

Example: In case of a DigiMedia system receiving a DCF77 time signal, you

need to select GMT time zone since the time stamp sent by DCF77 is correct
for the area within wich it can be received (in fact, it is UTC +1 h or +2 h,
depending on the current daylight saving time status). The automatic daylight
saving time setting needs to be OFF in that case for the same reason.

5.8.5.3 Fader Stopwatches

The upper one of the GUI stopwatches is called the fader stopwatch. It is con-
trolled by the channel(s) for which the Timer Start option has been enabled
in the configuration tool under Config – LogicalInputs – Timer Start – on/off
(refer to chapter 6.5.1). It always (re-) starts at 00:00:00 (hh:mm:ss) when any
of the enabled channels goes on-air, i.e. it is switched ON while its fader is
open, or its fader is opened while it is switched ON. It stops when the fader
is closed or when the channel is switched off.
The label of the logical input that has started the stopwatch is indicated next
to the stopwatch on the GUI screen (such as CD 1, as illustrated left).
Display Range The fader stopwatche can display a time range of up to 23:59:59. Should this
value be exceeded, it restarts at 00:00:00.
Please Note: The lower one of the two stopwatch displays on the user GUI is inactive and
always remains at 00:00:00.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-41

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.9 User Access and Management (Advanced Users Only)

5.9.1 Purpose
OnAir 1500 consoles are used in different studios with different working
practice and different personnel structures. A large part of users in broadcast
studios is not technically oriented. They request from a mixing console that
it is simple to use, reliable, and free of ‘unnecessary’ controls and displays.
Setting of a wider range of console parameters, saving of console settings
(snapshots) and modifications of the console configuration have to be left
for technically more competent users (e.g. studio technicians, chief engineer,
etc.). It may also be necessary to protect parts of system data, and to give the
permission to change them only to a restricted number of users. In order to
satisfy these needs, the OnAir 1500 console supports individual user acces
rights. By assigning appropriate acces rights to each user it is possible to
individually adapt the OnAir 1500 console to very different environments.

The access rights for a specific user are defined on two different levels;
‘privileges’ are defined for access to GUI pages and to groups of console
parameters.
A set of privileges forms a ‘policy’. One or more policies can be assigned to
every user, which means that the access rights for a certain user are the result
of a logical OR combination of all policies assigned to him. If no policy is
assigned to a particular user, he has no access to any of the console settings.

5.9.2 General
Once a user is logged in via the user GUI, his login information is saved in
the user GUI memory (‘container’). The container saves the access rights for
the user currently logged in. After start-up of the console, the default user is
logged in per default.

5.9.3 Users
The default number of users is 20. This number is defined in the user.
xml file and may be up to 64; it cannot be changed during runtime. If more
than 64 users are required, the system must be setup in such a way that the
user management is running on a separate computer (see chapter 5.9.9). The
maximum number of users is 4096.
The first user is the system administrator (Admin), the second user is the
default user (Default), all following users are ‘ordinary’ users (User3...).
The system administrator has a special, unrestricted ‘Admin’ policy that
cannot be modified. The default user also has his special ‘Default’ policy that
may, however, be modified. For reasons of simplicity and reliability, both the
admin and default users have one single, fixed policy only.
The default configuration settings are as follows:
User Name Password User Valid Policies
User 1 Admin admin Yes Admin (policy 1)
User 2 Default - Yes Default (policy 2)
User 3 User 3 - No Policy 3
User 4 User 4 - No Policy 3
... ... - No Policy 3
... ... ... ... ...

5-42  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.9.4 Privileges
A user GUI page or a console parameter group has a flag indicating whether it
can be accessed or not; the flag values are Grant and Deny (i.e., access to the
corresponding page or parameter group is granted or denied). The privileges
are checked on every access.

5.9.5 Policies
Policies are groups of privileges and can be considered as roles (e.g. Journal-
ist, Operator, DJ etc.).
The default number of policies is 8. This number is defined in the user.
xml file and may be up to 16; it cannot be changed during runtime. If more
than 16 policies are required, the system must be setup in such a way that
the user management is running on a separate computer (see chapter 5.9.9).
Then, the maximum number of policies is 255.

5.9.6 Department Snapshots

Snapshot save and recall rights management is performed with the help of
‘departments’. Per default, up to 8 departments can be configured. To every
user one ore more departments can be assigned, or any department at all. In
addition, it can be selected whether he has read-only or read/right access to
the different departments.
The system administrator (‘Admin’) always has read/write access to all
departments as well as to all default, global, and private snapshots, whereas
the default user normally is restricted to the global and his private snapshots.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-43

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.9.7 Parameters
The following tables show GUI pages and console parameter groups for
which privileges may be defined within a policy, together with the pre-defined
(default) privileges for the Admin and Default users; there exists a third
default privilege provided by the software update wizard to ensure downward
compatibility during a software upgrade; in this case, the upgrade wizard will
assign it to all users having the ScreenLock feature.
Single Parameters Privileges of Default Policy
Page Parameter Groups (not implemented in V3.0) Admin Default ScreenLock
GEN On/Off x x
GEN Generator Left x x
Generator Right x x
MicGain x x
GainCal Cal x x
GainCal (Strip) x x
Chan::Input Phase x x
MicPhantom (+48V) x x
MicHPF x x
Other Parameters MicInsertOnOff x x
MicClipLimiter x x
Mono x x
StereoMode (LR/RL/LL/RR) x x

ON Deesser_On/Off x x
DSAutoThreshold x x
DSFreq x x
Chan::DeEs DSQ x x
Other Parameters
DSThreshold x x
DSAttenuation x x
DSRatio x x

EQ ON EQ_On/Off x x
LF_gain x x
LMF_gain x x
EQ Gain
HMF_gain x x
HF_gain x x
LF_frequency x x
Chan::EQ LF_Q x x
LMF_frequency x x
LMF_Q x x
EQ Parameters
HMF_frequency x x
HMF_Q x x
HF_frequency x x
HF_Q x x

5-44  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Single Parameters Privileges of Default Policy

Page Parameter Groups (not implemented in V3.0) Admin Default ScreenLock
DYN Dynamics_On/Off x x
Compressor_gain x x
COMP/LIM Parameters
Auto_make_up_On/Off x x
Limiter_On/Off x x
Limiter_threshold x x
LIM
Limiter_attack_time x x
Limiter_release_time x x
Compressor_On/Off x x
Compressor_threshold x x
COMP Compressor_ratio x x
Compressor_attack_time x x
Chan::DYN
Compressor_release_time x x
Expander_On/Off x x
Expander_threshold x x
EXP Expander_ratio x x
Expander_attack_time x x
Expander_release_time x x
Gate_On/Off x x
Gate_threshold x x
GATE Gate_attenuation x x
Gate_attack_time x x
Gate_release_time x x

Bus_On/Off x x
AUX 1 Aux_Pre/After x x
Bus_Level x x
Chan::AUX Assign
Bus_On/Off x x
AUX 2 Aux_Pre/After x x
Bus_Level x x

Bus_On/Off x x
Bus_Level x x
Contr_On_OFF x x
N–X 1
Contr_Level x x
BusOnOffNXFullReturn x x
NXFullReturn x x
Chan::N–X Assign ... ... ... ...
Bus_On/Off x x
Bus_Level x x
Contr_On_OFF x x
N–X 8
Contr_Level x x
BusOnOffNXFullReturn x x
NXFullReturn x x

Pan_On/Off x x
PanBal
Pan_value x x
PRGBusA; Bus_On/Off
Chan::FDR Bus Other Parameters
RecBus; Bus_On/Off
RecBus; Rec_PF x x
Record
RecBus; Record x x
Note: The privilege for Insert On/Off is defined in the ROUT::Insert section.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-45

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Single Parameters Privileges of Default Policy

Page Parameter Groups (not implemented in V3.0) Admin Default ScreenLock
Program_A_Master; Mono x x
Program_A_Master; Gain x x
Program_A_Master; DelayOn x x
Program_A_Master; DelayTime x x
SUM::Master All Parameters
Record_Master; Mono x x
Record_Master; Gain x x
Record_Master; DelayOn x x
Record_Master; DelayTime x x

Mono x x
AUX 1 DelayOn x x
DelayTime x x
SUM::AUX
Mono x x
AUX 2 DelayOn x x
DelayTime x x

Mono x x
N–X 1:Other Parameters Record_Master; DelayOn x x
Record_Master; DelayTime x x
N–X 1: Init InitLevels x x
N–X 1: Mode Mode x x
SUM::N–X ... ... ... ...
Mono x x
N–X 8:Other Parameters Record_Master; DelayOn x x
Record_Master; DelayTime x x
N–X 8: Init InitLevels x x
N–X 8: Mode Mode x x

DeskDriver; Strips; InputSelector x x

Connect x x
ROUT::Input All Parameters
Clear x x
StripChannelX; Routing Locked x x

Connect x x
ROUT::Output All Parameters
Clear x x

Insert1 (Source Selector) x x

Insert 1 Insert_On/Off x x
InsertPosition x x
ROUT::Insert ... ... ... ...
Insert8 (Source Selector) x x
Insert 8 Insert_On/Off x x
InsertPosition x x

Assign x x
ROUT::Mic Group All Parameters
Clear x x

ROUT::XL Assign All Parameters Input Selector x x

Create x x
Modify Snapshot Rename; File & NewName x x
SNAP::Shot
Delete x x
Recall Snapshot Load x x

SNAP::Route All Parameters Load x x

5-46  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Single Parameters Privileges of Default Policy

Page Parameter Groups (not implemented in V3.0) Admin Default ScreenLock
Save x x
SNAP::Ext All Parameters
Recall x x

Admin::Brightness All Parameters x x

DeskDriver; Module Table;

Admin::Fader Cal All Parameters x
FaderCalibration

Admin::Firmware All Parameters x

setOffset x
Admin::Date Time All Parameters
apply x

SaveDeskSettings x
SaveToExtMedia x
Admin::Config All Parameters
LoadFromExtMedia x
StartConfig x

Admin::Scrn Cal All Parameters x

Admin::Setup All Parameters x

GeneratorSignal x
Admin::Generator All Parameters GeneratorFrequency x
GeneratorLevel x

Additional Parameters: The console parameters below are not necessarily visible on the screen;
however, privileges may be defined for them as well.

Single Parameters Privileges of Default Policy

Page Parameter Groups (not implemented in V3.0) Admin Default ScreenLock
UserKeys1-20 UserKey1-UserKey20 x x x
Meter Meter (AF, PF, N–X Send) x x x
Other Functions
GRM GRM (C/L, DeEs) x x x
AcceptLogMessages x x x

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-47

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.9.8 Internal Access Handling

The extensions providing the interface to the user are responsible for checking
the corresponding privileges.

5.9.8.1 User GUI

The user GUI extension checks the privileges on two different levels, i.e.
for pages and for console parameters. For a user having no access right to a
certain page, this page will not open. Access to a console parameter depends
of the current privilege flag setting:
Grant The corresponding button or the black parameter value field above the rotary
encoder is visible and allows controlling this parameter.
Deny The corresponding button or the black parameter value field above the rotary
encoder is not visible, there is no way for controlling this parameter.

Special Cases:
Parameters without Privileges There exist console parameters without privileges, such as fader level, channel
on/off, PFL). These parameters can be controlled from the user GUI whenever
access to the corresponding page is granted.

Access The Access button on the CHAN - Input page allowing the user to request
access to the microphone inputs’ unique resources is visible only if access to
at least one of these parameters is granted.

Insert ON/OFF The privilege for the Insert ON/OFF buttons on the CHAN - FDR/Bus and
the Sum - Master pages is defined in the ROUT::Insert section. Therefore
the Insert ON/OFF button for a certain logical input or master is visible only
if the user has access to the insert currently assigned to that logical input or
master.

Input Routing The input routing (strip assignment) can be controlled from both the CHAN -
Input and the Routing - Input pages. The ROUT::Input - All Parameters
privilege provides access to the strip assignent on both pages.
As a consequence, the CHAN - Input page and the Input Selection button
on this page can be accessed under the following conditions:
• For logical inputs:
• The CHAN - Input page is accessible if either the ROUT::Input - All
Parameters privilege or at least one of the CHAN::Input privileges
are granted.
• The Input Selection button on the CHAN - Input page is visible if
the ROUT::Input - All Parameters privilege is granted.
• For all sum buses:
• The CHAN - Input page is accessible if the ROUT::Input - All Par­
ameters privilege is granted. Any SUM::... privileges are ignored.
• The Input Selection button on the CHAN - Input page is always
visible.

5-48  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.9.8.2 Desk
The desk extension checks the privileges for the desk keys and rotary encod-
ers. Access to them depends of the current privilege flag setting:
Grant The corresponding key or rotary encoder on the desk surface allows control-
ling its parameter.
Deny The corresponding key or rotary encoder on the desk surface has no effect
and is not displayed on the OLED display.

5.9.8.3 Configuration Tool

If the configuration tool is running in standalone mode, system selection but-
tons appear. When selecting a system, the system administrator’s password is
verified, because only the system administrator has the privilege to configure
the console.

5.9.8.4 Other Extensions

Extensions such as GPIO, CAB or CMS controllers implementing an inter-
face to 3rd-party software do not check any privileges. Access rights must be
handled by the 3rd-party software.

5.9.9 Central User Management

‘Central User Management’ allows central administration of the console
users and their privileges in a network of consoles. Configuration of users
and privileges is called ‘user configuration’ below.
For central user management, an additional central user management server,
i.e. a Windows 2000 or XP computer, is required within the network; then,
each console asks the central user management server for the required user
information.
OnAir 2500 OnAir 3000
OnAir 1500 OnAir 1500 Core

Central User Management Server

(Windows 2000/XP)

Modifications of the user configuration can be done either on one of the
consoles, or on the central user management server, or on both in parallel.
Modifications are visible immediately on all consoles within the network or
within the same multicast group. New user settings (such as a password) and
privileges will be effective when this user logs in the next time.
For configuration information, please refer to chapter 6.5.30.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-49

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.9.9.1 Principles
The ‘user’ extension that provides the user configuration parameters runs
on the central user management server as well as on each system core. The
central user extension on the server provides all parameters, as they are used
by all consoles in the network. The local user extensions on each core serve
as backup solution only in case the central server should fail. These are con-
figured (in the user.xml file) to provide at least the Admin and Default
user configurations.

The configuration tool always connects to the local user extension. So, for a
remote user configuration of the users hosted by the central user extensions,
the administrator has to select the system running the central user extensions
after having started the ConfigTool.

5.9.9.2 Standalone Systems

Of course, the concept described above also works for a standalone console.
However, for a standalone console without central user management the
server is not required. The user extension runs locally on the core container,
and it can be configured (in the user.xml file) to provide up to 64 users
and 16 policies.
If more users or policies are required, or if users need to be managed centrally
even on a standalone system, an additional container must be started on the
server to run the central user extension. The user extension running locally
then only provides the Admin and Default user’s parameters, as described
above.

User Users Policies

Comment
Extension on: max. max.
As specified by the user.xml file
Standalone Console: Console 64* 16**
(Defaults: *20 and **8, resp.)
User configurations of the Admin and the
With Central User Console 2 2
default users are replicated to each console
Management Server:
Server 4096 255 As specified by the user.xml file

5.9.9.3 In Case of a Failure...

Failure of the central user management server or the network connection has
the following consequences:
• Login is possible as Admin only.
• The configuration tool provides access to the local user configuration only
(i.e. for the Admin and the Default user). A user configuration made while
the central user management server or the network connection is down
will be overwritten as soon as the central user extension re-appears on the
network.
But: • No consequences for the privileges of the user currently logged in, as they
are temporarily saved in the DSP core locally.
• Logout remains possible.

5-50  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.10 External Audio Synchronization (Advanced Users Only)

The synchronization source may be internal or external. For external syn-
chronization, the type of available external synchronization signal(s), i.e.,
the sync source, must be selected in the configuration (see chapter 6.5.29).
Available Sync Sources Possible Sampling Rates OnAir 1500
INTERNAL 44.1 / 48 kHz ±100 ppm (default)
AES/EBU 44.1 / 48 kHz
WORDCLOCK 44.1 / 48 kHz
* NO drop frame sources allowed/possible

If synchronization is lost while the console is synchronized to an external

signal, a message box is displayed, and a warning (Missing External Clock)
is added to the error list.
If the console was synchronized to either Wordclock or AES/EBU and the sync
signal is lost, the console automatically switches to Internal mode. As soon
as a valid external clock is available again, the console is re-synchronized.

5.11 Diagnostics (Advanced Users Only)

The concept of the OnAir 1500 diagnostics system consists of three topics:

Error Handling This is the distribution part for the detected errors, warnings and information
from the diagnostics system.
System Diagnostics This is the software running in the background and detecting system errors.
System Tests System Tests are executed on the service engineer’s demand in order to run
some specific performance checks, i.e., to check efficiency of buttons and
faders. For this purpose the console is switched to a special test mode.

5.11.1 Error Handling

5.11.1.1 Principle
Error messages can be distributed in the whole mixing console system. It is
possible to configure each GUI to show and accept errors from each console.
Also complete house systems with a central diagnostics station running the
‘Log Screen’ application can be configured. In the example below, one OnAir
1500, one OnAir 2500 and one OnAir 3000 core (mixer 3) are shown. Each
of mixers 1 and 2 displays its own error messages. Since mixer 3 has no GUI,
its error messages, together with the ones from the other mixers, are logged
by the central log station.

Mixer 1 Mixer 2 Mixer 3 Errors from all Mixers

Ethernet
Log Screen Application

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-51

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.11.1.2 Error Types

There are three types of user log messages:
Information Information messages are generated in order to inform the user on a console
status that doesn’t reduce the functionality of the console. Usually this is the
information that an existing problem doesn’t appear anymore.
Warnings Warning messages are generated when a minor problem occurs that can be
handled by the system itself. The system may modify some console settings
in order to solve the problem. Normal operation is still possible, but probably
in a slightly different or restricted way.
Errors Error messages are generated if a serious problem prevents the console from
normal operation. In case of an error the system is not able to handle the prob-
lem itself. Example: ‘SYSTEM, Fatal software error occurred
- System will be stopped. For details see log-file’.

5.11.1.3 Log System

Each mixer has its own internal log list that is automatically displayed if it
contains one or more entries.
If a system message occurs, the diagnostics software manages the log list
which contains one entry for each system message, completed by time and
date of occurrence.
If the log list contains more than one entry, the PREV and NEXT buttons
appear on the Home page, allowing scrolling through the messages.
A user having access permission can accept warning and information entries;
this causes the diagnostics software to remove the accepted entry from the log
list. The log list is automatically cleared when the console is powered off.
Some entries in the log list need to be indicated immediately on their occur-
rence. A dialog box does this regardless of the currently selected page on the
screen.
Each log list entry consists of:
• Error text
• Error type (information, warning, error)
• Date and time of occurrence.
Central Error Logger The Central Error Logger is equipped with an improved Log Screen. The
logger can also run as a Windows® application. It collects all error messages
centrally and writes them to the log file. The new LogScreen allows an admin-
istrator loading and inspecting saved log files as well as checking the health
state of the system by checking error logs in quasi real-time. Extensive filter
functions allow focusing on particular error messages.

5.11.2 System Diagnostics

System diagnostic is an application running in the background that detects
error events in the system during power up and operation.
During Power Up Items checked by the system diagnostics software at power up:
• Hardware Devices
• Communication
• Configuration – Any difference to the hardware configuration before the
last power down (i.e., missing or additional options) results in a warning
or information message.

5-52  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

During Operation
The system diagnostics software continuously observes the system during
operation in order to detect the following conflicts:
• External sync clock loss
• Power failure
• Hardware modification.
Restricted Functions Usually, there is no indication of any error or warning if the execution of
functions is prohibited in case of restrictions, because the user immediately
notes whether the desired function is performed correctly. Nevertheless, some
warnings need to be indicated to the user as a feedback, e.g. if a snapshot
cannot be saved to the external memory device due to insufficient memory
space.
The means to indicate to the user a failure during function execution is a
dialog box appearing always at the same position on the screen. It displays a
system message and will disappear when the user acknowledges the message
by clicking on the OK or Accept button in the box.
Each of these system messages is also entered to the Log List. In order to be
removed from the Log List, it has to be acknowledged by the user.
To prevent the user from being annoyed with lots of warning and error mes-
sage dialog boxes, these are generated only where it is impossible to notice
function execution failure. In these cases an error message is generated if the
function execution fails completely. A warning is given to the user if a func-
tion might be executed partially only.

5.11.3 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)

SNMP is used in network management systems for monitoring devices con-
nected to the network for conditions that require administrative attention.
The ‘traditional’ SNMP management is implemented: The management task
is subdivided into two layers – agents and managers. The agents provide
management data that is read out and processed by the manager.
Basic Concept Management
Station

SNMP Manager

GET GET
TRAP
Request Response

OnAir 1500 Subsystem

SNMP Agent

The OnAir 1500 SNMP implementation allows monitoring a large variety of

parameters, including operating status, communication, power supplies, etc.
These parameters are called ‘managed objects’.
OnAir 1500 Subsystem
Managed Objects Overview
Operating Status Communication Power Supply Host System Version + Firmware Licensed SW + Options

Users Network System COM Ports Extensions RELINK

On-air Connection Status Fan Memory Desk CAB
D21m User Server Disk Space D21m ProBel
DSP Snapshot Server Audio Clock CMS
Audio Clock ProBel DSP
Desk CMS Config Tool
CAB SNMP Agent
RELINK

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-53

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

The manager may send requests for available parameter values. Furthermore,
an agent can send information to the network in an active way, as soon as a
surveyed parameter exceeds a specified threshold (such as a level). Informa-
tion sent when exceeding a threshold is called ‘trap’. Traps are usually used to
transfer critical system messages that need to be sent on an emergency basis.
An SNMP manager may analyse traps, monitor messages, and alert or even
send an SMS to a specified mobile phone.
A management information base (MIB) describes the structure of the manage-
ment data for OnAir 1500. It uses a hierarchical namespace containing object
identifiers (OID). Each OID identifies a variable that can be read via SNMP.

Traps are configured in the snmp.xml file. A ‘limit’ and an ‘operator’ can
be defined for each possible managed object. If a subsystem generates a user
message, this may also generate a trap (including message ID, type, text,
range, etc.).

SNMP is an integral part of the OnAir 1500 implementation. Some informa-

tion, such as DSP temperature, are accessible via SNMP only. It is therefor
mandatory to have at least one simple SNMP manager installed in every
system. Many different SNMP manager softwares are available. If none is
present already, an MG-Soft MIB Browser can be provided.

5.11.3.1 Requirements for SNMP Operation

An SNMP.ini file must be available in the Desk folder for SNMP
operation. Renaming the template file is sufficient.

If traps are required, the IP address of the SNMP manager (MIB browser) must
be defined in the SNMP.ini file. The desired traps must be commented
out in the SNMP.xml files located in the SNMP folder of every subsystem,
they must be configured individually.

5-54  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.11.4 Error Messages

5.11.4.1 System
Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
1000 ERROR SYSTEM, Fatal software error occurred - System will be stopped. For details see log-file.
1001 WARNING SYSTEM, Extension 'TalkBack.ext' could not be started. Reason: ’File ’xml\TalkBack.xml' not found’.
SYSTEM, Extension ‘User.ext’ default settings assumed. Reason: 'Did not find XML-File or XDR-File: xml\
1005 WARNING
User.xml'.
1100 ERROR SYSTEM, 'Desk' communication failure: Connection to 'System40:Core' lost.
SYSTEM, Low Memory on 'System40:Core'.
1201 WARNING
Physical Memory available: 4.802 MB
1202 WARNING SYSTEM, Not enough physical memory on 'System40:Core' host card. Memory upgrade required.
1401 WARNING SYSTEM, Initial Snapshot cannot be loaded. Incompatible snapshot file version ‘myFirstSnap’.
1402 WARNING SYSTEM, Initial Snapshot file ‘myFirstSnap’ is corrupted!
1403 WARNING SYSTEM, Initial Snapshot files cannot be created. Not enough memory on the ‘CORE’ file system!
1404 WARNING SYSTEM, Initial Snapshot file 'c10_initial.iss' cannot be created on the 'CORE'. Error code 3.
SYSTEM, Initial Snapshot file 'c10_initial.iss ' cannot be created on the 'CORE '. The folder 'snapshots'
1405 WARNING
doesn't exist.
1409 WARNING SYSTEM, Initial Snapshot cannot be loaded. Incompatible product identification in snapshot ‘myFirstSnap’.
SYSTEM, The initial Snapshot folder ‘path’ does not exist. Initial Snapshots could not be loaded nor
1410 WARNING
created.

5.11.4.2 Core Driver

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
2000 ERROR CORE DRIVER, DSP card failure. DSP card in slot 1 missing.
2001 ERROR CORE DRIVER, DSP card failure. Firmware download to DSP card in slot 1 failed. File ‘sh4.hex’ not found.
2002 ERROR CORE DRIVER, DSP card failure. Firmware download to DSP card in slot 1 failed. Write error.
2003 ERROR CORE DRIVER, DSP card failure. No communication with DSP card in slot 1. Card is not alive.
CORE DRIVER, DSP card failure. No communication with DSP card in slot 1. SH4 is not ready to receive
2004 ERROR
parameters.
2005 ERROR CORE DRIVER, DSP card failure. Initialization error of DSP card in slot 1. ‘Reason’.
2050 ERROR CORE DRIVER, Failure of DSP card in slot 1. The card is uninitialized.
2051 ERROR CORE DRIVER, Failure of DSP card in slot 1. The card has a SH4 error.
2052 ERROR CORE DRIVER, Failure of DSP card in slot 1. The PCI memory is not visible
CORE DRIVER, Configuration mismatch. The DSP cards provide only 18 audio channels for the 24
2100 ERROR
channel console.
2101 ERROR CORE DRIVER, Cannot load PCI Driver. File ‘PCICE.dll’ not found.
2200 WARNING CORE DRIVER, DSP card in slot 1 deactivated.
2201 INFO CORE DRIVER, DSP card in slot 1 detected.
CORE DRIVER, DSP card in slot 1 detected. Please make sure, the CORE is rebooted in order to achieve
2202 INFO
system consistency.
2400 ERROR CORE DRIVER, No communication to CORE.
2403 ERROR CORE DRIVER, DSP Card in slot 1 failed! Card has been reset.
CORE DRIVER, DSP Card in slot 1 failed! Code reloaded to redundant card in slot 6. Connect HD Link
2404 ERROR
cables of DSP slot 1 to DSP slot 6!
2405 ERROR CORE DRIVER, Communication to CORE lost.
2406 INFO CORE DRIVER, Bridge Card firmware was downloaded. This will take effect after next restart of Core.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-55

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.11.4.3 I/O 21
Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
3001 INFO I/O 21, Rack “Int”: Reconfiguration required.
I/O 21, The Rack “Ext 1” was reconfigured. Please make sure, the CORE is rebooted in order to achieve
3002 INFO
system consistency.
3003 WARNING I/O 21, Slot change: Card from Slot 2 of the rack ‘Internal’ removed.
3004 INFO I/O 21, Slot change: Same Card in Slot 2 of the rack ‘External 1‘ re-installed.
3005 INFO I/O 21, Slot failure: The Card in Slot 13 must be a GPIO Card.
I/O 21, Slot change: Card to Slot 2 added. Please reconfigure the rack ‘Internal‘ and reboot the CORE in
3006 INFO
order to achieve system consistency.
3007 WARNING I/O 21, Slot failure: Unknown Card found. Card in Slot 3 of the rack ‘D21m Rack 1‘ not supported.
3008 WARNING I/O 21, Secondary power failure: Analog Power. (Rack ‘External 2’)
3010 WARNING I/O 21, Primary Power Supply 1 failed. (Rack ‘External 1’)
3011 WARNING I/O 21, Primary Power Supply 2 failed. (Rack ‘Internal’)
3012 WARNING I/O 21, Fan failure. (Rack ‘Internal’).
3013 WARNING I/O 21, Could not open port COMX.
3014 ERROR I/O 21, Missing D21m rack ’External 1’.
3015 WARNING I/O 21, Fan unit disconnected. (Rack ‘Internal’).
3016 WARNING I/O 21, Communication to rack ‘Internal‘ lost.
3018 INFO I/O 21, Invalid module on merger port 13
I/O 21, Card in slot 2 of rack ‘External 3’ is not allowed in this slot. It is not possible to load a consistent
3021 ERROR
configuration.
I/O 21, Additional HD Link to a DSP card required. Rack 'Int' provides 128 inputs, but only 96 channels are
3022 INFO
connected to the CORE. 32 inputs not available.
I/O 21, Additional HD Link to a DSP card required. Rack 'Int' provides 128 outputs, but only 96 channels
3023 INFO
are connected to the CORE. 32 outputs not available.
3024 INFO I/O 21, MADI card in slot 3 of the rack 'Int' switched to redundant interface. AUX interface is active.
'3025 WARNING I/O 21, MADI card in slot 3 of the rack 'Int': Neither MAIN nor AUX interface is active.
I/O 21, Not enough MADI channels from StageBox 'StageBox1' to Rack 'Int'. Provides 80 inputs, but only
3026 INFO
64 channels are available. 16 inputs not available.
I/O 21, Not enough MADI channels from StageBox 'StageBox1' to Rack ' Int '. Provides 80 outputs, but only
3027 INFO
64 channels are available. 16 outputs not available.
3029 ERROR I/O 21, Product Verification Failed. The Product doesn’t match the hardware platform.
3030 WARNING I/O 21, HD-Card unlock. Missing HD-Link input signal. (Rack ‘External 2’)
3031 INFO I/O 21, HD-Card lock. HD-Link input signal available. (Rack ‘External 2’)
I/O 21, Configuration mismatch: Card from Slot 2 of the rack ‘Internal‘ and the D21m.xml configuration
3033 WARNING
doesn’t match.XML configuration ignored!
I/O 21, Configuration mismatch: Card from Slot 2 of the rack ‘StageBox1‘ and the D21m.xml configuration
3034 WARNING
doesn’t match. Hardware configuration ignored!
3035 WARNING I/O 21, Missing GPIO Card(s). 32 GPInputs configured, 16 GPInputs found.
3036 WARNING I/O 21, Missing GPIO Card(s). 32 GPOutputs configured, 16 GPOutputs found.

5.11.4.4 GPIO Functions

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
GPIOFunctions, The Input- / OutputFunction 3 doesn't work properly! Please check the selected
3102 WARNING
arguments.
GPIOFunctions, Snapshot File ‘myGlobalSnap’ not found. The Input- / OutputFunction 3 doesn't work
3104 WARNING
properly!

5-56  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.11.4.5 Desk / User GUI / Configuration Tool

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
4100 WARNING DESK, No communication with Fader module at Port 43 on Container100.
4101 WARNING DESK, File 'fader3.hex' not found. Firmware download to Fader module at Port 43 on Container100 failed.
DESK, Fader calibration failed, one or more fader uncalibrated on Fader module at Port 43 on
4102 WARNING
Container100.
4104 WARNING DESK, Missing Fader module at Port 12 on Container100.
DESK, Wrong module type at Port 12 on Container100. A Fader module is expected instead of a Rotary
4105 WARNING
module.
4106 WARNING DESK, One or more fader uncalibrated on Fader module at Port 43 on Container100.
4107 WARNING DESK, Could not open port COMX.
4108 WARNING DESK, Main Power Supply fail.
4109 WARNING DESK, Redundant Power Supply fail.
4110 WARNING DESK, Could not found folder ‘Firmware’.
4200 WARNING CONFIG, AutoConfig not completed! No input modules detected. No Initial Snapshot created.
4201 WARNING CONFIG, AutoConfig not completed! No output modules detected. No Initial Snapshot created.
CONFIG, AutoConfig cannot complete to map all input signals to LogicalInputs. Increase the number of
4202 WARNING
LogicalInputs and re-run auto configuration.
CONFIG, AutoConfig cannot complete to map all output signals to LogicalOutputs. Increase the number of
4203 WARNING
LogicalOutputs and re-run AutoConfig.
4204 WARNING CONFIG, AutoConfig detected unknown IO-Card in Slot 7.
CONFIG, AutoConfig cannot complete to map all GPInputs to GPInputFunctions. Increase the number of
4205 WARNING
GPInputFunctions and re-run auto configuration.
CONFIG, AutoConfig cannot complete to map all GPOutputs to GPOutputFunctions. Increase the number
4206 WARNING
of GPOutputFunctions and re-run auto configuration.
4210 INFO CONFIG, Screen Lock cannot be activated for the administrator.
4211 WARNING CONFIG, Alias is already in use! Alias will not be changed.
4212 WARNING DESK, The Alias ‘Input 1” appears twice in the range of LogicalInputs of Desk ‘Primary Desk’.
4300 WARNING SYSTEM, Logon failed: Wrong user name or password.
4301 WARNING USER, User name is already in use. The user name has to be unique.
4302 WARNING SYSTEM, No Policy defined. User ‘John’ logged in, but all access denied.
4303 WARNING SYSTEM, One or more policies missing. User ‘John’ logged in, but access privileges may be reduced.
DESK, Mic Control Access to input “Mic 1” no longer provided. Desk “PRI DESK” of System “SR-3” has
4400 WARNING
gained access.
4500 WARNING CONFIG, The CODEC return line of input ‘Codec1’ is no longer connected to ‘Cent 04’ of system ‘P422’.
4601 WARNING CONFIG GUI, Could not open file ‘D:\Temp\081104' for reading.

5.11.4.6 Snapshot Handling

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
5000 WARNING SNAPSHOT, Snapshot File ‘myFirstSnap’ not found or invalid! Snapshot not loaded.
SNAPSHOT, Snapshot recall incomplete. Audio parameters of channel '2' on 'Container100' are pending.
5001 WARNING
Input ‘Digi1’ is on-air.
5002 WARNING SNAPSHOT, Snapshot cannot be loaded. Incompatible snapshot file version ‘myFirstSnap’.
5003 WARNING SNAPSHOT, Snapshot File ‘myFirstSnap’ corrupted!
5004 WARNING SNAPSHOT, Snapshot files can not be created. Not enough memory on the ‘CORE’ file system!
5005 WARNING SNAPSHOT, Snapshot files can not be transferred. Not enough memory on external storage media!
5006 WARNING SNAPSHOT, Snapshot file server not properly configured. Check configuration and network connection.
5009 WARNING SNAPSHOT, Snapshot file server was shutting down or connection lost.
SNAPSHOT, To complete the software update please save the whole start-up configuration. Make sure that
5010 WARNING
all subsystems are running.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-57

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.11.4.7 Routing
Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
Routing failure. The routing of channel 2 on Container100 could not be changed. Channel 2 on
6000 WARNING
Container100 is virtual.
6001 WARNING Pending Routing. The routing of channel 2 on Container100 is not yet changed. Input Digi1 is on-air.
Routing failure. The routing of channel 2 on Container100 could not be changed. Channel 1 on
6002 WARNING
Container100 is locked.
Routing failure. Inexistent Input (#17) cannot be assigned to channel. No Input assigned to channel 2 on
6003 WARNING
Container100.
Routing failure. Not enough DSP channels. Input “DVD 5.1” cannot be assigned to channel 2 on
6004 WARNING
Container100.
Routing failure. The source of output PGM Out on Container100 could not be changed. The output is
6102 WARNING
locked.

5.11.4.8 System (a)

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
7000 WARNING CF CARD, Cannot read card. Unidentified Format!
SYSTEM, Extension 'UserGUI.ext' could not load User Buttons. Reason: 'Did not find XML-File or
7002 WARNING
XDR-File: xml\ GUI_UserButtons.xml’.
7004 WARNING SYSTEM, ‘UILogic.xml’ has an incompatible XDR file. Default settings assumed.

5.11.4.9 Option Manager

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
LICENSE Manager, System identification has changed. Please enter new license key. Optional software
7100 INFO
will stop working in 15 days.
LICENSE Manager, License key was changed. Core and desk(s) must be restarted to take effect of the
7101 INFO
change.
LICENSE Manager, System identification has changed since more than 15 days. Please enter new license
7102 WARNING
key. Optional software is now disabled.
LICENSE Manager, License keys cannot be loaded. Incompatible license file version in ‘fileName’. Optional
7103 WARNING
software is not enabled.

5.11.4.10 System (b)

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
SYSTEM, Connection to CORE ‘System71’ lost. The Routing Snapshots of that CORE can no longer be
7111 WARNING
recalled remotely.
7200 WARNING SYSTEM, Number of 'Logical Inputs' has been truncated to '255'.
SYSTEM, CustomLogics are not supported on this system. Enable CustomLogics by increasing system
7201 WARNING
memory to 512MByte.
SYSTEM, The console set-up cannot be changed, since there is at least one channel on-air. Please make
7300 WARNING
sure no channel is on-air and try again.
SYSTEM, The console set-up cannot be changed, since there is at least one remote channel (I/O sharing)
7301 WARNING
on-air. Please make sure no channel is on-air on a remote system and try again.
7302 WARNING SYSTEM, Please restart core and desk(s) to complete the set-up change.
7303 WARNING SYSTEM, Please restart the 'Desk' to complete the set-up change.
7400 WARNING SYSTEM, Product.ini is missing.

5-58  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.11.4.11 CAB Extension

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
8001 WARNING CAB, Broadcast Automation disconnected.
8100 WARNING CAB (Monitora protocol), SELECT_SOURCE failed: No free stripchannel.
CAB (Monitora protocol), SET_SAS_INPUTROUTING failed: HD-Link signal ID out of range. InputLine can
8101 WARNING
not be routed."
8102 WARNING CAB (Monitora protocol), Could not open port COMX.

5.11.4.12 ProBel Controller Extension

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
8200 WARNING PROBEL Controller, Could not open port COMX.
8201 WARNING PROBEL Controller, “Master Channel Base” conflicts with logical input or patch input numbers.
8202 WARNING PROBEL Controller, Connection lost to External Router Control System (RCS)

5.11.4.13 CMS Controller Extension

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
8301 WARNING CMS Controller, Connection lost to external Call Management System (CMS)

5.11.4.14 I/O Sharing

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
8500 WARNING IOSHARING, Did not find XML-file: xml\IoSharing.xml
8501 WARNING IOSHARING, Could not reset physical connection on HD Link In '22', since it is still in use!
IOSHARING, I/O Sharing not enabled on system 'P422'. Missing dongle or license key. IO-Sharing will not
8503 WARNING
work properly.
IOSHARING, Audio connection could not be established, since there are too few physical connections
8504 WARNING
available. No audio on ‘left‘ channel of ‘Logical Input‘ ‘Label‘ !
8506 WARNING IOSHARING, Could not modify NetInput, since it is still in use by 'Ext MonSource16' on system 'P422'.
8507 WARNING IOSHARING, Connection to producer CORE ‘System71’ lost.
IOSHARING, Conflict while system 'P422' is re-establishing a physical connection. The ‘left channel’ of the
8508 WARNING
local output 'LogOut44'will be disconnected and re-used for the physical connection to system 'P422'!
IOSHARING, Conflict while re-establishing a physical connection to HD Link ‘35’. Physical output ‘Ext 4,
8509 WARNING Slot 3, Line Out, Ch.33’ of system'P422' is already used by a physical connection to system 'P321'. The
physical connection could not be established!

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-59

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.11.4.15 Backup/Restore
Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
BACKUP/RESTORE, Backup Failed! Mandatory configuration file ‘config.xml’ not found. No backup
8700 WARNING
created.
8701 WARNING BACKUP/RESTORE, Backup Failed! Not enough memory to store backup files. No backup created.
BACKUP/RESTORE, Backup Failed! Configuration file 'config.xml ' cannot be backuped. ‘Error Text’. No
8702 WARNING
backup created.
8703 WARNING BACKUP/RESTORE, Backup Failed! File transfer from ‘CORE’ interrupted. No backup created.
8704 WARNING BACKUP/RESTORE, Backup Failed! Could not create Backup Directory ‘DirName’. No backup created.
8711 WARNING BACKUP/RESTORE, Restore Failed! Not enough memory on the ‘CORE’ file system. Restore aborted.
BACKUP/RESTORE, Restore Failed! Configuration file 'config.xml ' cannot be restored to 'CORE'. ‘Error
8712 WARNING
Text’. Restore aborted.
8713 WARNING BACKUP/RESTORE, Restore Failed! File transfer to 'CORE' interrupted. Restore aborted.
BACKUP/RESTORE, Missing configuration file! Mandatory configuration file 'config.xml ' not found. File not
8714 INFO
restored to 'CORE'.
BACKUP/RESTORE, Restore Failed! Trying to restore a backup to the wrong type of Core. Restore
8715 WARNING
aborted.
8721 WARNING BACKUP/RESTORE, Rename Backup Failed! Backup ‘xyz’ not renamed.
8731 WARNING BACKUP/RESTORE, Delete Backup Failed! Backup ‘xyz’ not or not completely deleted.
BACKUP/RESTORE, Reboot is not possible, since there is at least one channel on-air. Please make sure
8740 WARNING
no channel is on-air and try again.
8750 INFO BACKUP/RESTORE, Please restart core and desk(s) to complete the restore operation.

5.11.4.16 Custom Logic

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
CUSTOM LOGICS, Connection to CORE ‘System71’ lost. Remote GPIO and Custom Logics from that
8800 WARNING
CORE are not available.
8805 WARNING CUSTOM LOGICS, More than 10 gates cascaded at Gate ‘AND 21’! Source cleared.
8806 WARNING CUSTOM LOGICS, Feedback detected at Gate ‘AND 21’. Source cleared.

5.11.4.17 Time Sync

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
9000 WARNING TIME SYNC, No communication with Time Sync Card.
9001 WARNING TIME SYNC, Could not open port COMX.

5.11.4.18 Audio Clock

Error Code Error Type Error Text / Remarks
9100 ERROR AUDIO CLOCK, No communication with Audio Clock Card.
9101 WARNING AUDIO CLOCK, Could not open port COM1
9102 WARNING AUDIO CLOCK, Clock reference changed to WordClock.
9103 ERROR AUDIO CLOCK, Missing external WordClock.
9104 WARNING AUDIO CLOCK, File ‘audioclock_ext.ini’ not found.

5-60  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12 GUI Operation (Advanced Users Only)

GUI operation requires a DVI screen and a USB keyboard and/or mouse

connected to the system. Basic information on mouse/keyboard operation is
given in chapter 5.1.

Please Note: In order to have operating instructions available as fast as possible, the fol-
! lowing chapters are temporary copies of the OnAir 2500 manual and will be
updated soon. Some features are not supported by the OnAir 1500.

5.12.1 Home Page

The left, upper, and right borders of the screen are always visible. They contain
(clockwise):
• Fader stop watch
• Two stereo level meters, a phase correlation meter for each of them, and
a label below the level meters that indicates the current meter tap point
• Watch (real-time clock and date)
• Menu buttons
• Red light indicators, ‘Frisbee’ On-Air indicator symbol
• Configurable function buttons.
The home page’s central area displays the user currently logged in as well as
the owner and the name of the last loaded snapshot.
An error message window is displayed on the home page as well in case an
internal error should occur.

Level Meter
Two 130-segment stereo bar graph level meters with configurable charac-
teristics and scale. The 0 dB indication automatically considers the selected
headroom (i.e., 0 dB indication = 0 dBFS – selected headroom).
Above each level meter bar graph a phase correlation meter with a –1...+1
scale allows judging the mono compatibility of the audio signal (the more
positive the indication is, the better mono compatibility is given).

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-61

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Level Meter Label The label below each level meter bar graph indicates the current meter tap
point. Touching this label opens a configurable list of the available tap points
to select from.

Red Light Indicators The CR and ST 2 (control room and studio) indicators work in parallel
with the CR and ST red light indicators in the central section. An on-air con-
dition is indicated by changing the color of the ‘Frisbee’ symbol next to the
OnAir 1500 label to red (and lighting the central section’s ON-AIR indicator).

Interface Indicators The three indicator fields (CAB, CMS, Router) show the current status of
the optional interfaces to the CAB (computer assisted broadcast) system such
as a Studer DigiMedia playout system, to the Call Management System, and
to an external router control system. Each of them indicates three different
statuses:
Grayed out – Interface not configured
White on black – Interface configured and active
Bright red on black – Interface configured, but not active.

GUI Function Buttons

The function of each of the twelve buttons at the right-hand edge of the screen
is configurable. For each of them, a selection from a pool of various GPIO
(general-purpose inputs/outputs) and other functions (such as talkback desti-
nation selection or level meter tap point selection, as shown left) is possible.
Example: Three of the buttons may be configured with ON-AIR, HOLD and

TELEPHONE in order to implement a telephone hybrid remote control over
the GPIOs. In such a case, touching a button generates a short output pulse
on the corresponding control output; the feedback signals from the telephone
hybrid going to the control inputs will highlight the buttons.

5-62  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.2 Channel Pages

To open the channel page and to automatically select the corresponding chan-
nel, click on the Chan field in the main menu. The channel page pops up and
displays the selected channel functions.
In the lower line of the menu bar, the icons represent the current values. A
click on a menu icon opens the corresponding channel page.
Channel Selection: The channel label is indicated in the upper right corner of the page. With the
3and4arrow buttons on both sides of the channel label it is possible to
scroll the channel up and down. A click on the channel label opens the chan-
nel list box where a channel can be directly selected.

5.12.2.1 Input Page

The CHAN - Input page is divided into two sections. The left part shows
the parameters of the currently assigned active input (the picture is somewhat
depending on the input type – the following screenshots show analog or
digital stereo inputs), whereas in the right (GEN) part the test generator can
be activated if the current user has been given appropriate access rights.
Functions Common to All Input Types
Input Selection Assigning another audio input to the current fader channel is easily done by
A click on the Input Selection button, selecting an audio input group from
the MIC/LINE... input group list box, and then selecting an audio input from
the input list box, as shown below.

Phase Inverts the audio signal for mono inputs; inverts the left channel signal for
stereo inputs, except in the RR case (see below) – then of course it makes
sense to invert the right channel signal. The Phase button is highlighted
whenever phase inversion is active.
Cal The input level calibration value is indicated by the blue bar graph; the exact
value is displayed in dB and can be set with the rotary encoder below.
Note: The mic clip limiter is accessed via the configuration tool only. Refer to
chapter 6.5.1.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-63

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Functions for Stereo Inputs (see the screenshot above)

Mode Selector Stereo signals can be processed in the following modes:
Mono Left and right channels are attenuated by 3 dB and mixed together
LR Normal stereo mode
RL Left/right channels are swapped
LL Left signal on both channels
RR Right signal on both channels
To indicate the current mode, the corresponding button is highlighted.

Functions for Mono Inputs

Mono inputs have the same functionality as the stereo inputs, but without a
stereo mode selector, as shown above.

5-64  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Functions for Microphone Inputs

+48 V
Enables/disables the phantom power for the corresponding mic input; the
button is highlighted when enabled.
HPF Activates a 75 Hz, 12 dB/oct. high-pass (low-cut) filter only available for
microphone inputs; it is part of the analog front end. The button is highlighted
if the filter is active in the signal path.
Mic Insert This button appears only if an an optional D21m I/O frame with a Mic Input
card and an Analog Insert card is used. It activates the corresponding analog
mic insert.
Gain The microphone input gain can be set in a range of –11 to +75 dB. If gain is
set to 0 dB, an input signal with +15 dBu corresponds to 0 dBFS (i.e., the same
level as on an analog line input set to 15 dBu). The gain is indicated by the
blue bar graph and in the Gain field; it is adjusted with the rotary encoder
below the field.
Notes: There is no relation between the gain setting and the configured headroom,
as the headroom setting is only used for the level meters to indicate 0 dB at
nominal level.
The mic clip limiter on/off button that was found on the CHAN - Input
pages of microphone inputs with SW versions below 3.0 had to be moved;
this function can now be accessed via the configuration tool only. Refer to
chapter 6.5.1.

Shared Microphone Inputs Since the microphone input parameters +48 V (phantom power on/off), HPF,
Mic Insert (only in case of an optional, external D21m frame) and Gain are
realized on the physical microphone input rather than in the DSP channel,
they are unique for all sharing logical inputs. In case of I/O sharing operation,
these parameters are accessible only by one system at a time. Access to the
microphone input parameters must be requested in the CHAN - Input page
of the user GUI; the corresponding Mic Control Access button is visible
only if the microphone input is shared. (For information on I/O sharing refer
to chapter 6.5.20).
A user requesting access to the mic input parameters can do this only if nobody
else has done so already on another system within the same network, the Mic
Control Access button is gray and indicates FREE, as shown below.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-65

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

When clicking on the Mic Control Access button its label changes to
LOCAL on green background. At the same time all mic control parameters
are displayed and ready to use, as shown in the next screenshot.

On the other systems within the network, the Mic Control Access button
turns red and displays information on the system currently having access:

5-66  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

If access is requested from another system, a user warning appears there:

After confirmation with Yes, access is taken over by the other system where
the green LOCAL button is displayed now, together with the mic parameter
controls.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-67

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Test Generator Functions

For test purposes, the OnAir 1500 features an internal test signal generator
available for every channel. While the generator is active, the normal channel
buttons in the left part of the page are disabled and displayed in gray. The test
generator may only be activated by users having the appropriate access rights
configured by the system administrator. In addition, the generator cannot
be activated while the corresponding channel is on-air; the GEN button is
grayed-out then. Waveform, frequency and level settings are performed on
the Admin - Gen page (see chapter 5.12.7.8).
Note: Activating the test generator temporarily switches the cannel input from the
assigned source signal to the generator’s output. Channel settings, such as EQ,
dynamics, etc. are not affected, which allows setting the channel parameters
to the desired values using the test generator.

GEN
Generator on/off button; this button is highlighted when the generator is
active.
L, R The format (mono or stereo) of the test generator output follows the current
channel output format.
The L and R buttons route the generator output to the left and/or right channel
and are not displayed for mono input channels.

5-68  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.2.2 De-Esser Page

Each channel has an integrated de-esser. This is a dynamically controlled
filter, normally used to reduce the ‘s’ components of a microphone signal.
The filter range is placed over the signal’s ‘s’ frequency components; if an
‘s’ component is detected in the audio signal, the level within the filter range
is dynamically reduced.
Graph The lower green graph represents the current, static filter curve of the de-
esser. The horizontal axis represents the log. frequency, while the vertical
axis represents the de-esser’s attenuation. Please note that this is a static
indication only, intended to give you an idea of the current filter settings. The
actual attenuation in the selected range depends on the current signal level,
combined with the Threshold and Ratio settings.
The upper green graph indicates the current Threshold setting.

ON Button to enable/disable the de-esser section of this channel; highlighted if

on.
Auto Thr Automatic threshold setting depending on the current signal content. If Auto
Thr is on, the button is highlighted and the threshold graph turns gray.
Frequency Center frequency of the de-esser’s filter band. It is indicated in Hz and can
be set with the rotary encoder below the field in a 4...10 kHz range.
Q Q factor (bandwidth) of the filter. It is indicated as a plain number and can
be set with the rotary encoder below the field in a range of Q = 0.27 (wide)
to 8.7 (narrow).
Threshold The threshold is the audio signal level above which the de-esser starts to act
within the adjusted filter band. It is displayed in dB and can be set with the
rotary encoder below the field in a 96 dB range.
Ratio Level reduction ratio within the filter range, if an ‘s’ component is detected
in the audio signal. This can be set with the rotary encoder below the field in
a range of 1:1 (no effect) through 20:1 (heavy de-essing).

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-69

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.2.3 Equalizer Page

Each channel has a parametric four-band equalizer. If the user has no access
permission to the EQ parameters, the CHAN - EQ page is not displayed.
Graph The red graph represents the EQ’s current frequency response curve, cumu-
lated from all filters.
LOW, MID LOW, MID HIGH, HIGH
Clicking on one of these edit buttons selects one of the four frequency
bands for adjustment. The corresponding, exact Gain, Frequency, and Q
(bandwidth) values appear in the fields above the rotary encoders and can be
adjusted. The current frequency response curve is displayed in the EQ screen.
Gain The gain (boost/cut value) of the selected band is displayed in dB and can be
adjusted in a ±18 dB range with the rotary encoder below the field.
Frequency The center frequency of the selected band is indicated by a vertical, dashed
line, as well as displayed in Hz/kHz. It can be adjusted from 20 Hz to 20 kHz
with the rotary encoder below the field.
Q (Bandwidth) The Q factor of each band is displayed as a plain number and can be adjusted
from 0.27 (wide) to 8.7 (narrow) with the rotary encoder below the field.
Should a very high-Q (i.e. narrow) and/or very high/low gain band-pass (peak)
or band-stop (notch) filter be required, this can be realized by tuning two or
more of the EQ bands to the same frequency and selecting appropriate Q and
Gain values.
Gain Button A click on the Gain button displays the gain values of all four EQ bands in
the fields above the rotary encoders for adjustment; the center frequencies
are indicated by four vertical, dashed lines.
ON
Button to enable/disable the complete EQ/filter section of this channel; high-
lighted if on. If off, the graph gets grayed out.

5-70  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.2.4 Dynamics Page

Each channel has an internal dynamics processor consisting of a limiter,
a compressor, an expander, and a gate section. The dB readings automati-
cally consider the selected amount of headroom (i.e., 0 dB indication =
0 dBFS – selected headroom).

Graph The green graph represents the current, static parameters of the dynamics
processor.
LIM, COMP, EXP, GATE A click on one of these edit buttons selects one of the four sections (limiter,
compressor, expander, gate) of the dynamics processor for adjustment. The
corresponding parameter values appear in the fields above the rotary encoders
and can be adjusted.
DYN Level Selects the dynamics unit’s input level for adjustment in a 0...+24 dB range.

Limiter/Compressor Parameters:
Ratio (Compressor only). The compression ratio is displayed as a ratio and can be
adjusted in a range of 1:1 (no compression) through 20:1 (heavy compression)
with the rotary encoder below the field.
Threshold The limiter/compressor threshold is displayed in dB and can be adjusted in a
48 dB range with the rotary encoder below the field.
Attack Time The limiter/compressor attack time is displayed in ms (milli-seconds) and can
be adjusted in a range of 0.2…20 ms with the rotary encoder below the field.
Release Time The limiter/compressor release time is displayed and can be adjusted in a
range of 10 ms...10 s with the rotary encoder below the field.

Expander/Gate Parameters:
Ratio (Expander only). The expansion ratio is displayed as a ratio and can be
adjusted in a range of 1:1 (no expansion) through 20:1 (heavy expansion)
with the rotary encoder below the field.
Attenuation (Gate only). The gate attenuation is displayed in dB and can be set in a range
from Max. (i.e. mute) to 0 dB (zero attenuation) with the rotary encoder
below the field.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-71

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Threshold The expander/gate threshold is displayed in dB and can be adjusted in a 96 dB

range with the rotary encoder below the field.
(Gate only): Please note that the gate has a fixed 6 dB hysteresis. This means
that the gate is closed as soon as the level is equal to or below the adjusted
threshold value; it opens again as soon as the level exceeds the threshold
value by more than 6 dB.
Attack Time The expander/gate attack time is displayed in ms (milli-seconds) and can be
adjusted in a range of 0.2…1 ms with the rotary encoder below the field.
Release Time The expander/gate release time is displayed and can be adjusted in a range
of 10 ms...10 s with the rotary encoder below the field.

ON
The upper four ON buttons individually enable/disable the sections of the
dynamics processor; they are highlighted if active.
The lowest ON button enables/disables the whole dynamics processor. If
some or all sections have been enabled individually but are disabled now by
the lowest button, their individual ON buttons remain highlighted, but the
dynamics curve is displayed in gray.

5.12.2.5 AUX Page

This page contains the controls for the AUX 1 and AUX 2 auxiliary sends .

ON On/off control for the individual AUX sends; highlighted if on. If an AUX
send is on, the corresponding bar graph on the AUX button is displayed in
orange; if off, it is in gray, as shown on the next screenshot.
PF / AF These buttons allow selection whether the signal for the AUX send is tapped
before (PF, ‘pre-fader’) or after (AF) the fader. The currently active selection
is highlighted. If PF is selected for an AUX send, a bullet is visible at the left
of the corresponding bar graph on the AUX button, see next screenshot. If
AF is selected, the bullet is visible at the right of this bar graph.
Level The AUX send level is indicated by the orange-colored bar graph. Its exact
value is displayed in dB and can be set with the rotary encoder below the
field. Maximum setting is +12 dB.

5-72  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.2.6 N–X Page

N–X Mode This is an indication on which main output assignment the channel’s contribu-
tion to the N–X bus depends (PRG A or REC), or whether the bus is used as
AUX bus (AF or PF); in the latter case, its control elements are displayed in
orange as usual for an AUX bus. This assignment is performed on the Sum -
N–X pages (see chapter 5.12.3.3). The ‘classical’ N–1 mode can be activated
there as well.
ON On/off control for the channel’s contribution to the individual N–X buses;
highlighted if on.
Level The channel’s contribution level to the individual N–X buses is indicated by
the yellow-colored bar graph. Its value is displayed in dB and can be set with
the rotary encoder below the field or on the channel strip. Maximum: +12 dB.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-73

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.2.7 FDR/Bus Page

Joker
Indicates the function currently configured to the ‘Joker’ key on the channel
strip. For configuration refer to chapter 6.5.1.
PFL Enables/disables pre-fader listening for the current channel (corresponds to
the PFL key on the fader strip and works in parallel). PFL feeds the pre-fader
audio signal of the current channel to the PFL bus.
If the function ‘PFL Cut on Channel Active’ (also referred to as ‘Broadcast
PFL Mode’, refer to chapter 6.5.14) is enabled, audio signals are cut from
the PFL bus as soon as the channel is on and the fader is open. If active, the
PFL key in the fader strip is illuminated in amber.
Insert This button is visible only if an insert from the inserts pool is assigned to this
channel. It toggles the insert send on/off (highlighted if on).
ON Button to toggle the channel on/off, highlighted if on (corresponds to and
works in parallel with the ON key on the fader strip).
Fader The channel fader value is indicated by the yellow-colored bar graph. The
value is displayed in dB and is set with the rotary encoder below the field. The
fader value adjusted here and the one of the physical fader in the correspond-
ing fader strip are working in parallel, it is a kind of ‘the last wins’ circuit.
This means that moving the physical fader also effects the bar graph on the
screen; the other way round, however, a change with the rotary encoder sets
the fader in take-over mode, because the new (electrical) fader value and the
fader’s (physical) position will then be different.
If the ‘0 dB on top’ fader scale mode is active for the current user, the electrical
fader value can be set higher than 0 dB with this rotary encoder. by slightly
moving the fader button, control can be taken over again by the physical
fader; there will, however, be an audible level jump in such a case.
REC PF Assigns the channel’s pre-fader signal to the Record bus.
Off Air Record Assigns the channel’s after-fader signal to the Record bus (if, however, REC
PF is activated simultaneously, the signal will be pre-fader). At the same
time it disconnects the channel from the PRG A bus, and all other channels
currently not in record mode from the Record bus.

5-74  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Note: REC PF and Off Air Record are provided for two different user philoso-
phies. It is recommended to only use one of them. Mixing these two functions
while operating the desk does not make sense and is not recommended.
One of the two REC PF or Off Air Record functions above may be pro-
grammed to the REC key on the channel strip.
PAN or Balance Depending on the current channel format, this is a panorama (mono), or
balance (ste­reo) function. The PAN or Balance value is indicated by the
yellow-colored bar graph. The exact value is displayed as a numerical value
followed by L or R and can be set with the rotary encoder below the field in
a range from 30L (fully left) over 0 (center) to 30R (fully right). The ON
button above the bar graph is highlighted if PAN or Balance is currently
active.
Assignment Using these buttons the channel can be assigned to the main output buses.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-75

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.3 Sum Pages

When clicking on Sum, the last used Master, AUX or N–X page opens for
parameter adjustment.

5.12.3.1 Master Page

This page opens when selecting it from the Sum page. It allows parameter
adjustments for the two main master buses PRG A and Record. The master
bus labels may be renamed in the configuration tool.
Mono / Stereo The audio format for each main output bus (Mono/Stereo) is set to Stereo
by default but can also be set to Mono if required. In case of an AES/EBU
output, both channels then carry the left/right mono mix.
PFL PFL feeds the pre-fader audio signal to the PFL bus. This button enables/
disables the PFL (pre-fader listening) function on the corresponding main
master (highlighted if enabled). The ‘PFL Cut on Channel Active’ (Broadcast
PFL Mode) has no effect on the audio signal.
Insert This button is visible only if an insert from the inserts pool is assigned to this
main master. It toggles the insert return on/off (highlighted if on).
(Master) Fader The fader value is indicated by the yellow-colored bar graph. The exact value
is displayed in dB and can be set with the rotary encoder below the field.
Notes: Any master output can be assigned to any physical fader on the desk; refer to
chapters 5.12.5 and 6.5.11. The master outputs have a fixed output limiter;
its parameters can be set in the configuration tool.
The fader value adjusted with the mouse and the one of the physical fader
in the corresponding fader strip, if assigned, are working in parallel, it is a
kind of ‘the last wins’ circuit. This means that moving the physical fader also
effects the bar graph on the screen; the other way round, however, a change
with the mouse sets the fader in take-over mode, because the new (electrical)
fader value and the fader’s (physical) position will then be different.
If the ‘0 dB on top’ fader scale mode is active for the current user, the electri-
cal fader value can be set higher than 0 dB with this rotary encoder. When
slightly moving the fader button, control can be taken over again by the
physical fader; there will, however, be an audible level jump in such a case.

5-76  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.3.2 AUX Page

This page allows parameter adjustments for the two AUX master buses.

Mono / Stereo
The audio format (mono or stereo) of each AUX master bus can be set to mono
or stereo when clicking on these buttons; the current selection is highlighted.
PFL PFL feeds the pre-fader audio signal to the PFL bus. This button enables/
disables the PFL (pre-fader listening) function on the corresponding AUX
master (highlighted if enabled). The ‘PFL Cut on Channel Active’ (Broadcast
PFL Mode) has no effect on the audio signal.
ON Button to toggle the AUX send sum on/off, highlighted if on.
Label The label displayed here (e.g. AUX 1) may be renamed in the configuration
tool, if required (see chapter 6.5.11).
(AUX) Fader The fader value is indicated by the orange-colored bar graph. The exact value
is displayed in dB and can be set with the rotary encoder below the field.
Notes: Any AUX output can be assigned to any physical fader on the desk.
The fader value adjusted with the mouse and the one of the physical fader
in the corresponding fader strip, if assigned, are working in parallel, it is a
kind of ‘the last wins’ circuit. This means that moving the physical fader also
effects the bar graph on the screen; the other way round, however, a change
with the mouse sets the fader in take-over mode, because the new (electrical)
fader value and the fader’s (physical) position will then be different.
If the ‘0 dB on top’ fader scale mode is active for the current user, the electri-
cal fader value can be set higher than 0 dB with this rotary encoder. When
slightly moving the fader button, control can be taken over again by the
physical fader; there will, however, be an audible level jump in such a case.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-77

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.3.3 N–X Pages

The control elements for the eight N–X master buses are distributed on two
pages with identical layout.

Mono / Stereo
The audio format of all N–X buses can be set to mono or stereo when clicking
on these buttons; the active selection is highlighted.
N–X Mode / INIT An N–X bus may also be used as an AUX bus; in such a case, however, the
pre- or after-fader (PF/AF) selection can only be made for all the contribut-
ing channels simultaneously – as opposed to the standard AUX buses.
Assignment for the N–X buses – PRG A, Rec, Aux (PF) or (AF) or N–1
– can be selected here from the drop-down list. The ‘classical’ N–1 mode is
independent from the sum/master bus assignment.
INIT Levels Initializes the contribution level of all channels to this N–X bus to 0 dB. If the
bus is configured as AUX, however, the contribution levels are initialized to
–∞ dB (i.e., mute). In addition, the contribution for the N–X bus is switched
on, for an AUX bus it is switched off.
ON Button to toggle the output on/off; highlighted if on.
Label The label (e.g. N–X 4) may be renamed in the configuration tool, if required
(see chapter 6.5.11).
Fader The fader value is indicated by the yellow-colored bar graph (or orange-
colored in case of an AUX assignment). The exact value is displayed in dB
and can be set with the rotary encoder below the field.
Notes: Any N–X output may be assigned to any physical fader on the desk.
The fader value adjusted with the mouse and the one of the physical fader
in the corresponding fader strip, if assigned, are working in parallel, it is a
kind of ‘the last wins’ circuit. This means that moving the physical fader also
effects the bar graph on the screen; the other way round, however, a change
with the mouse sets the fader in take-over mode, because the new (electrical)
fader value and the fader’s (physical) position will then be different.
If the ‘0 dB on top’ fader scale mode is active for the current user, the electri-
cal fader value can be set higher than 0 dB with this rotary encoder. When
slightly moving the fader button, control can be taken over again by the
physical fader; there will, however, be an audible level jump in such a case.

5-78  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.4 Monitoring Pages

Like all hardware elements, the console’s monitoring and talkback controls
are available in the GUI as well and work completely in parallel. This has
several advantages: A function can be controlled from a remote PC, e.g. for
service purposes, or the user can control the parameters in the studio from
his desk in the control room.
When clicking on MON, the last active monitoring page opens for parameter
adjustment.

5.12.4.1 CR (Control Room) Page

Source Selector The source selector buttons can be configured with the desired sources; the
currently selected source is highlighted.
Add This function is very handy for a station takeover. It allows to temporarily
select two sources for monitoring. The second source can be added by clicking
on Add, and, while Add is highlighted, selecting a second source. Now both
sources are either mixed or sent separately to the two headphone channels
(configurable, see chapter 6.5.22.1); Add will be dark, but the source selec-
tor keys of both active sources will be highlighted. Add is canceled upon
selection of a next source.
PFL to MON Switches the PFL signal to the CR monitor loudspeakers.
Mono When active, both the left and right monitor speakers are fed with a mono
mix of the selected source.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-79

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.4.2 CR LSP (Loudspeakers) Page

Cut / Dim These buttons allow muting/dimming the speakers; highlighted if active. The
amount of Dim attenuation can be configured (see chapter 6.5.22.1).
(Loudspeaker) Volume The volume of the monitoring system is indicated with the bar graph. The
exact value is displayed in dB and set with the adjacent rotary encoder.

5.12.4.3 CR HP (Headphones) Page

DJ phone In normal mode, MON is selected, and the CR headphones are then used for
monitoring the source selected on the CR page (see chapter 5.12.4.1). With
the add function, a second source can be temporarily selected which is then
mixed to the normal monitoring source.

5-80  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

SP SRC ‘Split mode’ - an additional, third signal may be monitored on the DJ phones.
This is selected with the SP SRC rotary encoder and its display.
SP SRC/MON When activating the SP SRC/MON button, this third signal is fed to the
left channel; the standard monitor signal plus the one selected with the Add
function are then mixed to the right channel.
Balance The balance between the left and right channels is adjusted with the Balance
rotary encoder; the current balance setting is indicated by the adjacent purple
bargraph.
DJ / Guest phone Volume The headphones volume is adjusted with the two Volume rotary encoders;
the current volume setting is indicated by the adjacent purple bargraphs.
Depending on the configuration, individual talkback to the DJ and the guest
headphones may be selected; in such a case, the PFL speaker(s) is/are muted.

5.12.4.4 CR CUE Page

CUE (1...8)
Sends the selected CUE feed to the corresponding N–X bus.
CR MON
Selects the signal that has been selected for CR monitoring as a CUE signal
(corresponds to the ‘Follow CR’ function on other monitoring pages).
10 Cue Source Buttons (below CR MON)
(Configurable in ConfigGUI/DeskCommon/Cue-Keys)
Select the source that is fed as the cue signal. The 10 sources displayed on
these buttons are pre-selected during system configuration (DeskCommon –
Cue Keys page).

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-81

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.4.5 Studio 2 Page

The controls of the studio 2 page are operated in parallel to the controls on
the monitoring/talkback box in the studio.

Source Selector The source selector buttons can be configured with the desired sources; the
currently selected source is highlighted.
Follow CR Selects the same monitoring source for the studio as is selected for the control
room; this also works for sources not configured on any button of the source
selector.
Cut, Dim These buttons allow to mute or dim the studio loudspeakers; highlighted if
active.
Loudspeaker / Phone Volume Monitoring volumes are indicated with the bar graphs. The exact values are
displayed in dB and can be set with the rotary encoders below the fields.

5-82  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.4.6 TB SP Page

This page contains a part of the functionality found in the desk’s central sec-
tion and works in parallel with its controls. For details refer to chapter 5.4.3.

Talkback Destination Selector

Buttons to select a talkback destination (or a group of destinations). For details
refer to chapter 5.4.3.
SLATE (If configured) Allows talkback to the two main buses (PRG A, Record).
In order to prevent talkback from going to these destinations unintentionally,
the SLATE button must be clicked on before clicking on one of the PRG A
or Record master talkback buttons.
The SLATE function on the screen is independent from the one on the desk
(if configured).
TB return Volume Control for the talkback return volume.
Loudspeaker Volume Volume control for the PFL speaker integrated in the console.
EXT PFL 1 / 2 External PFL inputs that are mainly used for pre-listening of a CAB system.
They are controlled from the monitoring panel, by the GP inputs, or by the
Monitora interface.
Note: An additional talkback mode may be configured that routes the talkback signal
to either the left or right headphones channel; in this case, the normal monitor
signal is routed in mono to the other headphones channel during talkback
without being dimmed.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-83

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.5 Routing Pages

5.12.5.1 Input Page

The input routing page allows setting up the mixing console’s input router;
the general rule is that each input can be routed to any channel, but to exactly
one channel only. For a general description of the routing refer to chapter 5.7.
Note: Monitor routing is not part of this page; this is set in the configuration tool.
Matrix On the graphical representation of the routing matrix, the console’s channel
strips are displayed from left to right, and the inputs from top to bottom. Con-
nections are indicated by a blue bullet within the matrix as well as by a small
blue bullet at the left of the input label. The routing of a channel currently
being on-air cannot be changed; this status is indicated by a red ‘Frisbee’
symbol at the left of the input’s label, and by blanking the Clear button. A
connection may be permanently locked during configuration; this is indicated
by a padlock symbol below the channel number, and by blanking the Con-
nect / Clear buttons.
Select Group For clearness, the different inputs may be arranged in groups. This button
opens a list of input groups to select from.
Input Display of the selected input (position of the horizontal cursor line). Input
selection is done with the rotary encoder below the field. If more inputs are
available than can be displayed by the screen, the matrix automatically scrolls
when the cursor line meets its upper or lower limit.
Channel Display of the selected channel strip (position of the vertical cursor line).
Channel strip selection is done with the rotary encoder below the field. If
more channel stripss are available than can be displayed on the screen, the
matrix automatically scrolls when the cursor line meets its left or right limit.
If a channel strip has no input assigned currently, its number above the matrix
is displayed in blue instead of in white. Virtual channel strips are marked by
a light-blue background.
Auto If this function is active, the correct page is displayed automatically upon
changing a channel, and the Input selection is blanked.
Connect / Clear Sets or clears a connection at the current cross point of the vertical (console
channel) and horizontal (input) cursor lines.

5-84  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Lock, Unlock A connection may be protected from changes by selecting it and clicing on
the Lock button. If locked, the Connect and Clear buttons are blanked,
and a padlock symbol is indicated next to the input label.
To unlock, select the connection and click on the Unlock button.

5.12.5.2 Output Page

The output routing page allows setting up the mixing console’s output router;
the general rule is that each input and each master bus can be routed to any
output. For a general description of the routing refer to chapter 5.7.
Notes: Monitor routing is not part of this page; it must be set in the configuration
tool.
All inputs are listed here as well, which allows routing them directly to an
output without any processing by the console (and, subsequently, without
consuming any processing power).
Matrix On the graphical representation of the routing matrix, the console master
buses (and inputs) are displayed from left to right, and the outputs from top
to bottom. Established connections are indicated by a blue bullet.
Select Group For clearness, the different master buses (and inputs) may be arranged in
groups. This button opens a list of items to select from.
Output Display of the selected output (position of the horizontal cursor line). Output
selection is done with the rotary encoder below the field. If more console
channels are available than can be displayed by the screen, the matrix auto-
matically scrolls when the cursor line meets its upper or lower limit.
Input/Sum Display of the selected master or input (position of the vertical cursor line).
Selection is done with the rotary encoder below the field. If more masters and
inputs are available than can be displayed by the screen, the matrix automati-
cally scrolls when the cursor line meets its left or right limit. If an input or
master bus has no output assigned currently, its number above the matrix is
displayed in blue instead of in white.
Auto If this function is active, the correct subpage is displayed automatically upon
changing an output.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-85

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Connect
When clicking on Connect, the connection is set at the crosspoint of the
cursor lines. The blue bullet at the crosspoint indicates the selected type:
Input
DIR Out PP (pre-processing)*
DIR Out AP (after processing)*
CHAN Out (after fader)*
Clear Clears the connection at the cross point of the vertical (master or input) and
horizontal (output) cursor lines.
Lock, Unlock A connection may be protected from changes by selecting it and clicking on
the Lock button. If locked, the Connect and Clear buttons are blanked,
and a padlock symbol is indicated next to the output label.
To unlock, select the connection and click on the Unlock button.
* Since the direct and channel output tap points are located within or after the
channel processing, they can deliver an audio signal only if the corresponding
input is assigned to a fader.
It is also possible to route the de-embedded output signal of an SDI input
card via the D21 frame’s backplane to the input of a Dolby® E input card for
decoding multichannel surround signals; this is done in the output routing
page.

5.12.5.3 Insert Page

There is a pool of eight inserts. On the insert routing page they can be assigned
to the possible insert points (input channels and main master buses) of the
console.
The insert can be switched on or off either here with the ON button, on the
CHAN - FDR/Bus page of the channel, or on the Sum - Master page of the
master to which the insert is assigned. This means that, if an insert is assigned
to a channel, the insert ON button is displayed on the corresponding channel
or bus page.
Note: The audio inputs and outputs used for insert send and return are defined in
the configuration tool (see chapters 6.5.5 and 6.5.6).

5-86  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

INSERT1...8 Clicking on one of these buttons opens a list of the available insert points to
select from. The selected insert point is displayed in the field at the right of
the INSERTx buttons. To de-assign an insert point, select None from the
list.
ON An insert point will become active in the audio signal path either upon click-
ing on the ON button or, as mentioned before, by activating it on the CHAN
- FDR/Bus page of the channel, or on the Sum - Master page of the master
to which the insert is assigned.
PP / AP For input channels, the insert point can be set to either before (PP) or after
(AP) the signal processing.

5.12.5.4 Mic Group Page

For ease of control, microphones may be grouped in Mic Groups. All micro-
phones within the same group may be switched on/off with one single, exter-
nal Mic key (via a GP input).

Mic / POS The microphone is selected with the rotary encoder below the Mic field, the
mic group with the one below the POS field.
Assign / Clear Assignment of the selected microphone and group is done by clicking on
Assign; then a green bullet appears at the selected position. A click on Clear
clears the selected assignment.
In the example above, the DJ mic and the guest mic #1 are assigned to mic
group 1, and the guest mic #2 is assigned to mic group 2; guest mic #3 is
ready to be assigned to mic group 2 – just click on Assign.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-87

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.5.5 XL Assign Page

Extended Line (XL) Module The XL module (‘XL box’) allows direct communication to up to twelve
outside sources but may be used for different applications as well. This page
allows assigning the desired sources to the XL box keys.

XLBox1 / XLBox2 First, select the XL box; when clicking on this button, two selection buttons
appear, as shown above.
Line 1...12 When clicking on one of the buttons at the right of the Line 1...12 labels,
first a list of source groups appears for selection; clicking on one of these
items opens a list of available sources, as shown below. To assign, click on
the desired source’s button.

5-88  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.5.6 Bus Assign Page

The bus assign page gives a kind of ‘reverse contribution’ overview and allows
routing channels to buses in a matrix style, as opposed to the conventional
assignment from within the strip channels. It also gives the user a convenient
view of the inputs currently assigned to a bus; the N–X buses have an addi-
tional indication of the N–X mode they are set to.
This page is also a convenient tool for troubleshooting a routing problem.

Sum, Input/Sum The rotary encoders below these two fields move the highlighted row and
column for selection; the currently selected items are indicated within the two
fields.
Connect To set a connection at the selected crosspoint, click on Connect. For impos-
sible connections (such as AUX 1 to N–X 13) both the Connect and Clear
buttons are hidden.
Clear To clear the connection at the selected crosspoint, click on Clear.

or N–X bus comprising all inputs currently switched to the PRG A (or REC)
master.
or N–X bus used as AUX bus; as opposed to a normal AUX bus, the PF (pre-
fader) and AF (after-fader) selection can only be made for all contributors
simultaneously.
N–X bus in ‘classical’ N–1 mode; i.e., it is comprising all configured contribu-
tors regardless whether they are switched to any master.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-89

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.6 Snapshot Pages

On this page the static (snapshot) automation is handled. For a general descrip-
tion of the snapshot handling refer to chapter 5.6.

5.12.6.1 Shot Page

Local Snapshot List The snapshot list in the left part of the page shows all snapshots available for
the current user. One entry can be selected at a time. Selection is done with
the Local Snapshot rotary encoder.
Local User Filter If the current user is the administrator, the snapshot list shows all global and
all user snapshots. A user filter may be applied to the list with the Local User
Filter rotary encoder.
Audio, Rout In/Out, Assign These keys allow partial snapshots of the console. If Audio is active, all
audio parameters of the console will be saved in a snapshot, and a (blue
note) symbol is displayed next to the snapshot name. If Rout In is active,
all input routing parameters of the console will be saved in a snapshot, and a
red # (matrix) symbol is displayed. If Rout Out is active, all output routing
parameters of the console will be saved in a snapshot, and a purple symbol
is displayed. If Assign is active, the rotary assignment (that has been per-
formed with the rotary and fader assign modules) will be saved in a snapshot,
and a green (rotary knob) symbol is displayed next to the snapshot name.
Any combination of these partial snapshots is allowed. For a complete con-
sole snapshot, simply activate all four buttons. The , #, , and symbols
also indicate which parts of a snapshot saved in memory may be selected for
recall.
>> Clicking on >> recalls the snapshot selected from the local snapshot list
(selected parts only) from the console’s memory and loads it to the desk.
<< Clicking on << saves the current desk setup (selected parts only) as a snapshot
to the console’s memory; a name must be given to the new snapshot using
the keyboard appearing then. When finished, confirm with Enter.
Rename The Rename button is displayed only if an entry has been selected in the
Local snapshot list, and if renaming is available for this entry. It allows

5-90  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

renaming the selected entry with the keyboard appearing then. When finished,
confirm with Enter.
Delete The Delete button is displayed only if an entry has been selected in the Local
snapshot list, and if deleting is available for this entry. It allows deleting the
selected entry after confirmation.
It is also possible to delete only a part (or parts) of a snapshot when selecting
one (or more) of the Audio, Rout In/Out, Assign buttons before clicking
on the Delete button. A confirmation dialog appears then as well.
Note: Global snapshots may be written, renamed, or deleted by the system admin-
istrator only.
Set Channel Filter ON/OFF The channel filter allows selecting channels to which the snapshot is loaded;
if ON, the USR 1 desk keys start flashing. Select the desired channel/s with
its/their USR 1 key (it will be continuously illuminated then). When clicking
on >>, only the selected channel(s) will be overwritten with the snapshot data
of the input(s) with the matching alias label.
The channel filter has no influence on saving a snapshot; always all parameters
of all channels are saved.
Set Location Filter ON/OFF When operating in split desk mode, recalling a snapshot in the control room
must not affect the logical inputs located on a strip channel in the studio. It is
also possible to load a snapshot individually on a split desk or on one of the
editor boxes with the SnapshotX desk key function.

5.12.6.2 Route Page (‘Partial Output Routing’)

On this page the output routing may be partially changed. A recalled snapshot
only changes the routing nodes specified in the snapshot. This comes in very
handy if the recent routing of the console shall be kept, but the studio (PRG
Out) shall contribute to a different on-air line. The snapshots are configured
in the configuration tool (Config - PartialOutputRouting).
Routing Snapshot The rotary encoder below the field is used to select the desired routing snap­
shot from the list.
Load Loads the selected snapshot.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-91

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.6.3 EXT Page

Note:
This page appears if no central snapshot server is configured within the system
(i.e. Snapshot Location is set to Local, refer to chapter 6.5.24).
Local Snapshot List The snapshot list in the left part of the page shows the local snapshots saved
in the console’s memory. Only one entry can be selected at a time. Selection
is done with the Local Snapshot rotary encoder.
Local User Filter If the system administrator is currently logged in, the snapshot list shows all
global and all user snapshots. A user filter may be applied to the list. Select
the desired initial character or Show all with the Local User Filter rotary
encoder.
External Snapshot List The external snapshot list at the right shows the snapshots on the external
USB memory device. Only one entry can be selected at a time. Selection is
done with the External Snapshot rotary encoder.
The External snapshot list as well as the External Snapshot field are
blank as long as no memory device is inserted in the USB socket at the left
of the screen.
<<, >> The << and >> arrow buttons are displayed after entries have been selected
in the lists. They allow copying the selected entry from the USB memory
device to the console’s Local memory, and vice versa. If the target snapshot
is not empty it will be overwritten.
Rename The Rename button is displayed if an entry has been selected in the External
snapshot list, and if renaming is available for this entry. It allows renaming
the selected entry with the keyboard appearing then. When finished, confirm
with Enter. If required, items in the Local snapshot list may be renamed in
the SNAP - Shot page, refer to chapter 5.12.6.1.
Delete The Delete button is displayed if an entry has been selected in the External
snapshot list, and only if deleting is permitted for this entry. It allows deleting
the selected entry after confirmation. Items in the local snapshot list may be
deleted in the SNAP - Shot page, refer to chapter 5.12.6.1.
Note: Only the system administrator is allowed to copy snapshots from the external
USB memory device to the global section of the local snapshots list.

5-92  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.7 Admin (System Administrator) Pages

If the user has access rights to the console configuration, the Admin button is
displayed. After clicking on it, the Display, Fader Cal, Firmware, Date/
Time, Config, Scrn Cal, and Setup buttons select the respective pages for
basic settings and firmware version display. Config(uration) is described in
an extra chapter (refer to chapter 6).

5.12.7.1 Brightness Page

This page is used to independently set the brightness of the LEDs illuminating
the keys, the OLED displays in the fader modules and in the central section,
and the TFT screen. The steel blue bar graphs indicate the current settings.
These are also displayed in numerical values in the Brightness fields below
the bar graphs and may be adjusted with the corresponding rotary encoders
(LEDs in a 0...4095 range, the TFT screen in eight steps from 0 to 7, and the
OLED displays in five discrete steps from completely dark to bright – how-
ever, with a 0...4095 indication).
All Screens This button is inactive on the OnAir 1500 and OnAir 2500 consoles.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-93

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.7.2 Fader Cal Page

First, select the fader module to be calibrated by clicking on the correspond-
ing button. The screen then changes as follows:

0 dB Position
Always required; please note that it is recommended to perform this calibra-
tion for all faders of a fader module at a time.
First, move all faders not to be calibrated to their –20 dB position (this posi-
tion will be ignored during calibration).
Then move the fader(s) to be calibrated to their 0 dB positions.
Click on the 0 dB button.

5-94  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

FDR Start Trigger Point Please note that it is recommended to perform this calibration for all faders
of a fader module at a time.
First, move all faders not to be calibrated to their –20 dB position (this posi-
tion is ignored during calibration).
Center the fader knobs to be calibrated between the –∞ and the –60 markers.
This will be the point where the fader start output is triggered after calibration.
Click on the FDR Start button. To check, close the faders that just have been
calibrated; the corresponding fader bars on the screen should disappear.

If you intend to calibrate the second fader module, click on the Fader Cal
menu button again and select it.

5.12.7.3 Firmware Page

On this page, the version number of all software modules of the console is
displayed for reference. A module is selected using the rotary encoder just
below the Firmware field.

Note: A complete set of firmware for all console modules is saved in the console’s
memory. After having replaced a module by one that has been e.g. in the
spare parts stock for some time, its firmware might not be up-to-date with
the ones of the other console modules. Therefore it is recommended to check
whether the firmware versions correspond. If not, the current version may be
downloaded from the console to the module using the Update Firmware
function.

Update Firmware Select a module as described above; if its firmware can be updated, the
Update Firmware button appears at the right of the list. The module’s
firmware will be updated when clicking on the Update Firmware button.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-95

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.7.4 Date Time Page

As long as no external time reference signal is configured, the internal clock
is used as time reference, the Time Sync Reference indication is None,
and the sync indicator in the upper left corner of the clock dial is gray. To set
the system date or time, click on the corresponding Set Date or Set Time
button. The current settings are indicated in the Day/Month/Year or Hours/
Minutes/Seconds fields; adjust with the rotary encoders below the fields.
To save the new settings, click on Apply.
If you need the screen clock to temporarily display a time different from the
true time, click on the Set Offset button; the offset can be entered with the
rotary encoder below the Offset Time field, in a range of ±12 hours and with
a resolution of 30 minutes. To activate the temporary offset, click on Apply.
An active offest is indicated by the Offset indicator turning red. The offset
is automatically reset to 0:00 upon re-booting the console.

5-96  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

If an external time reference signal is selected (requires an NTP or Monitora
time signal, configuration in chapter 6.5.15), the Set Date and Set Time
buttons disappear. If the external time reference is active, the sync indicator
is white on black background, as shown below; if not, the sync indicator
turns red. A time offset can be set in the same way as described above.

5.12.7.5 Config Page

Important!
The system configuration tool (‘Config Tool’) is intended for trained per-
sonnel (such as the system administrator) only; due to the fact that it allows
contradictory settings in some points, care must be applied when using it.
Before making configuration changes, it is strongly recommended to backup
the current configuration on an external medium (USB stick), see chapter 6.2.
The USB memory device MUST NOT BE REMOVED from the socket
DURING DATA ACCESS – only remove it after its LED has stopped flash-
ing.
When using a computer with an appropriate slot, the files on the USB memory
device may then be saved to any backup drive for additional data safety.
If using the remote configuration tool, the files can be saved to any desired
location.
Backup and Restore may as well be used for copying configurations
between consoles.

Backup If an external memory medium is inserted, this is displayed in the USBMedia

list. After clicking on the Backup button, the screen keyboard pops up for
giving the backup a name. After clicking on Enter, the configuration files
are copied to the external medium. This takes a few seconds; the Backup
button is highlighted during the transfer.
Restore Select the desired configuration file with the rotary encoder below the Backup
field and click on Restore. After confirmation the configuration data are
loaded into the console’s memory; the Restore button is highlighted during
the transfer. Once finished, the console has to be re-booted by clicking on
Reboot.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-97

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Rename For renaming backup configuration files on the external medium. If the new
name should already exist, a dialog box appears where overwriting the exist-
ing backup has to be confirmed.
Delete For deleting backup configuration files from the external medium. A dialog
box appears where deleting the selected backup has to be confirmed.
Reboot Reboots the selected system. A dialog box appears where rebooting the cur-
rent system has to be confirmed. If at least one channel should be on-air, the
reboot is not executed, but a user warning appears instead in such a case.

5.12.7.6 SCRN CAL Page (not available for OnAir 1500)

This page is intended for calibration of the touch-screen functionality of OnAir
2500 and OnAir 3000 consoles. This is normally required only during system
setup in the factory.

Select the screen by touching the corresponding button. A sequence of seven

calibration spots will be displayed, the center of which must be touched as
accurately as possible.
Neither finger nor fingernail will do for this purpose – carefully use a fine tool
! (such as a PDA pen or a medium-sized screwdriver) that is not too sharply
pointed; don’t apply excess pressure in order to avoid damaging the touch
screen surface.
Important! Do this very carefully – a miscalibration may cause the touch screen to
! become inoperative. Once finished, a confirmation window appears; please
do not confirm unless you are absolutely sure that everything is ok.

5-98  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.7.7 Setup Page

This function allows switching between two different, customer-specific con-
sole configurations (i.e., all parameters setup during console configuration,
including the key assignment, user access rights and passwords).

When starting the console for the first time, the two setups are identical (unless
different factory setups were specified when ordering the console) and cor-
respond to the console’s initial snapshot. In order to generate a second setup,
select it with the SETUP 2 button as described above, modify the configura-
tion as desired, and make sure to make an initial snapshot for the new setup
by using the Save Config button as described in chapter 6.4.2.

User Data: Please note that when saving a setup, the complete configuration data are
saved, including all user data such as passwords. Unless your system is
connected to a user management server, password changes must be saved
individually in each setup.

After having selected the desired setup with one of the SETUP 1/2 buttons,
a dialog box appears that must be confirmed for safety reasons:

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-99

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Selecting a different setup is not allowed as long as any local or remote chan-
nels are currently being on-air. In such a case the following message appears:

5-100  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.7.8 GEN Page

For test purposes, the OnAir 1500 features an internal test signal generator
that is activated from the Chan - Input page (see chapter 5.12.2.1) by users
having the appropriate access rights configured. Waveform, frequency and
level settings are performed here. While the generator is active, the normal
channel buttons in the left part of the page are disabled and displayed in gray.
Note: Activating the test generator temporarily switches the cannel input from the
assigned source signal to the generator’s output. Channel settings, such as EQ,
dynamics, etc. are not affected, which allows setting the channel parameters
to the desired values using the test generator. If no source is routed to the
channel, the test generator works with the default channel settings.
If the channel is currently on-air, the generator can neither be switched on or
off, and the generator buttons are grayed out.

Shape
Three buttons allow selecting the desired test waveform: Sine wave, Pink
noise, or White noise.
Level The generator output level is indicated by the blue bar graph; its exact value
is displayed in dB and can be set with the rotary encoder below the field.
Please note that the level setting is exact for the sine wave and pink noise
signals only. The white noise signal level is lower by 8 dB.
If the overall gain is set to 0 dB and the bar graph level meter is configured
to ‘VU meter’ characteristics, it indicates the generator output level plus the
configured lead (default value: +4 dB) in case of sine wave and pink noise
signals, whereby the pink noise level is somewhat fluctuating around the
adjusted generator level. The white noise signal level is lower by 8 dB.
The dB readings automatically consider the selected amount of headroom
(i.e., 0 dB indication = 0 dBFS minus the selected headroom).
Frequency If Sine is selected, the sine wave frequency is displayed in Hz/kHz and can
be set with the rotary encoder below the field.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-101

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.12.8 Login Page

For details of user access rights please refer to chapter 5.9.

To login, a user selects his name from the user list with the rotary encoder
below the User Name field, followed by clicking on the Login button. If
more than 50 users should be configured in a system, selection from a list
is inconvenient; in such a case a login dialog with a keyboard for entering a
user name appears, as described below. If a password has been stored for this
user, the keyboard for password entry is displayed:

Please note that the password is case-sensitive. /Shift and Caps Lock

functions of the screen keyboard and a USB keyboard possibly connected (see
chapter 5.1) are independent. After typing the correct password followed by
Enter, the new user is logged in. The Login page closes and automatically
returns to the Home page.

5-102  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

If a wrong password is entered, the login fails and a user warning pops up:

When a user logs in, the system generates an entry in the log file.
Note: The factory default system administrator password is admin. It is recom-
mended that the system administrator modifies his password upon delivery
of the system with the configuration tool; for details refer to chapter 6.5.30.1.

5.12.9 Screen Level Meters

The screen always displays two stereo level meter bar graphs with 130 seg-
ments each and configurable characteristics and scale. The meter source can
be selected by clicking on the label button just below the corresponding meter
(this opens a menu with all configured meter sources).

Meter Mode There are six different meter characteristics with their appropriate scales
available, as shown below. Meter characteristics can be selected in the con-
figuration tool (Config/Settings/Main Meter Mode, see chapter 6.5.14).

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-103

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

PPM DIN Nordic Analog Nordic Digital VU Standard British Standard Digital FS Meter

Meter Indication and Headroom

The console-internal headroom is automatically applied to the meter cali-
bration, which means that the PPM DIN, Nordic Analog and Nordic Digital
meters read a level of 0 dB at an internal level of 0 dBFS minus the headroom,
regardless of its setting.
The default headroom setting is 9 dB, so that the PPM DIN, Nordic Analog
and Nordic Digital meters read 0 dB at an internal level of –9 dBFS. The
default lead setting for the VU Standard meters is 4 dB.
The default sensitivity of the analog line inputs (15 dBu) is such that a continu-
ous sine-wave input signal of +6 dBu results in an internal level of –9 dBFS
and, if overall gain is set to 0 dB, in a reading of the PPM DIN, Nordic Analog
and Nordic Digital meters of 0 dB. In case of VU meters, a continuous sine-
wave input signal of +2 dBu reads 0 dB if the default lead (4 dB) is set.
If a different console headroom setting is desired, this can be configured
within a range of 0...20 dB in steps of 1 dB. VU meter lead can be configured
as well within a range of 0...10 dB in steps of 2 dB (refer to chapter 6.5.14).
British Standard Meters If these are active, additional selections are provided by a click within the
meter area: Either L/R (in red/green) or M/S (mid/side, i.e. the sum of and
the difference between the two channels; in white/yellow). For the M/S set-
ting, an additional 20 dB boost for the S bargraph may be selected as well.
This is indicated, as shown above, by L and R, or by M and S (or M and
S+20) below the bargraph meters. For the mid (M) meter, a reduction of 3 dB
(default setting) or 6 dB is selectable with the configuration tool. The British
Standard meter’s peak audio level can be set in steps of 1 dB from –48 to
0 dBFS. Additional red ‘clip’ indicators are provided above the bargraphs.
Digital FS Meter The Digital FS Meter always displays the current level with reference to full
scale modulation (0 dBFS). The current headroom setting defines the transition
point from green to red. Additional red ‘clip’ indicators are provided above
the bargraphs.
Correlation Bar Graph Above the meters, a horizontal phase correlation meter bar graph is located.
It helps evaluating the mono compatibility of a stereo signal; the more posi-
tive the reading, the better. A negative reading might also be a sign of a phase
problem.

External Meters If required, commercially available external level meters (such as meters by
DK-Audio, RTW or Studer) may be installed as an option. Analog VU meters
are very popular in some countries, these may be used as well. To do so,
external level meter outputs must be provided in the (optional) SCore frame.

5-104  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.13 RELINK (Advanced Users Only)

RELINK stands for ‘Resource Linking’, the feature formerly called ‘I/O
Sharing’.
The OnAir 1500’s I/O sharing allows routing one physical audio input to
more than one logical audio input.
If a physical audio input has unique control parameters (such as the micro-
phone gain of a microphone input) and if this physical audio input is routed
to more than one logical audio input, controlling these resources is working
in parallel on all the corresponding channel strips.
For I/O sharing details and configuration, refer to chapter 6.5.20.

5.14 External Router Control

External router control allows communication and interactions between VSM
(Virtual Studio Manager), a control interface of L-S-B Broadcast Technolo-
gies GmbH in Germany, and the OnAir 1500 console.
The console does not communicate directly with the router. Commands and
status information are exchanged using the Pro-Bel SW-P-08 protocol over
TCP/IP socket communication between the console and VSM. The console
acts as a remote device in the Pro-Bel naming convention while VSM is the
controller.

VSM initiates the connection to a specific console running in a certain facil-

ity, on a given IP address and port number. Since VSM knows the console’s
location, the amount of information provided to the console is reduced (name,
crosspoints, source names, and destination association names). Within a ses-
sion, up to eight redundant VSM servers can connect to a console, and up to
16 external inputs can be used by one console at a time.

TCP/IP

TCP/IP
TCP/IP

OnAir 1500

VSM Servers

Logical Inputs / Destination IDs: The OnAir 1500 console allows free assignment of destination IDs (as used
by VSM for identifying a router output) to the logical inputs to which the
router outputs are connected. The destination IDs are used to set crosspoints
when the user selects a source in the CHAN - Input page (see below), and
when VSM reports labels. The default assignment is 1:1, i.e., logical input 1
is destination ID 1.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-105

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.14.1 Operation
External Line Selection Input selection (see chapter 5.12.2.1) was extended for this purpose; exter-
nal lines (four-wire connections, i.e. logical inputs controlling an N–X) and
external inputs (two-wire connections, logical inputs without N–X control)
from the central router have been added to the grouping of internal sources
(MIC, LINE, AES/EBU, ADAT, etc.) in the input selection dialog.
External line 1...8 opens a list of external four-wire lines from/to a codec
for selection. External input 1...8 allows selecting the input signals without
return lines, but from the same codecs. After selecting an external line by
clicking on one of the Line... buttons, a list with the different router groups
opens.

In our example, the Codecs button opens a list of all sources provided by
the selected router group (codecs in our example) available for selection; it
also indicates the current codec status.

5-106  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Codec Status Locked – codec #1 is in use and locked to facility #1304; white text on red
button. Cannot be selected. Listen mode is disabled, too.

Busy – codec #12 is in use, including the return line, by facility 3303; gray
text on light gray button. May be selected in listen mode.

Reserved – codec #4 is reserved for facility 3301; gray text on light gray
button. May be selected only by facility 3301, including the return line. All
others may select it in listen mode (external input 1...8).

Active – codec #6 is ready and connected to a codec in Brøndby; blue text

on light gray button. It is possible to select this line, including the return line
(external line 1...16).

Unused – all codecs without a specific name are not connected; blue text on
light gray button.

Busy Return Lines If an external line is connected to a four-wire input of one facility, the line is
busy. The facility’s name is distributed by VSM to the other facilities. Con-
necting a return line from a different facility is prohibited.
A line is busy as long as:
• the four-wire input to which the external line is connected is assigned to a
desk fader; de-assigning the input from the desk automatically disconnects
the line
• the external line is connected to the four-wire input of a facility. It can be
disconnected with the NONE button in the CHAN - Input page.

Locking a Line A locked line is currently in use and disabled for selecting or listening to it.
Lines can be locked only by VSM in the master control room.

Line Reservation A reserved line can only be listened to but not selected, except from the facility
the line is reserved for. Lines can be reserved only from VSM in the master
control room.

5.14.2 Interactions
Label Import During power-up initialization, the console asks for all router label names.
VSM sends all label names and immediately updates the console as soon as
any of the labels is modified.

Source Names Source names, router groups, and other attributes are used in the CHAN
- Input page of the user GUI to provide the pop-up lists to select from, as
described in chapter 5.14.1. During power-up initialization, the console asks
for the names of all sources of the router on the levels 1...4. VSM sends all
source names on any level and immediately updates the console as soon as
any source changes.
This allows the console to maintain the information for the pop-up input lists.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-107

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.14.3 Configuration

For correct operation, the following points must be considered:
• The assignment of logical inputs to the external router destinations is
configured under Config - LogicalInputs (configuration tool, chapter
6.5.1).
• The facility ID of the console is entered under UserGUI - Settings (con-
figuration tool, chapter 6.5.33; in the example below, this is ‘PRI DESK’).

In addition, the same facility ID must be entered in the ProBel.xml and
probel_contr_ext.ini files. A clipping of the probel_contr_
ext.ini file is given below for reference:

# session: Studio ‚PRI DESK‘ (Desk-A), Role: Remote Device, ProBel SW-P-08, ...
begin
session: PRI DESK
role: Remote Device
protocol: Pro-Bel 08
port: 7800
end

5-108  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.15 USB Player/Recorder

5.15.1 Basics
Starting with SW V4.1, the OnAir 1500 console supports an integrated wave
file player/recorder for playback from and recording to USB memory devices,
such as a USB stick or hard drive.
Jingle Player The jingle player is a stereo playback-only device intended for short audio
clips such as station identifier jingles, applause etc., that are triggered from
desk keys and immediately start upon pressing one of these keys. Usually
these clip files are located on a USB stick. Jingle player and track player (see
below) can play simultaneously from the same memory device.
Using the jingle player requires a valid license key.
Track Player The track player can be used for playing back stereo audio files from a USB
memory device. Normally these files are longer than the jingles, such as
reported stories or interviews, but can be of any desired kind of content and
duration up to a size of 4 GB (corresponding to approx. 6 hours in 44.1 kHz/16
bit mode). Track player and jingle player (see above) can play simultaneously
from the same memory device.
Using the track player requires a valid license key.
Track Recorder The track recorder can be used for recording stereo audio files to a USB
memory device. When using it together with a large hard drive it can directly
be used as a recorder while the console is used for production, or also as a
broadcast logging system. Please note that large hard drives must be supplied
externally instead of from the USB socket’s power. Needless to say that the
track recorder can also be used to produce jingles; however the jingle audio
files need to be renamed and moved to the correct folder when finished, in
order to be recognized by the jingle player.
Using the track recorder requires a valid license key.
Multi-Channel USB I/O The multi-channel USB I/O can also be used for recording and playback, but
features up to eight channels in either direction, instead of the two channels
used for the jingle player and track player/recorder. It is intended for produc-
tion or mixing but requires a digital audio workstation (DAW).

The track player/recorder and the multi-channel USB I/O cannot be used at
the same time. The corresponding USB I/O front panel socket (REC / PLAY
or MCH I/O) must be selected with the slide switch between them.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-109

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.15.1.1 Supported Audio Files

All players/recorders listed above require audio files the following properties:
• USB memory device formatted with FAT32 file system (also refer to
chapter 5.15.1.3); maximum file size is 4 GB.
• Maximum memory size is 2 TB.
• Wave or broadcast wave format, file extension ‘wav’.
• Linear PCM coding; sampling rate 44.1 or 48 kHz (for recording, the
configured console sampling rate is used); word length is 16 or 24 bit for
playback and 16 bit for recording.
• REC / PLAY connector: Playback in stereo or mono, recording in stereo.
• MCH I/O connector: 8 channels in/out.

5.15.1.2 Files and File Names

Audio files and their names must meet the following conditions:

Jingle Player Jingle audio files must be located within a root folder named Jingle (case-
insensitive). If the system cannot find this folder when the memory device is
connected, it is automatically generated but will be empty.
File names must begin with the character ‘J’ followed by a one- or two-digit
number (1-8 or 01-08) signifying the desk key it can be started with. The file
name extension must be .wav. The factory default configuration comprises
four desk keys (JINGLE 1 / 2, APPLAUSE and BOOing), as shown below.

Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4
The jingle tracks must comply with the file requirements indicated above.
Maximum file name length is limited to 60 characters, including the exten-
sion. The corresponding key is illuminated during playback of a jingle.
Examples:
J01_Logo_1.wav is the station logo that is played upon pressing the
JINGLE 1 desk key.
The J3applause.wav the file is played upon pressing the APPLAUSE
desk key.
Please note: If two files should be present the names of which both begin
with the same key number (such as J03_Applause_44.1k.wav and
J03_Applause_48k.wav), the key assignment is undefined. When
pressing the APPLAUSE desk key any of the two files may be played then.

Track Player Tracks to be played must be located within a root folder named Music
(case-insensitive). If the system cannot find this folder when the memory
device is connected, it is automatically generated but will be empty. The file
name extension must be .wav.
These tracks must comply with the file requirements indicated above. If more
than 64 tracks should be located in this folder, some of them will be ignored.
Maximum file name length is limited to 60 characters, including the exten-
sion.

5-110  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Track Recorder
Recorded files are automatically saved in the Music folder and named by
the system. The first recorded file is named T00000.wav, the next one
T00001.wav and so on, up to T99999.wav. When reaching the file
T99999.wav, the system selects the lowest gap in the file list between
T00000.wav and T99999.wav for the next track.
Please note: Since the number of files in the Music folder is limited to 64,

a user warning is generated if it is tried to record a 65th file.

As soon as a USB memory device is connected to the system, all .wav

files meeting the name convention are verified. Files that cannot be played
as they do not meet the system requirements or have a corrupted file header
are hidden during track selection (see chapter 5.15.5.1).
When (re-)naming files, please consider that the channel label area can display
eight characters only.

5.15.1.3 Memory Formatting

Memory devices for use with the integrated jingle player and the track
recorder/player need to be formatted with the FAT32 file system. Some popu-
lar formatting applications will add information that is incompatible with the
embedded system of the USB recorder/player.
It is recommended to use the Fat32Formatter freeware tool for format-
ting your USB devices since it has been tested and is known to perform well.
It is available from here: http://tokiwa.qee.jp/EN/Fat32Formatter/

5.15.2 Physical I/O

Jingle Player / Track Recorder/Player Mode
In playback mode, the jingle player and the track player play to the REC /
PLAY USB channel 1-2 and 3-4 inputs, respectively; this assignment cannot
be changed by the user.
In record mode, the track recorder records the signal provided to the logical
output mapped to the REC / PLAY USB channels 1-2 outputs; this assignment
cannot be changed by the user.

USB Mode The physical inputs MCH I/O USB Ch1-8 can be mapped to any (mono or
stereo) logical input.
The physical outputs MCH I/O USB channel 1-8 can be mapped to any (mono
or stereo) logical output.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-111

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.15.3 Jingle Player Operation

After plugging the memory stick to the Nano SCore’s REC / PLAY USB socket,
the system first checks for valid files. Provided that a compliant file system,
a folder named Jingle and files with correct names are available, jingle
playback is no problem. Playout is via the USB channels 1 and 2 that can be
assigned to any desk fader strip.

If not done yet, route the USB channels 1 and 2 to the desired fader strip:
• Press the rectangular INPUT key in the desk’s FUNCTION section. The
OLED displays in the fader strips will then show their input mapping and
the input routing icon.
• Turn the desired strip’s rotary knob until the display shows USB.

• Confirm the selection by pressing the illuminated key.
• Turn the rotary knob until the display shows USB 1/2.

• Confirm the selection by pressing the illuminated key.
Jingle playback is triggered by pressing one of the desk jingle keys (JINGLE 1
/ 2, APPLAUSE and BOO). Jingle playback starts immediately after pressing
a jingle key; the key is illuminated in yellow during jingle playback.

When pressing any jingle key while a jingle is already playing, playback is
stopped and the corresponding jingle immediately starts playing. A jingle can
also be restarted while it is already playing by pressing its illuminated key
again.
Please note: If the sampling rate of the audio file and the internal sampling

rate of the console should not match, the jingle is played nevertheless, but
with the wrong pitch, and an error message is generated in this case.

5-112  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.15.4 Track Recorder Operation

After plugging the USB memory device to the Nano SCore’s REC / PLAY
USB socket, the system first checks for valid files. Provided that a compliant
file system, a folder named Music and free memory are available on the
memory device, the two LEDs next to RECORDER are lighted in green, and
recording is allowed.

In case of a problem, recording is inhibited, and one of the following indica-
tions is output:

RECORDER LEDs are dark: No memory device is connected.

RECORDER LEDs are illuminated in red: A USB memory device is connected,
but either the files have an unknown format or the device verification has
failed.

RECORDER LEDs are flashing in green: The remaining recording time is less
than one minute.

RECORDER LEDs are flashing in red: Firmware is uploaded to the console,
please wait a few minutes until the LEDs stop flashing.

Recorder Keys The five keys used for operating the recorder are shown in the figure above.

When a USB memory device has been inserted and the RECORDER LEDs
are lighted in green, REC INFO changes the clock display over to indicate the
remaining time for recording (i.e. the free memory space); this can then look
as shown below. The current time-of-day can still be recalled by pressing the
CLOCK key.

REC BUS and PGM BUS are a sort of routing snapshot keys that select one
of the two busses for recording, regardless of what was routed to the REC /
PLAY USB channel 1 and 2 outputs before.
The REC= and STOP;/< keys are used to start and pause or stop the record-
ing. Recordings are saved in the Music folder and automatically named,
as already mentioned.
Recording is started by pressing the REC= key. The signal to be recorded
is taken either from what is routed to the REC / PLAY USB channel 1 and 2
outputs, or, if selected with REC BUS or PGM BUS, from one of these two
busses. The recorded track is automatically given a file name according to
the naming conventions outlined in chapter 5.15.1.2.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-113

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

During recording the REC= key is illuminated in red.

If during recording the remaining time counter is selected with REC INFO, it
is displayed counting backwards indicating the remaining recording time.
If REC= is pressed during recording, a new track is started immediately. If
the recorded file size reaches 4 GB, a new track is automatically started as
well.
A first press on the STOP;/< key pauses recording; during a pause the
REC= key flashes.
If REC= is pressed during a pause, recording of the same track continues,
no new track is generated then.
A second press on STOP;/< switches from pause to stop, and the REC=
key becomes dark.
A next recording can be started by simply pressing REC= again.

Recording stops automatically if the sampling rate changes during recording

or if the USB memory device is full.

If REC INFO is pressed repeatedly during recording or record pause, the

display toggles between remaining time and the name of the track that is
currently recorded (or paused), see below. In stop mode, it toggles between
remaining time indication and the name of the last recorded track. Names
of the recorded tracks are automatically generated according to the naming
conventions outlined in chapter 5.15.1.2.

5.15.5 Track Player Operation

The USB track player offers some convenient and intuitive features for select-
ing the file to be played as well as for pre-listening to the file and starting
playout.
After plugging the memory device (USB stick or hard disk drive) to the Nano
SCore’s REC / PLAY USB socket, the system first checks for valid files. Pro-
vided that a compliant file system, a folder named Music and files with
correct names are available, track playback is no problem. Playout is via the
USB channel 3 and 4 outputs that can be assigned to any desk fader strip.

5-114  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.15.5.1 Track Selection

Let us assume that the memory device contains tracks named T00001.wav
to T00017.wav in the \Music folder, and that track T00005.wav should
be played.

If not done yet, route the USB channels 3 and 4 to the desired fader strip:
• Press the rectangular INPUT key in the desk’s FUNCTION section. The
OLED displays in the fader strips will then show their input mapping and
the input routing icon.
• Turn the desired strip’s rotary knob until the display shows USB.

• Confirm the selection by pressing the illuminated key.
• Turn the rotary knob until the display shows USB 3/4.

• Confirm the selection by pressing the illuminated key.

Now the playback file can be selected:

• When touching the rotary knob now, the display shows Files.

• Confirm by pressing the illuminated key. The first playable track is
displayed. If a track is displayed in grey it has a different sampling rate
than the one the console is currently set to (it can be played anyway, but
will have a wrong pitch).
• The available tracks are listed by turning the rotary knob. Turn until the
desired track is displayed.

• Confirm the selection by pressing the illuminated key. The track name
scrolls into the display, the selection icon is replaced by the input routing
icon, and the track is selected for playback, as shown below.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-115

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

From now on, the file name is displayed instead of the channel label until
either the memory device is removed from the system, a different track is
selected or the system is restarted.

5.15.5.2 Track Pre-Listening

PFL Once a track is selected, it can be pre-listened. To do so, press the PFL key.
The tracked is played from the start, and the PFL key is illuminated.
Stop and ‘Rewind’ When deactivating PFL by pressing the key a second time playback stops and
the track is ‘rewound’ to its start.
Pause While PFL playback is active, the key is illuminated, signifying that it can
be used for the playback pause function. Pressing it pauses PFL playback,
and the key starts to flash.
Resume PFL To continue PFL playback, press the flashing key.
The pause key can also be used if the beginning of a track should be
skipped. During PFL playback just press the pause key at the desired loca-
tion; when activating track playback (see below) playout will start precisely
at the position where the track was paused before.

5.15.5.3 Track Playback

Playback
The selected track is played back as soon as the channel becomes active; i.e.
its fader is opened, the ON key is activated and the channel is routed to one
of the master busses (this status is indicated with the blue ‘channel active’
LED and the red ON AIR signal in the meter bridge).
Pause For playback pause, either the fader can be closed, the ON key can be deacti-
vated, or, as with the PFL function described above, the illuminated pause
key can be used. During a pause the pause key flashes.
A direct transition from pause to stop is only possible if pause mode was
entered by closing the fader or deactivating the ON key (channel inactive),
followed by pressing the flashing pause key.
Resume Playback Playback is resumed by either a second press on the flashing pause key
or by switching the channel off and on again, either with the ON key or by
closing and re-opening the fader.
Stop For a direct transition from pause to stop, the pause mode must have been
entered by either closing the fader or deactivating the ON key (channel inac-
tive), followed by pressing the flashing pause key.
Playback and PFL When activating PFL during track playback the track will continue playing
without interruption, no matter whether PFL is active or not. The only effect
of activating the PFL function is that the PFL signal is fed to the selected
monitoring or headphones outputs instead of the master signal.
If the track is paused by pressing the pause key (channel remains active),
activating and deactivating PFL still has no effect on the track currently play-
ing.

5-116  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Notes:
If however the PFL function is activated while the track is paused by either
closing the fader or deactivating the ON key (channel inactive), PFL playback
is resumed from the current track position; when deactivating PFL the track
player is switched to stop.

Although this case may not be very probable, please be careful when using
the channel active controls and PFL at the same time; a track player that is
paused (by either closing the fader or deactivating the ON key) followed by
a restart with PFL immediately plays out to the master right from the current
position as soon as the channel is activated again (fader up or channel ON)!

LED Display As long as CLOCK is active in track playback/pause mode, the LED display
shows the current time-of-day. When pressing REC INFO repeatedly, it toggles
between the remaining recording time on the USB memory device (showing
a constant time value) and blanks except the small TRK indicator, as shown
below.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-117

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.16 Remote Operation

Studer OnAir mixing consoles are networkable. There are three applications
for remote access or control via a network available.
System Viewer This application can be helpful in case of network problems. It displays all
devices within the OnAir network.
Remote Console Studer OnAir mixing consoles can either be controlled and configured directly
at the console (using their GUI and/or a connected USB keyboard and mouse),
or over a network using the Remote Console application running on a Win-
dows PC.
Remote Configuration Tool The Remote Configuration Tool application has additional, increased flex-
ibility by allowing the remote configuration of different networked consoles
from one single location.

Note: Up to three of these application may run simultaneously on your PC – so you

can e.g. control three consoles at the same time, or control one console while
configuring two others.

5.16.1 Preparation
During the installation process you will have to enter the ID of and a name
for your System. The system ID is defined as the 3 least-significant digits of
the Nano SCore’s serial number you are connecting to. In case these 3 digits
should be greater than 255, it is equal to [the last 3 digits modulo 255]. Cal-
culate as follows: Subtract 255 from the last 3 digits as many times as needed
for a remainder between 0 and 255; the remainder is the result.
Example: If the last 3 digits are 621, enter 111 (621 – 255 = 366, and 366 –
255 = 111). The system ID can also be found out using the System Viewer
application, see below.
The system name can be freely choosen. However it is recommended to
give the system a name that is somehow connected to the System ID, such
as P1K5_111. The same name must then be used for the Remote Console
application.
Of course, it is mandatory that the PC and the console are located within the
same network.
PC Network Settings Check Network Connections (or similar). Make sure that the PC has an
IP address and that it is located within the same network as the OnAir system
you want to connect to. Since these settings are varying between different
Windows versions, no guidelines can be given here. Please ask your IT/net-
work administrator for assistance if necessary.

5.16.2 System Viewer Application

Installation Important for Windows Vista and Windows 7 PCs: Make sure that you have
! write access to the selected location.
• Locate the x_SW_Vx.x.x.xx folder for your console type on the Product
DVD shipped with your console. Navigate to the Win2K_Compilations/
Release SystemViewer folder.
• Copy the complete folder to a location of your choice on your computer.
• Open the folder you have copied before and make a copy of the Multi-
castGroups_template.ini file; rename the copy to MulticastGroups.
ini.

5-118  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

• The short MulticastGroups.ini file defines which addresses are used

for multicast communication. If the default addresses are not ok, please
ask your IT/network administrator for assistance and modify them. The
default MulticastGroups.ini file is shown below.

################################################
# Define here multicast groups that will
# be joined to receive container infos.

MulticastGroup = 239.255.0.1
MulticastGroup = 239.255.0.2
MulticastGroup = 239.255.0.3

#
################################################

• Generate a shortcut to SystemViewer.exe and move it to your desktop

for a convenient start of the tool.
Installation is complete now.

Operation Start the System Viewer either by a click on its desktop icon (shown left) or
on SystemViewer.exe within in its folder. The System Viewer window will
look similar to the screenshot below.

As you can see, this is a fairly large networked system. The list can be sorted
per column, as familiar from Windows operation, by clicking on the title bar
of the desired column. The Remote Console application from our example
has a Container ID of 150 and is listed at the System Viewer’s bottom line.

In case of a network problem, the System Viewer window will be empty.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-119

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.16.3 Remote Console Application

Installation
Important for Windows Vista and Windows 7 PCs: Make sure that you have
!
write access to the selected location.
• Locate the x_SW_Vx.x.x.xx folder for your console type on the Product
DVD shipped with your console. Navigate to the Win2K_Compilations/
Release RemoteConsole folder.
• Copy the complete folder to a location of your choice on your computer
(perhaps to the desktop).
• Open the folder you have copied before and make a copy of the con-
tainer_template.ini file; rename the copy to container.ini.
• Edit the container.ini file (an example of a container.ini file is located
on the following pages):
- First, set the systemid parameter to the System ID of your core (i.e.,
to 111 in our example). Please note that on both sides of the ‘=’ sign a
blank is mandatory. The system ID is defined as the 3 least-significant
digits of the Nano SCore’s serial number you are connecting to. In
case these 3 digits should be greater than 255, it is equal to [the last 3
digits modulo 255]. Calculate as follows: Subtract 255 from the last 3
digits as many times as needed for a remainder between 0 and 255; the
remainder is the result.
Example: If the last 3 digits are 621, enter 111 for it (621 – 255 = 366,
and 366 – 255 = 111). The system ID can also be found out using the
System Viewer application, refer to chapter 5.16.2.
- Set systemname to the System Name of your core (i.e., “P1K5_111”
in our example).
- Set the container ID – you may use, e.g. the Secondary DESK (par-
allel) ID that equals 150. The ‘container’ in this case is the PC that
runs the Remote Console application.
- Give the container a name, such as containername = “Remote Con-
sole”.
- If your console(s) is/are working with multicasts in your network,
uncomment one or several of the # MulticastGroup = ... lines
(i.e., delete the ‘#’ hash mark and the following blank), and enter the
multicast address(es) that your IT administrator should be able to give
you.
- When using multicasts, uncomment the MulticastTimeToLive line
and enter a value of 10 or higher, depending on the number of routers
through which the multicast has to travel.
- If your computer has more than one network adapter, the MAC address
must be uncommented and specified. You will find the MAC address
under your computer’s network settings, such as MAC = 00-1B-21-
4F-13-BD in our example.
• Save and close the container.ini f ile. Generate a shortcut to Remote-
Console.exe and move it to your desktop for a convenient start of the
tool.
Installation is complete now.

The Remote Console container.ini file used for this example is printed
on the following pages.

5-120  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

##########################################################################
#
# container.ini: Necessary for initialization of each container (.exe)
#
# Digital Mixing Console: OnAir3000
# Studer Professional Audio GmbH, Regensdorf, Switzerland
#
# Last modification : Sep, 1st 2006
# Compatible with OATreeLib : V2.1
# Author : xSP, SO
#
# Rules:
# ======
# - always leave one blank before and after the ‘=’ (e.g. systemid=1 NO!)
# - never change the left expression
# - the right expression of systemid, containerid, systemname
# and containername MUST be defined
#
##########################################################################

# The systemid identifies the mixing console system to which this container
# belongs to. The systemid is a unique number within a network.
# The serial number of the CORE shall be used as systemid.

systemid = 111

# The systemname identifies the mixing console system in a readable way

# and must be unique within a company resp. network. It is recommended
# not to use more than 8 characters due to visualization aspects.
# “Undefined” is not allowed!

systemname = “P1K5_111”

# The containerid identifies this container

# and must be unique within the mixing console system
#
# The following container IDs are defined:
#
# containerid = 10 : CORE
# containerid = 15 : BridgeCard
# containerid = 20 : Standalone ConfigGUI
# containerid = 30 : Digimedia (not used any more - last used for OnAir V3.2)
# containerid = 40 : Logger
# containerid = 50 : TreeViewer
# containerid = 60 : SoftwareUpdateWizard
# containerid = 71 : Central OnAir 3000 Server (User server, Snapshot server, Logger)
# containerid = 80 : Route1000

# containerid = 100 : Primary DESK

# containerid = 101 : Standalone DeskDriver of the Primary Desk
# containerid = 110 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 1..6
# containerid = 111 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 7..12
# containerid = 112 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 13..18
# containerid = 113 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 19..24
# containerid = 114 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 25..30
# containerid = 115 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 31..36
# containerid = 116 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 37..42
# containerid = 117 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 43..48
# containerid = 118 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 49..54 (virtual
# Strip Channels)
# containerid = 119 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 55..60 (virtual
# Strip Channels)

# containerid = 150 : Secondary DESK (parallel)

# containerid = 151 : Standalone DeskDriver of the Secondary Desk

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-121

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

# containerid = 160 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 1..6
# containerid = 161 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 7..12
# containerid = 162 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 13..18
# containerid = 163 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 19..24
# containerid = 164 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 25..30
# containerid = 165 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 31..36
# containerid = 166 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 37..42
# containerid = 167 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 43..48
# containerid = 168 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 49..54 (virtual
# Strip Channels)
# containerid = 169 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 55..60 (virtual
# Strip Channels)

# containerid = 240 : DNet TestFramework

# containerid = 254 : SNMPAgent

containerid = 150

# The containername identifies this container in a readable way

# and must be unique within the mixing console system. It is recommended
# not to use more than 8 characters due to visualization aspects.
# “Undefined” is not allowed!

containername = “RemtCons”

# Multicast
# ---------
# If you use IGMP multicasts instead of broadcasts in your network,
# you have to uncomment the lines below. It is possible that a
# container is member of one or more than one multicast groups.
#
# NOTE: For an optimal performance, make sure that all network ressources
# (Switches, Routers...) support IGMP.
#
# NOTE: To avoid IP conflicts, check the available addresses for
# multicast groups (www.iana.org). Use preferable addresses from the
# local scope (239.255.0.0/16) described in RFC 2365.
#
# NOTE: If the multicast should reach computers beyond the local subnet
# Set MulticastTimeToLive > 1 (1 is default)

MulticastGroup = 239.255.0.1
MulticastGroup = 239.255.0.2
MulticastGroup = 239.255.0.3
MulticastTimeToLive = 10

# Multiple Network Adapters

# -------------------------
# When more than one network adapter is enabled on the computer, the MAC Address has to be
# specified
#
MAC = 00-1B-21-4F-13-BD

# Demo Version
# -------------------------
# Enable this parameter if you want to enable the OnAir 3000 Demo Version. The OnAir Demo
# Version has all software options (I\O Sharing, CMS...) enabled, but no network connection and
# the DSP extension will not be loaded.
# Don’t use this parameter on Windows CE!
#
# DemoVersion

##########################################################################

5-122  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Operation Start the Remote Console application by a double-click on either the desktop
shortcut (shown left) or directly on RemoteConsole.exe in its folder. If
everything is correct, the Home page of your console will pop up:

On from here, the console can be operated as usual. In case of a network
problem, only the Home and the Login buttons are displayed at the upper
edge of the page. This will then look as shown below:

Operation with Multiple Systems: It is as well possible to control more than one OnAir console from a single
computer, provided that these consoles are located in the same network as
the computer. To do so, just copy the Release RemoteConsole folder as
many times as needed to your computer, edit every container.ini file
approprietly and generate a desktop shortcut for every console. Up to 3
Remote Console applications may run simultaneously if no System Viewer
application or Remote Configuration tool is used at the same time.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-123

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.16.4 Remote Configuration Tool

The (Remote) Configuration Tool is very similar to the Configuration Tool
that can be started from the Remote Console’s Admin - Config page. The
only difference is that it allows selection of the console to be configured – so
it is, in fact, useful only in case of a larger networked system.

Installation
Important for Windows Vista and Windows 7 PCs: Make sure that you have
!
write access to the selected location.
• Locate the folder x_SW_Vx.x.x.xx for your console type on the Product
DVD shipped with your console. Navigate to the Win2K_Compilations/
Release ConfigTool folder.
• Copy the complete folder to a location of your choice on your computer.
• Open the folder you have copied before and make a copy of the con-
tainer_template.ini file; rename the copy to container.ini.
• Edit the container.ini file:
- Select a system ID that is not used by another system (you can use the
System Viewer for information), such as systemid = 80.
- Give the system a name that makes sense, such as systemname =
“Admin”.
- In the container ID list there already exists an entry ‘Standalone Con-
figGUI’ that may be selected – so enter containerid = 20.
- Give the container a name, such as containername = “CnfgTool”.
It makes sense to use no more than 8 characters due to visualization
aspects.
- If your console(s) is/are working with multicasts in your network,
uncomment one or several of the # MulticastGroup = ... lines
(i.e., delete the ‘#’ hash mark and the following blank), and enter the
multicast address(es) that your IT administrator should be able to give
you.
- When using multicasts, uncomment the MulticastTimeToLive line
and enter a value of 10 or higher, depending on the number of routers
through which the multicast has to travel.
- If your computer has more than one network adapter, the MAC address
must be uncommented and specified. You will find the MAC address
under your computer’s network settings, such as MAC = 00-1B-21-
4F-13-BD in our example.
• Save and close the container.ini f ile. Generate a shortcut to Config-
Tool.exe and move it to your desktop for a convenient start of the tool.
Installation is complete now.

Nice to know: It is possible to configure different consoles being not part of the same mul-
ticast group from a single computer. Just enter all required multicast groups
here; this will allow the configuration tool accessing the consoles, but the
consoles will not ‘see’ each other although they are within the same network.

The Config Tool container.ini file used for this example looks as follows:

5-124  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

##########################################################################
#
# container.ini: Necessary for initialization of each container (.exe)
#
# Digital Mixing Console: OnAir3000
# Studer Professional Audio GmbH, Regensdorf, Switzerland
#
# Last modification : Sep, 1st 2006
# Compatible with OATreeLib : V2.1
# Author : xSP, SO
#
# Rules:
# - always leave one blank before and after the ‘=’ (e.g. systemid=1 NO!)
# - never change the left expression
# - the right expression of systemid, containerid, systemname
# and containername MUST be defined
#
##########################################################################

# The systemid identifies the mixing console system to which this container
# belongs to. The systemid is a unique number within a network.
# The serial number of the CORE shall be used as systemid.

systemid = 80

# The systemname identifies the mixing console system in a readable way

# and must be unique within a company resp. network. It is recommended
# not to use more than 8 characters due to visualization aspects.
# “Undefined” is not allowed!

systemname = “Admin”

# The containerid identifies this container

# and must be unique within the mixing console system
#
# The following container IDs are defined:
#
# containerid = 10 : CORE
# containerid = 15 : BridgeCard
# containerid = 20 : Standalone ConfigGUI
# containerid = 30 : Digimedia (not used any more - last used for OnAir V3.2)
# containerid = 40 : Logger
# containerid = 50 : TreeViewer
# containerid = 60 : SoftwareUpdateWizard
# containerid = 71 : Central OnAir 3000 Server (User server, Snapshot server, Logger)
# containerid = 80 : Route1000

# containerid = 100 : Primary DESK

# containerid = 101 : Standalone DeskDriver of the Primary Desk
# containerid = 110 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 1..6
# containerid = 111 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 7..12
# containerid = 112 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 13..18
# containerid = 113 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 19..24
# containerid = 114 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 25..30
# containerid = 115 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 31..36
# containerid = 116 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 37..42
# containerid = 117 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 43..48
# containerid = 118 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 49..54 (virtual
# Strip Channels)
# containerid = 119 : CHANNEL Screen of the Primary Desk for Channels 55..60 (virtual
# Strip Channels)
#
# containerid = 150 : Secondary DESK (parallel)
# containerid = 151 : Standalone DeskDriver of the Secondary Desk
# containerid = 160 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 1..6

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-125

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

# containerid = 161 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 7..12
# containerid = 162 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 13..18
# containerid = 163 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 19..24
# containerid = 164 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 25..30
# containerid = 165 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 31..36
# containerid = 166 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 37..42
# containerid = 167 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 43..48
# containerid = 168 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 49..54 (virtual
# Strip Channels)
# containerid = 169 : CHANNEL Screen of the Secondary Desk for Channels 55..60 (virtual
# Strip Channels)

# containerid = 240 : DNet TestFramework

# containerid = 254 : SNMPAgent

containerid = 20

# The containername identifies this container in a readable way

# and must be unique within the mixing console system. It is recommended
# not to use more than 8 characters due to visualization aspects.
# “Undefined” is not allowed!

containername = “CnfgTool”

# Multicast
# ---------
# If you use IGMP multicasts instead of broadcasts in your network,
# you have to uncomment the the lines below. It is possible, that a
# container is member of one or more than one multicast groups.
#
# NOTE: For an optimal performance, make sure that all network ressources
# (Switches, Routers...) support IGMP.
#
# NOTE: To avoid IP conflicts, check the available addresses for
# multicast groups (www.iana.org). Use preferable addresses from the
# local scope (239.255.0.0/16) described in RFC 2365.
#
# NOTE: If the multicast should reach computers beyond the local subnet
# Set MulticastTimeToLive > 1 (1 is default)

MulticastGroup = 239.255.0.1
MulticastGroup = 239.255.0.2
MulticastGroup = 239.255.0.3
MulticastTimeToLive = 10

# Multiple Network Adapters

# -------------------------
# When more than one network adapter is enabled on the computer, the MAC Address has to
# be specified
#
MAC = 00-1B-21-4F-13-BD

# Demo Version
# -------------------------
# Enable this parameter if you want to enable the OnAir 3000 Demo Version. The OnAir Demo
# Version has all # software options (I\O Sharing, CMS...) enabled, but no network connection
# and the DSP extension will not be loaded.
# Don’t use this parameter on Windows CE!
#
# DemoVersion

5-126  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

Operation Start the Remote Config Tool application by a double-click on either the
desk­top shortcut (shown left) or directly on ConfigTool.exe in its folder.

When started, the Config Tool window will look similar to the screenshot
below:

When clicking on the arrow button in the System Selection field, a list
drops down for selecting the desired system. Click on it, then on OK. This
will open the familiar configuration pages.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-127

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5.16.4.1 Login USB Stick

Important
Not all USB sticks are recognized by the system if plugged in before or during
! start-up. The USB stick shipped with the console has been tested for start-up
recognition; it is recommended therefor that this stick is used for login.
If two login USB sticks are connected to the console, the last one ‘wins’.
A USB stick intended for user login must contain a file named Login.ID.
Normally this file is created by the system administrator; he must use the
Remote Config Tool to do so.
1 Start the Remote Config Tool and select the system as outlined in chapter
5.16.4. The configuration window opens.
2 Expand the User item in the configuration menu tree by a click on the ‘+’
button next to the item and click on Users.
3 Create a new user (name and password) and activate him by entering On
in the User Valid field. The user name created in our example is FLO, his
password is Ferro. Please remember that user names and passwords are
case-sensitive, both when creating and using them.
4 Save the new user by clicking the Save User button at the right edge of
the window. The user must be created on every system that he will use.
5 Select Tools from the menu bar and select Create Login File..., as shown
below.

6 The Login File window pops up; select the new user from the User:

dropdown menu:

5-128  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

7 Click on Create File.

The newly created Login.ID file is saved in the same folder that contains
the Remote Config Tool application.
8 Copy it from there to the user’s USB stick.

When opening this file with a text editor such as Notepad, you will see its
contents: the user’s name and his encrypted password:

Note: If no password is needed for a user, the procedure described above can be
skipped; the file can then also be created in a text editor without using the
Remote Config Tool. Just copy the syntax exactly, enter the user name and
leave the password entry empty, such as shown below.

When this is done, save the file on the user’s USB stick under the name
Login.ID.

User Login Each time the user’s USB stick is plugged into or removed from the DATA /
LOGIN USB socket, the user is automatically logged in/out. The user name
and his last loaded snapshot are displayed for a few seconds in the FUNCTION
OLED display after logging in. If a default snapshot was saved for this user,
it is automatically loaded to the desk as well.

When pressing the FUNCTION rotary knob during operation, the OLED
display indicates this user information, too.

When logging out (i.e. pulling out the login USB stick), the system automati-
cally activates the default user but will keep the last loaded snapshot.

Date printed: 14.02.12 SW V4.1 Operation  5-129

OnAir 1500 Digital Mixing Console

5-130  Operation SW V4.1 Date printed: 14.02.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

CHAPTER 6

6 Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3

6.1 Desk Settings............................................................................................................................................................... 4

6.2 Configuration Backup.................................................................................................................................................. 5
6.3 Auto(matic) Configuration.......................................................................................................................................... 6
6.3.1 I/O Init.................................................................................................................................................................... 7
6.3.2 Desk Init................................................................................................................................................................. 7
6.3.3 GPIO Init................................................................................................................................................................ 7
6.4 Configuration Tool....................................................................................................................................................... 8
6.4.1 Navigation and Handling....................................................................................................................................... 9
6.4.2 Undo / Exit / Save Config...................................................................................................................................... 9
6.5 Configuration Procedure............................................................................................................................................ 10
6.5.1 Logical Inputs...................................................................................................................................................... 10
6.5.2 Logical Outputs.................................................................................................................................................... 15
6.5.3 Fixed Outputs....................................................................................................................................................... 16
6.5.4 Fixed Out Meter................................................................................................................................................... 16
6.5.5 Insert Sends.......................................................................................................................................................... 17
6.5.6 Insert Returns....................................................................................................................................................... 17
6.5.7 Encoder Sends (supported by OnAir 3000 only)................................................................................................. 18
6.5.8 Encoder Returns (supported by OnAir 3000 only).............................................................................................. 19
6.5.9 Patch Inputs (supported by OnAir 3000 only)..................................................................................................... 19
6.5.10 Patch Outputs (supported by OnAir 3000 only).................................................................................................. 20
6.5.11 Masters................................................................................................................................................................. 21
6.5.12 Extern PFLs.......................................................................................................................................................... 22
6.5.13 Extern Mon Src.................................................................................................................................................... 23
6.5.14 Settings................................................................................................................................................................. 23
6.5.15 System Time ........................................................................................................................................................ 26
6.5.16 User Functions..................................................................................................................................................... 27
6.5.17 Strip Channels...................................................................................................................................................... 27
6.5.18 Partial Output Routing......................................................................................................................................... 28
6.5.19 Selections............................................................................................................................................................. 29
6.5.19.1 Inp Grps .......................................................................................................................................................... 29
6.5.19.2 Patch Grps (supported by OnAir 3000 only)................................................................................................... 31
6.5.19.3 Master Outs..................................................................................................................................................... 31
6.5.19.4 Master Faders.................................................................................................................................................. 32
6.5.19.5 Master Ins........................................................................................................................................................ 32
6.5.19.6 Strip Assign..................................................................................................................................................... 33
6.5.19.7 Out Routing..................................................................................................................................................... 34
6.5.19.8 Inserts.............................................................................................................................................................. 34
6.5.19.9 Meter Src......................................................................................................................................................... 35
6.5.19.10 Ducking Key Inputs (supported by OnAir 3000 only).................................................................................... 35
6.5.20 I/O Sharing (Option)............................................................................................................................................ 36
6.5.20.1 Distributed Control.......................................................................................................................................... 38
6.5.20.2 Define Physical Connections........................................................................................................................... 39
6.5.20.3 Define Net Inputs............................................................................................................................................ 41
6.5.20.4 Define Net Consumer Groups / Net Consumers............................................................................................. 43
6.5.21 Codec Management.............................................................................................................................................. 44
6.5.21.1 Basics............................................................................................................................................................... 44
6.5.21.2 Configuration................................................................................................................................................... 45
6.5.21.3 Operation......................................................................................................................................................... 46

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-1

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.22 Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................................... 48

6.5.22.1 Settings............................................................................................................................................................ 48
6.5.22.2 Rotary.............................................................................................................................................................. 50
6.5.22.3 SP SRC............................................................................................................................................................ 51
6.5.23 Signaling.............................................................................................................................................................. 52
6.5.23.1 Settings............................................................................................................................................................ 52
6.5.24 Snapshot............................................................................................................................................................... 53
6.5.24.1 Parameters....................................................................................................................................................... 53
6.5.25 TalkBack.............................................................................................................................................................. 55
6.5.25.1 Settings............................................................................................................................................................ 55
6.5.25.2 TalkBack.......................................................................................................................................................... 56
6.5.25.2.1 TB/XL Box Configuration Examples/Tutorials............................................................................................................57
6.5.26 GPIO.................................................................................................................................................................... 61
6.5.26.1 General............................................................................................................................................................ 61
6.5.26.1.1 SW V3.2 Enhancements................................................................................................................................................61
6.5.26.1.2 SW Upgrade..................................................................................................................................................................61
6.5.26.2 (Remote) GPIO................................................................................................................................................ 62
6.5.26.2.1 GPIO Configuration Details..........................................................................................................................................64
6.5.26.3 Custom Logic.................................................................................................................................................. 74
6.5.26.3.1 Custom Logic Gates......................................................................................................................................................74
6.5.26.3.2 Synchronization............................................................................................................................................................76
6.5.26.3.3 Consumer Details..........................................................................................................................................................76
6.5.26.3.4 Custom Logic Configuration........................................................................................................................................77
6.5.26.3.5 Custom Logic Examples...............................................................................................................................................78
6.5.26.3.6 Error Handling..............................................................................................................................................................86
6.5.27 Desk Common ..................................................................................................................................................... 87
6.5.27.1 Mon, TB Keys................................................................................................................................................. 87
6.5.27.2 Cue Keys......................................................................................................................................................... 91
6.5.27.3 Output Routing Keys....................................................................................................................................... 93
6.5.27.4 XL Section....................................................................................................................................................... 93
6.5.28 Pro-Bel................................................................................................................................................................. 94
6.5.28.1 Settings............................................................................................................................................................ 94
6.5.28.2 Routable Sources............................................................................................................................................. 95
6.5.29 Audio Clock ........................................................................................................................................................ 96
6.5.29.1 Settings............................................................................................................................................................ 96
6.5.30 User (User Management)..................................................................................................................................... 97
6.5.30.1 Admin.............................................................................................................................................................. 97
6.5.30.2 Default User..................................................................................................................................................... 98
6.5.30.3 Users................................................................................................................................................................ 99
6.5.30.4 Policies, Departments.................................................................................................................................... 100
6.5.31 License Manager................................................................................................................................................ 102
6.5.31.1 Information.................................................................................................................................................... 102
6.5.31.2 Options.......................................................................................................................................................... 102
6.5.32 Desk................................................................................................................................................................... 103
6.5.32.1 Fader Assign 1 - Group 1 .............................................................................................................................. 103
6.5.32.2 Rotary Assign 2 - Group 2 (supported by OnAir 3000 only)........................................................................ 104
6.5.32.3 Assignable Rotary Functions......................................................................................................................... 105
6.5.32.4 Assignable Global Functions......................................................................................................................... 107
6.5.32.5 Assignable Channel Strip Functions............................................................................................................. 113
6.5.32.6 Snapshot Keys............................................................................................................................................... 116
6.5.32.7 Settings.......................................................................................................................................................... 117
6.5.33 User GUI............................................................................................................................................................ 118
6.5.33.1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................................... 118
6.5.33.2 Desk Resources (supported by OnAir 3000 only)......................................................................................... 119

6-2 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6 Configuration
Please Note: In order to have operating instructions available as fast as possible, the fol-
! lowing chapters are temporary copies of the OnAir 2500 manual and will be
updated soon. Some features are not supported by the OnAir 1500.

One of the strong points of the OnAir 1500/2500/3000 consoles is their exten-
sive flexibility. Flexibility from the hardware on one side – for the OnAir 3000
in particular – but also a huge amount of flexibility on the system integration
side. This implies the need for a means to configure all the different interfaces
to the overall system, such as labels, fader starts, GPIOs, etc.
The configuration part of the user interface is only used for console set-up
and exclusively reserved to the system administrator. Therefor it is strictly
separated from the user GUI intended for daily use by the console operators.

Important!
The system configuration tool (‘Config Tool’) is intended for trained per-
sonnel (such as the system administrator) only; due to the fact that it allows
contradictory settings in some points, care must be applied when using it.
When making configuration changes, it is strongly recommended to backup
the current configuration on an external medium (e.g. USB stick) before, see
chapter 6.2; when using a computer with an appropriate socket, the files on
the external medium may then be saved to any backup drive for additional
data safety.
Notes: OnAir 1500 does not support a main screen. Therefore external components
must be used for configuration: either a DVI screen, USB keyboard and
mouse (refer to chapter 5.1) or a Windows PC connected to the Nano SCore
via Ethernet running the Remote Console or the Remote Configuration Tool
application (refer to chapter 6.6). Both methods do not support the touch
screen functionality known from OnAir 2500 and OnAir 3000.
Remote Console or Remote Configuration Tool networked operation is, of
course, also available for OnAir 2500 and OnAir 3000.
Many of the screenshots are identical or nearly identical for OnAir 1500,
OnAir 2500 and OnAir 3000; in this case, only an OnAir 3000 screenshot is
given.

The Config Tool can be accessed from the main screen in the Admin menu.
Its concept is based on the touch screen and the rotary encoders below the
screen. Alternatively, the Config Tool may also be handled as a part of the
GUI application on a remote PC that is connected to the console. In doing so,
the desk parameters can be accessed via a network, even without the need of
being in the same location.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-3

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

If the system administrator is logged in, a Config button appears in the
Admin screen’s menu bar. When touching it, the central part of the screen
is subdivided into three sections:
Desk Settings – Save (see chapter 6.1),
Config Tool – Start, and
Backup / Restore, Reboot (see chapter 6.2).

6.1 Desk Settings

If you want the current desk settings* to be part of the initial snapshot (startup
configuration) of the console – i.e., the changes will be permanent, even if the
console is switched off and on again – then the Desk Settings - Save button
can be used, as shown on the screenshot below. A message Do you really
want to overwrite the startup configuration of the console? appears that
has to be confirmed by touching the Yes button.
There is an automatic desk settings saving routine provided by default that
saves all settings in intervals of 10 seconds, i.e. not longer than 10 seconds
after the last change. This is configured in the Snapshot - Parameters page
as well (‘InitialSnapshot: AutoSave Desk Settings’).
* The initial snapshot contains all desk settings, including input fader gain.
However, if recalling the input fader gain settings in addition to the other
parameters is desired as a part of the initial snapshot, this needs to be con-
figured in the Snapshot - Parameters page (‘InitialSnapshot: Loading
Input Fader Gain’, refer to chapter 6.5.24.1).

6-4 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.2 Configuration Backup

Backup/restore allows backup and restoring the complete console configura-
tion to or from external media. This consists of the start-up configuration,
the operational initial snapshot, all *.xml and *.ini files. User snapshots are
excluded but can be saved to and restored from external media separately.
Slots for external memory media are provided (OnAir 3000: CF card and USB
sockets, OnAir 1500/2500: USB socket). If using the remote configuration
tool, the files can be saved at any desired location.
Backup and restore may as well be used for copying configurations between
consoles.

Backup If an external memory medum is inserted, this is displayed in the list (e.g.
USBMedia). After touching the Backup button, the screen keyboard pops
up for giving the backup a name. After touching Enter, the configuration
files are copied to the external medium; this takes a few seconds, the Backup
button is highlighted during the transfer.
Restore Select the desired configuration file with the rotary encoder below the Backup
field and touch Restore. After confirmation the configuration data are loaded
into the console’s memory; the Restore button is highlighted during the
transfer. Once finished, the console has to be re-booted by touching Reboot.
Rename To rename backup configuration files on the external medium. If the new
name should already exist, a dialog box appears where overwriting the exist-
ing backup has to be confirmed.
Delete To delete backup configuration files from the external medium. A dialog box
appears where deleting the selected backup has to be confirmed.
Reboot Reboots all sub-systems of the selected system, e.g. core, desks and channel
screens of the OnAir 3000. A dialog box appears where rebooting the current
system has to be confirmed. If at least one channel should be on-air, the reboot
is not executed but a user warning appears in such a case.
Important The USB memory device MUST NOT BE REMOVED from the socket
! DURING DATA ACCESS – only remove it after its LED has stopped flash-
ing!

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-5

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.3 Auto(matic) Configuration

Unless the console is shipped with a specific, customer-defined configura-
tion, the automatic configuration functions may be applied when powering
it up for the first time. Manually configuring all the different parameters can
be a quite time-consuming task, so Auto Configuration is the recommended
procedure in such a case.
Auto Configuration considers the currently installed I/O hardware, creates
logical inputs and outputs that are mapped to the physical input and output
modules, provides a common desk setup allowing the user to operate the
console, and specifies the GPIO functions. Thus the configuration effort is
reduced to a minimum. Of course, some manual fine tuning will be necessary
afterwards, such as editing the input/output labels displayed by the desk.
Auto Configuration may be activated by a user having access to configura-
tion (this usually is the system administrator only). Since SW V3.1, the three
...Init buttons are located at the right-hand edge of the Config Tool instead
of on the Admin - Config page. Hence the Config Tool needs to be started
first by touching the Config Tool - Start button (see previous page). When
touching one of the ...Init buttons, a user warning pops up, saying ‘You are
about to reconfigure the console. Do you really want to overwrite your
I/O / desk / GPIO configuration’, as shown below.

After confirmation with Yes, the configuration process starts. It takes a few
seconds to be completed, depending on system size. Save the new configura-
tion by touching Save Config, or exit the Config Tool by touching Exit.
Note: If one of the Auto Configuration functions has inadvertently been started,
the current console configuration will immediately be overwritten. However,
the previous configuration may be rescued by powering the console off and
on again, as long as the Save Config button was not used before.
It is strongly recommended to have a backup of the current configuration
files available on an external memory medium (see chapter 6.2).

6-6 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.3.1 I/O Init

• I/O Init detects the I/O hardware in the console and/or in the D21m I/O
frame(s) and maps the physical input and output signals provided by/to the
I/O frame to the logical inputs and outputs in a reasonable order.
• It generates basic input labels that can be manually modified later.
• It assigns input locations, signaling sources, talkback inputs and monitoring
outputs.
Notes:
If the desired input format for line or AES/EBU inputs should be ‘mono’, this
setting must be made manually using the Config Tool application after I/O
Init has been completed.
Since OnAir 1500/2500 consoles are available in fixed configurations only,
I/O Init is normally not necessary - unless the console is combined with an
external D21m I/O frame.
After I/O Init, the changes have to be saved as initial snapshot by touching
the Save Config button.

6.3.2 Desk Init

Desk Init is not a factory reset function; it is, however, the basic initialization
of specific parameters such as rotary assignment functions, master outputs,
monitoring and meter sources, talkback destinations etc.
The system administrator’s password is initialized to admin during the init
phase.
After Desk Init, the changes have to be saved as initial snapshot by touching
the Save Config button.

6.3.3 GPIO Init

GPIO Init is not a factory reset function; it is, however, the basic initializa-
tion of specific parameters as listed below, according to pre-defined rules.
After GPIO Init, the changes have to be saved as initial snapshot by touching
the Save Config button.
Caution! If one of the Auto Configuration function has been started inadvertently,
the current console configuration will immediately be overwritten. However,
the previous configuration may be rescued by powering the console off and
on again, as long as the Save Config button was not used before.
It is strongly recommended to have a backup of the current configuration
files available on an external memory medium (see chapter 6.2).

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-7

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.4 Configuration Tool

After having touched the Config Tool - Start button, a blank configuration
page appears, showing the collapsed configuration menu tree at the left.

The configuration parameters are divided in function groups. Each function

group can be selected and edited on separate pages (details in the following
chapters).

Notes:
The optional Probel function group also appears on consoles not equipped
with the option, but in such a case it cannot be expanded.

Some of the menu tree items are supported by the OnAir 3000 only and will
not be displayed on an OnAir 2500.

6-8 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.4.1 Navigation and Handling

Two basic options are available for the configuration procedure. You can
either use the touch screen and the rotary encoders located below the screen
(standard case), or, if a PC running the configuration application is connected
to the system, operate the tool with the computer mouse and keyboard (also
useful if there is no touch screen at the system administrator’s location).
For the following descriptions it is assumed that touch screen operation is
used. However, everyone who once has operated a Windows PC with mouse
and keyboard will immediately be familiar with the second option.
You will always work your way from the left to the right, first selecting a
group of parameters from the configuration menu tree. As the menu tree
entries are somewhat narrow to be easily hit on the touch screen, they may be
selected with the leftmost rotary encoder as well. Once the desired function
group is highlighted, touch Expand (or Collapse, respectively) to expand
(or collapse) the group; if a USB keyboard is connected to the main screen’s
USB port, the → and ← arrow keys may be used for expanding/collapsing.
An expanded configuration menu tree is shown left.
Scrolling within the grid is done by touching the  or  buttons for vertical
movement, and  or  for horizontal movement. Alternatively, the rotary
encoders located just below the Vertical and Horizontal fields may be used.
If more items are available than can be displayed on the screen, horizontal
and/or vertical scrollbars appear.
After touching one of the matrix fields on the screen, a selection menu
appears, and the current selection is highlighted. The menu allows selecting
from various options by touching the desired item. In case the selection menu
should be higher than the screen, scrolling up/down arrows, PgUp/PgDown,
and Top/Bottom buttons appear at the menu’s upper and lower margins. For
scrolling, either touch one of these buttons, or (regardless where the selection
menu is located on the screen) use the rightmost rotary encoder for scrolling.
The selection can then be done by touching the desired menu item.
The optional Probel function group also appears on consoles not equipped
with the option, but cannot be expanded in such a case.
Some of the menu tree items are supported by OnAir 3000 only and will not
be displayed on an OnAir 1500/2500.

6.4.2 Undo / Exit / Save Config

Normally, configuration changes are immediately executed. Configuration
changes may be undone step by step when touching Undo.
When touching the Exit button, the configuration page is left, and the configu-
ration changes are used temporarily, just for the current session. This means
that the configuration changes will be reset once the console is switched off
and on again.
If the configuration changes should become part of the startup configura-
tion of the console – which means that the changes will be permanent, even
if the console is switched off and on again – then touch the Save Config
button before exiting the configuration. A message ‘Do you really want to
overwrite the startup configuration of the console?’ appears that has to
be confirmed by touching Yes.
Note: In case of a networked system, all system components (desks, SCores, etc.)
must be operative when saving a new configuration.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-9

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5 Configuration Procedure

6.5.1 Logical Inputs
For every logical input that shall be routable to an input channel strip, a physi-
cal input (or, if required, a master output or, if required and configured, a tie
line) has to be defined. For tie line configuration refer to the service manual.

Basic Label This is the channel label that is normally displayed in the channel strip and
in the GUI if this input is routed. The label may have up to eight characters.
When touching, for example, the upper DVD 1 button – i.e., the label of
Logical In 6 – a keyboard for editing the channel label appears. At the top
of the keyboard the current channel label is displayed. For editing, just type
the desired label name; please note that the screen keyboard always appears
with Caps Lock active. Once finished, touch Enter. If the current label is
ok and should be retained, then touch ESC instead. Please note that Save
Config must be touched in order to permanently save your edits, as indicated
in chapter 6.4.2.

Label (read only) This is the label actually displayed in the channel strip and in the GUI; nor-
mally, this corresponds to the Basic Label mentioned above. However, it
may be temporarily overwritten by I/O sharing, label import from an external
router control system (VSM) via Pro-Bel, a caller name imported from the
Call Management System (CMS), or during CAB operation via the Monitora
protocol. It is marked ‘(read only)’ since it cannot be modified manually here.

6-10 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Alias The alias label is a convenient feature for transferring snapshots between
different consoles, e.g. in A/B desk operation or for I/O sharing in networked
systems. When loading an imported snapshot, the data of the input with the
alias label ‘DJ MIC’ are loaded to the same channel strip, and also have the
same channel settings.
An alias label may be renamed in the same way as the input label described
before; it may consist of up to eight characters as well. For standalone sys-
tems, the default alias labels need, of course, not be changed.
Input Format Defines the audio format of the logical input. Selections: Stereo, Mono, or
5.1. The format selected here will be automatically assigned to the console
channel to which this logical input is routed.
OnAir 1500/2500: 5.1-channel inputs not supported.
OnAir 3000: 5.1-channel support optional.
Source (Left), Source Right... Source (Left) defines the physical audio input that is used to establish the
left (or mono) channel for the logical input. Source Right defines the physi-
cal audio input that is used to establish the right channel for a logical stereo
input. If the Input Format is set to Mono, no second source is used; when
changing Input Format from Stereo to Mono, a second source that already
has been defined will be grayed-out. If a surround source is defined, the
remaining sources (Source Center, Source LFE, etc.) must be assigned to
physical inputs as well, and Input Format must be set to 5.1. Alternatively,
if a stereo or 5.1-channel master output is selected, it is sufficient to define
Source (Left) only.
OnAir 1500/2500: 5.1-channel inputs not supported.
OnAir 3000: 5.1-channel support optional.
After touching one of the Source fields, first a list appears for selecting either
a source of the local system (Local Source), or, if I/O sharing is enabled, a
shared source of a neighbor system (Net Source), or none (-).

After having selected Local Source, a list appears for selecting in which
frame (i.e. from the internal SCore frame Int, from additional external D21m
Ext..., or stagebox frames StageBox..., master outputs MasterOuts, or none
(-) the desired input card is located.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-11

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Then a list for selection of the desired physical input appears . It can be
scrolled up and down with the rightmost rotary encoder or the navigation but-
tons at its upper and lower margins. However, when using a Remote Config
Tool running under Windows XP, the navigation buttons are replaced by a
vertical scrollbar.
Indication example: Frame (Int = internal I/O cards in SCore frame; Ext # =
additional, external D21m frame; StageBox # = D21m frame in stagebox),
Slot #, Card type, and Input # (e.g. Int, Slot 1, AES, Ch. 1), or ‘-’ (if no
physical input is assigned to the logical input).
If more sources are assigned to a physical input than are defined by the Input
Format field (e.g. an additional right source for a mono input), these sources
will be displayed in gray.
An external frame or a stage box may have a name different from the default
name, depending on what name was given to the D21m hub or stage box
during their configuration.

If, on the other hand, a shared Net Source has been selected, first a systems
dialog list appears, showing the available I/O sharing-enabled systems that
also have physical connections defined.
Since all sources consumed by one I/O sharing input need to be from the same

system, this systems dialog only appears when defining the first source.

Now, select a source group from the desired I/O sharing producer system.

After that, the available logical inputs of the producer system are listed for
selection.
A format dialog appears in case of a Source (Left); for the further sources
it appears only if the selected source provides more than one signal.

At last, the connection is selected. Automatic only appears if Source (Left)

was selected first; then the remaining sources are filled in automatically. The
list also offers buttons for selecting individual mono signal legs for every
single source.

Line / Mic Changes the view of the channel page in such a way that only the parameters
corresponding to the input type are displayed. Selections: Line or Mic. If Mic
is selected, remote control of the mic preamplifier is automatically enabled.

6-12 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Mic Clip Limiter Since SW V3.0, the mic clip limiter is activated here instead of on the main
screen. It is only available for local sources; in case of a net source it is dis-
played in gray. Selections: On or Off.
Input Location This parameter is used for the monitoring dim/cut (mute) function. Selections:
ControlRoom, Studio 1-3, none.
OnAir 1500/2500: Studios 1 and 3 not supported.
Signaling Source This parameter is used for activating the red light indication in the location
defined by the Input Location parameter of the current channel. Selections:
On or Off.
OnAir 1500/2500: Studios 1 and 3 not supported.
TBMicCut Enable Since SW V3.2, this function is configurable per logical input instead of for
the whole console at once.
If a microphone different from the internal TB mic is used for talkback, the
default selection (On) cuts this microphone’s signal from the input channel to
which it is routed as long as it is used for talkback. For special applications,
this function may be canceled when configuring Off.
Audition Bus With this parameter the contribution of the current input to the audition bus
is set On or Off.
Timer Start If this parameter is set to On, the global and the input fader stopwatches are
started when the channel to which this logical input is routed is switched ON
and its fader is opened. For details on global and input fader stopwatches refer
to chapter 5.7.
Fade In/Out Target Gain, Fade In/Out Time [ms]
If the fader should be controlled by a GP Input, four parameters must be set
here: Fade In Target Gain and Fade Out Target Gain (the default settings
are 0.0 dB and Mute, resp.), and Fade In Time and Fade Out Time (can be
set between 0 and 20’000 ms, i.e. 20 s, in millisecond steps with the pop-up
keyboard; default settings for both Fade In Time and Fade Out Time are
1000 ms = 1 s). For details on GPIO settings refer to chapter 6.5.26.
NX-Control / TB Destination Selects the owner that controls the N–X send level, or talkback to N–X, pro-
vided that the Joker Function Name (below) is set to TALK; at the same
time, the possibility to send back the own signal is disabled.
OnAir 1500/2500: Joker key is not supported by the default configuration.
I/O Sharing Net Mode Logical connections may either be defined as Static (permanently reserved
for a certain signal) or Dynamic (default; used by the system only as long as
required, which is more economical).
Codec Return Output * Specifies the patch output to which the codec’s input is connected.
• In case of a logical input (net source is 0), the Config Tool provides a list
of all local logical and patch outputs.
• In case of a net logical input (net source different from 0), the Config Tool
provides a list of all logical and patch outputs of that net source.
Codec Return Source * Specifies the source that is connected to the patch output when the (net) logi-
cal input is assigned to a fader.
• In case of a logical input (net source is 0), the Config Tool provides a list
of all local N–X buses.
• In case of a net logical input (net source different from 0), the Config Tool
provides a list of all net patch inputs on the system of that net source that
are consuming an N–X send from the local system.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-13

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Codec Return Activation * Specifies the way in which the return line is connected to the patch output
when the (net) logical input is assigned to a fader. Available selections: Con-
nect Never, Connect If Not In Use, Connect Always.
* For details on codec management refer to chapters 5.13 and 6.5.21.
Joker Function Name Basically, all corresponding keys in the fader strip have the same function
throughout the whole console. However, for some functions of certain input
sources this doesn’t make sense (such as talkback to a CD player). For this
reason, one exception from this rule may be configured that will then be
source-related, i.e., linked to a particular source, and that will also be con-
sidered once this source should be re-routed to a different channel strip. This
function key is called the ‘Joker’ key.
Currently, the following functions may be selected for the Joker key: TALK
(talkback function), LOC/RDY (locate/ready function), PFL/TALK (acti-
vates PFL and talkback simultaneously), PFL/LOC (for pre-listening e.g.
to a CD player parked at a cue point; when releasing the key, the player
automatically re-locates to the same cue point), TALK/READY (talkback
function with additional ready indication controlled by a GPInput), USR1/2
(user keys) or blank (no function).
OnAir 1500/2500: Joker key is not supported by the default configuration.
With SW V2.1 and later, this parameter is used to assign a destination ID of
External Router Destination
an external router output to the logical input; this is used for importing and
displaying labels from the VSM router control system as well as for control-
ling the router.
Selection: - (none) or 0-1023. The default assignment is 1:1, i.e. logical input
1 corresponds to destination ID 1.
In addition, a Facility ID must be entered in the UserGUI - Settings con-
figuration page (refer to chapter 6.5.33.1), together with the corresponding
settings in the ProBel.xml and probel_contr_ext.ini files.
With SW V2.1 and later, the console can communicate commands and status
External CMS Fader
messages with the Studer Call Management System (CMS) via TCP/IP.
Selection: - (none) or 1-16.
In addition, a Facility ID must be entered in the UserGUI - Settings con-
figuration page (refer to chapter 6.5.33.1), together with the corresponding
settings in the cms_contr_ext.ini file.
CLEAR Sources The top left CLEAR Sources field is colored brighter than the others; it can
be used to clear all configured sources. If it is touched, clearing the sources
has to be confirmed in the following dialog box:

In case that all configured sources should have been cleared inadvertently,
and the current configuration has not been saved yet, they can be restored
step by step when touching the Undo button, as mentioned in chapter 6.4.2.

6-14 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.2 Logical Outputs

For every physical output that should be accessible in the output routing page,
a logical output has to be defined.

Label This is the string displayed in the output routing page. The label may have
up to eight characters and is defined as described in chapter 6.5.1.
Format Defines the audio format of the logical output. Selections: Stereo, Mono,
or 5.1. All stereo buses, such as the masters, the AUX buses, and the N–X
buses may be assigned to a physical stereo and mono output at a time. In
the example above, the PRG output has its stereo format output (labeled ST
PRG) on Logical Out 1 and its mono format output (M PRG) on Logical
Out 2.
Left Core Out defines the physical audio output used to establish the left
Left / Right / ... Core Out
(or mono) channel for the logical output. Right / Center / LFE... Core Out
define the physical audio outputs used to establish the remaining channels
for the logical output, depending on the Format definition (below).
If more core outputs are assigned to a physical output than defined by the
Format field (e.g. an additional right output for a physical mono output), the
selection will be displayed in gray.
Indication: Frame (Int = internal I/O cards in SCore frame; Ext # = additional,
external D21m frames; Stagebox # = D21m frame in stagebox), Slot #, Card
type, and Output # (e.g. Int, Slot 2, Line Out, Ch. 2), or ‘–’ (if no physical
output is assigned to the logical output).
CLEAR Core Outs The top left CLEAR Core Outs field is colored brighter than the others; it can
be used to clear all configured core outputs at once. If it is touched, clearing
the core outputs has to be confirmed. In case that all configured core outputs
should have been cleared inadvertently and the current configuration has not
been saved yet, they can be restored step by step when touching the Undo
button, as mentioned in chapter 6.4.2.
OnAir 1500/2500: 5.1-channel outputs are not supported.
OnAir 3000: 5.1-channel outputs are optional.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-15

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.3 Fixed Outputs

Fixed outputs are used for dedicated outputs, such as monitoring outputs;
for them, the same applies as is said in chapter 6.5.2 above, except that the
Format parameter is read only and cannot be set.

6.5.4 Fixed Out Meter

The two dedicated metering outputs automatically follow the main screen
meters. These outputs may be used to connect external level meters and are
defined here. The same applies as is said in chapter 6.5.2 above, except that
the Format parameter is read only. For systems with primary/secondary desk
configuration, up to four meter outputs can be configured (two per desk).
OnAir 1500/2500: OnAir 1500/2500 only support stereo metering outputs. These are configu-
rable for the OnAir 1500/2500 as well, but will not be used by default.

6-16 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.5 Insert Sends

For each of the eight inserts available in the digital domain, a send/return pair
may be configured. For the insert sends, the same applies as is said in chapter
6.5.2 above, except that no Format parameter is available here.
Please note that the insert returns are configured on the Insert Returns page

(refer to chapter 6.5.6).

6.5.6 Insert Returns

Basic Label / Label The labels are copied from the Insert Sends page (chapter 6.5.5) and cannot
be edited here. They are displayed in the output routing page.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-17

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Source Left / Source Right Source Left and Right define the physical audio inputs used to establish the
insert return.
After touching the Source... field, a list appears for selection of the SCore,
external D21m, or stagebox frame, or ‘-’. Then a list for selection of the
desired physical input is displayed. It can be scrolled up and down with the
navigation buttons at its upper and lower margins, or with the rightmost rotary
encoder.
Indication: Frame (Int = internal I/O cards in SCore frame; Ext # = additional,
external D21m frame; Stagebox # = D21m frame in stagebox), Slot #, Card
type, and Input # (e.g. Ext 1, Slot 7, AES, Ch. 3), or ‘-’ (if no physical input
is assigned to the logical input).

With SW V2.1 and later, this parameter is used to assign a destination ID of

External Router Destination
an external router output to the insert return; this is used for importing and
displaying labels from the external router control system as well as for con-
trolling the router.
Selection: - (none) or 0-1023. The default assignment is 1:1, i.e. logical input
1 corresponds to destination ID 1.
In addition, a Facility ID must be entered in the UserGUI - Settings con-
figuration page (refer to chapter 6.5.33.1), together with the corresponding
settings in the ProBel.xml and probel_contr_ext.ini files.

6.5.7 Encoder Sends (supported by OnAir 3000 only)

On this page the outputs to an external surround decoder are defined. Proceed
according to chapter 6.5.2.

6-18 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.8 Encoder Returns (supported by OnAir 3000 only)

On this page the inputs from an external surround decoder are defined. Pro­
ceed according to chapter 6.5.6.

6.5.9 Patch Inputs (supported by OnAir 3000 only)

Basic Label / Label (read only) This are the strings displayed in the output routing page. They may have up
to eight characters and are defined as described in chapter 6.5.1.

Input Format Defines the audio format of the logical input. Selections: Stereo, Mono, or
5.1. The format selected here will be automatically assigned to the console
channel to which this logical input is routed.
OnAir 3000: 5.1-channel support optional.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-19

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Source (Left), Source Right... These fields define the physical audio inputs that are used to establish the
channels for the logical input. For details refer to chapter 6.5.1.

I/O Sharing Net Mode Logical connections may either be defined as Static (permanently reserved
for a certain signal) or Dynamic (default; used by the system only as long as
required, which is more economical).

With SW V2.1 and later, this parameter is used to assign a destination ID of

External Router Destination
an external router output to the patch input; this is used for importing and
displaying labels from the external router control system as well as for con-
trolling the router.
Selection: - (none) or 0-1023. The default assignment is 1:1, i.e. logical input
1 corresponds to destination ID 1.
In addition, a Facility ID must be entered in the UserGUI - Settings con-
figuration page (refer to chapter 6.5.33.1), together with the corresponding
settings in the ProBel.xml and probel_contr_ext.ini files.

6.5.10 Patch Outputs (supported by OnAir 3000 only)

Label This is the string displayed in the output routing page. It may have up to eight
characters and is defined as described in chapter 6.5.1.

Format Defines the audio format of the logical output. Selections: Stereo, Mono, or
5.1.
OnAir 3000: 5.1-channel support optional.

Left Core Out defines the physical audio output used to establish the left
Left / Right / ... Core Out
(or mono) channel for the patch output. Right / Center / LFE... Core Out
define the physical audio outputs used to establish the remaining channels
for the patch output, depending on the Format definition (below).
If more core outputs are assigned to a physical output than defined by the
Format field (e.g. an additional right output for a physical mono output), they
will be displayed in gray.

6-20 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.11 Masters

The parameters for the summing (master) outputs are set here. Not all param-
eters are available for all of the masters; the audition output, e.g., only has a
label.

Label This is the string displayed in the routing output page. The label may have
up to eight characters and is defined as described in chapter 6.5.1.

OnAir Relevant For each of the main master outputs, it is configured here whether it contrib-
utes to the On Air indication or not. The On Air indication is active only if
at least one channel is switched ON, has the its fader open and is assigned to
an active main master. Selections: On / Off.

Fade In/Out Target Gain, Fade In/Out Time [ms]

If the fader should be controlled by a GP Input, four parameters must be set
here: Fade In Target Gain and Fade Out Target Gain (the default settings
are 0.0 dB and Mute, resp.), and Fade In Time and Fade Out Time (can be
set between 0 and 20’000 ms, i.e. 20 s, in millisecond steps with the pop-up
keyboard; default settings for both Fade In Time and Fade Out Time are
1000 ms = 1 s). For details on GPIO settings refer to chapter 6.5.26.

(Output) Limiter Each of the tree main output buses features a transmission limiter that can be
configured here. Setting: On / Off.

(Outp.) Limiter Threshold (dBFS) The output limiter’s threshold can be set in a range of 0 to –48 dBFS in steps
of 1 dB.
Note: This indication is always referenced to full scale modulation (FS), regard-
less of the currently selected headroom – which means that, if a headroom of
9 dB is set and limiting to 0 dB on the PPM level meters is desired, a limiter
threshold of –9 dBFS must be selected.

(Output) Limiter Release Time The output limiter’s release time can be set in 13 steps in a range of 1 ms
(millisecond) to 1 s.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-21

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Joker Function Name Basically, all corresponding keys in the fader strip have the same function
throughout the whole console. For this reason, one exception from this rule
may be configured that will then be source- or master-related, i.e., linked to a
particular source or master, and that will also be considered once this master
should be re-routed to a different channel strip. This function key is called
the ‘Joker’ key.
Currently, the following functions may be selected for the Joker key: TALK
Jokerction), LOC/RDY (locate/ready function), PFL/TALK (activates PFL
and talkback simultaneously), PFL/LOC (for pre-listening e.g. to a CD player
parked at a cue point; when releasing the key, the player re-locates to the same
cue point), TALK/READY (talkback function with additional ready indica-
tion controlled by a GPInput) , USR1/2 (user keys) or blank (no function).
OnAir 1500/2500: The Joker key is not supported by the default configuration.

Subgroup Mode Sub-group masters can be switched over to VCA masters here (selections:
Subgroup or VCA).
OnAir 1500/2500: Neither sub-groups nor VCA masters supported.

6.5.12 Extern PFLs

For the external PFL inputs used for pre-listening from a CAB system, the
same parameters can be set as described in chapter 6.5.10, except that the
Format can be selected only from Mono or Stereo, and no more than two
Sources can be defined.

6-22 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.13 Extern Mon Src

For the 16 external monitor sources (inputs), the same parameters can be set
as for the patch inputs; refer to chapter 6.5.9.

6.5.14 Settings

On this page global parameters valid throughout the whole console are set.

Broadcast PFL Two different versions of this function are available. Selections: PFL Cut
on channel active, the PFL audio signal of a channel is cut from the PFL
bus while the channel is active, but the PFL function remains active ‘in the
background’; or PFL Off on channel active, the PFL function is cancelled
from a channel becoming active; or Nothing.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-23

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Cue/not PFL The function that can be selected here replaces the standard PFL mode; it is
sometimes also referred to as ‘Positional Solo’, i.e., listening after the channel
panner. Selections: On / Off.

Headroom The console-internal headroom is set here; the default setting is 9 dB. This
means that the peak level meters (i.e. PPM DIN, Nordic Analog and Nordic
Digital) indicate 0 at an internal audio level of –9 dBFS (or +9 dB at an internal
audio level of 0 dBFS).
The default sensitivity of the analog line inputs is such that an input level of
+6 dBu results in an internal audio level of –9 dBFS and hence in a level meter
indication of 0, if overall gain is set to 0 dB.
If a different console headroom setting is desired, it can be set in a range of
0 to 20 dB in steps of 1 dB.
The line input sensitivity of analog line I/O cards may be fine-adjusted with
trimmer potentiometers on the card (refer to the D21m manual).

Selects PPM DIN (peak program meter), Nordic Analog, Nordic Digital, VU
Main Meter Mode
Standard, British Standard or Digital FS Meter (full scale) characteristics
for the main screen bar graph meters. The meter scales on the main screen
automatically match the selected characteristics and headroom. Additional
red clipping indicators are provided above the bargraphs.

If British Standard meters are configured, additional selections are provided
by a touch within the meter area: Either L/R (in red/green) or M/S (mid/
side, i.e. the sum of and the difference between the two channels; in white/
yellow). For the M/S setting, an additional 20 dB boost for the S bargraph
can be selected as well. This is indicated either by L and R, or by M and S
(or M/S+20) below the bargraph meters. Additional red clipping indicators
are provided above the bargraphs.
The Digital FS Meter always displays the current level with reference to full
scale modulation (0 dBFS). The current headroom setting defines the transition
point from the green to the red part of the bargraph meters. Additional red
clipping indicators are provided above the bargraphs.

PPM DIN Nordic Analog Nordic Digital VU Standard British Standard Digital FS Meter

Meter Integration Time The meter integration time, i.e. the rise time, can be set here to 0, 1, 5, and
10 ms (milliseconds), the default value is 10 ms. If VU Standard or British
Standard is selected, the integration time is fixed, and the Meter Integration
Time field is grayed out.

6-24 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

VU Meter Lead The default VU meter lead is 4 dB; it can be adjusted in steps of 2 dB within
a range of 0 to 10 dB.

British Standard Peak Audio Level Can be selected in steps of 1 dB within a range of –48 to 0 dBFS (default value:
–10 dBFS.

British Standard M/S Mode Level reduction of the M meter can be selected from –3 or –6 dB (default
value: –3 dB.

ChannelOn follows FaderOpen If active, this function automatically switches a channel ON while its fader
is open. Selections: On or Off.

Gen. off for on-air channels If set to On, this function disables the GEN button on the channel pages for
all channels currently being on-air.

Reset Timer On Fader Close If set to On, cumulative time measurement is selected for the input fader
stopwatches; a running stopwatch is stopped by switching the channel OFF;
it is reset only when the fader is closed. Also refer to chapter 5.7.

Channel TB Selections: Nothing, or TB Off on Channel Active. If the latter is selected,

talkback to a channel currently being active is inhibited.

5.1 to Stereo Mixdown... Sets the contribution level of surround and center channels for the internal
stereo downmix, as well as the overall level.
Surround Level Adjustable in steps of 1 dB between 0 and –10 dB; default setting: –3 dB.
Center Level Adjustable in steps of 1 dB between 0 and –10 dB; default setting: –3 dB.
Trim Level Adjustable in steps of 1 dB between 0 and –10 dB; default setting: 0 dB.
OnAir 1500/2500: 5.1-channel outputs not supported.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-25

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.15 System Time

On this page, all settings for operation with the internal real-time clock or an
external time reference signal are made.
Time / Date The system time and date may be set either on this page or on the Admin
- Date Time page. When touching one of these fields, a keyboard pops up;
enter the desired time or date as described in chapter 6.5.1. The colons in the
Time field can be entered by using the decimal point button.
Time Sync Ref The type of external time reference signal can be selected here from: None,
MONITORA (time information according to the Monitora protocol, e.g. from
a Studer DigiMedia CAB system), Ext.Time Sync*, or NTP (if the console
has access to an internet time server over a network). If None is selected, the
console operates on its own, internal real-time clock.
OnAir 1500/2500: Ext.Time Sync is not supported by the OnAir 1500/2500 console.
* The Ext. Time Sync button is displayed only if an optional Time Sync card
is installed and connected to a time receiver; selection of the input signal
format is performed with DIP switches on the card (refer to OnAir 3000
service instructions, chapter 3). The optional Time Sync card can be used
with Compact SCore systems and, since SW V3.1, with SCore Live systems
as well. In the latter case, it must be installed in a custom 19”/1U frame and
linked to the COM2 serial port of the SCore Live frame.
NTP Time Server If NTP has been selected above, the NTP time server’s web address is set
here. When touching this button, a keyboard appears for entering the address.
Proceed according to the corresponding paragraph in chapter 6.5.1.
For SW V3.0 and up, IP addresses are supported for defining the NTP time
server as well.
Time Zone Enter your local time zone here. In the example above, the (GMT +01:00)
Amsterdam/Berlin/Bern/Rome/Stockholm/Vienna time zone is selected.
Automatic Daylight Saving Automatic daylight saving time for the internal watch can be activated here,
according to the selected time zone; this is independent from the current
external time sync reference.

6-26 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.16 User Functions

User Functions can be assigned as arguments for the ‘UserLED’ GPI func-
tion and for the ‘UserKey’ GPO function.
This page is used to enter labels for up to 20 user functions. The labels may
have up to eight characters and are defined as described in chapter 6.5.1.

6.5.17 Strip Channels

This page is used for configuring Virtual channels, if e.g. master faders are
desired on the desk. No inputs can be routed then to these channels.
Virtual channels do not consume any DSP power; in cases where DSP power
is limited, virtual channels may be defined for outputs.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-27

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.18 Partial Output Routing

Up to 1024 partial output routing presets may be preconfigured in order to be
activated either from the Snap - Route page, or by general purpose inputs
(GPI) and/or desk keys. Partial output routings can be configured here.

Label Enter the partial output routing snapshot’s label here, as described in chapter
6.5.1.

Use Enable Key For SW V3.1 and up, partial output routing snapshot recall can be protected
by an additional ENABLE desk key or a GPI function (if a a special, external
key is desired for safety reasons, e.g. for transmission control). If selecting
Yes, the additional ENABLE desk key has to be used for recalling a partial
output routing. Default setting: No.
Source Field When touching an empty Source field, a list pops up that allows selecting
from sev­er­al source groups first (Logical Inputs, Direct Out PP (pre-pro-
cessing), Direct Out AP (after processing), Channel Out, Patch Inputs,
Master Outputs, or DELETE). When touching one of these fields, a second
list appears, offering the available sources from the selected group. DELETE
also clears the Output field (see below).
Output Field After selecting a source, touch an empty Output field. Again a list pops up
where the desired output group (Logical Outputs, Patch Outputs) can be
selected from. When touching one of these fields, a second list appears, offer-
ing the available outputs from the selected group.
Delete In order to delete a routing preconfiguration, touch either the source or the
output field and select DELETE from the pop-up list.
Remote Activation For SW V3.0 and up, partial output routings configured on one system can
be recalled from any other OnAir console within the same network, if using
desk keys of the remote console. Please note that this feature is not available
when using the remote console’s Snapshot page or one of its GP inputs.

6-28 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.19 Selections
‘Selections’ is a special section that allows selecting various I/O, insert, and
meter parameters.

6.5.19.1 Inp Grps

This page defines the grouping of inputs when touching the Input Selection
field on the CHAN - Input page, or in the alphanumeric display in the fader
strip if the INP (input) function is selected on the fader assign module while
the fader strip rotary encoder is touched. In addition, each input group can
be given a label.

Ext Router Grp Defines whether the current input group is internal (No) or external (2-Wire:
External input, 4-Wire: External line). For details of external router control
refer to chapter 5.13.
1, 2, 3... Assign inputs to the current input group; since the same input label may exist
more than once – e.g. in A/B desk configurations – the input ID is displayed
together with the input label, as shown below.
First, a list appears for selecting what to do with the highlighted item; in order
to delete all entries from a column, select DELETE ALL.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-29

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

When touching INSERT, a list of all available inputs appears. Navigation
within this list depends on whether you are currently working at the console
or with the Remote Console application on a PC; in the former case, you can
either use the Λ/Page Up/Top or V/Page Down/Bottom buttons or the
right-most rotary encoder, in the latter case just use the scrollbar at the right-
hand edge of the list. For selecting several items at once, first touch SELECT
MULTIPLE, then simply touch the desired items followed by APPLY, or, on
a PC, click on them while the  (Shift) or Ctrl key is pressed, followed by a
click on APPLY.

6-30 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.19.2 Patch Grps (supported by OnAir 3000 only)

This page defines the assignment of patch inputs to patch groups that are
displayed in the ROUT - Output page. Selection is done as described in
chapter 6.5.19.1. In addition, each patch group can be given a label.

6.5.19.3 Master Outs

This page defines the order in which the Master Outputs are displayed in the
(horizontal) row on the ROUT - Output page, and in the (vertical) column
on the ROUT - Input page. Selection is done as described in chapter 6.5.19.1.
The definitions made here are used for strip assignment (Strip­Assign, chapter
6.5.19.6), and output routing (OutRouting, chapter 6.5.19.7) configurations.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-31

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.19.4 Master Faders

This page defines the summing buses and groups that can be assigned to a
fader. Selection is done as described in chapter 6.5.19.1.

6.5.19.5 Master Ins

This page defines the summing buses and groups to which an insert can be
assigned. Selection is done as described in chapter 6.5.19.1.

6-32 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.19.6 Strip Assign

This page defines the presentation of the ROUT - Input page.

Input Routing Column shows the input groups displayed in the ROUT - Input page when touching
the Select Group field.

Desk Group 1-8 Columns shows the input groups displayed in the Chan - Input page when touching
the Input Selection button, or in the alphanumeric display in the fader strip
if the INP (input) function is selected on the fader assign module while the
fader strip rotary encoder is touched.
Selection is done as described in chapter 6.5.19.1.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-33

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.19.7 Out Routing

This page defines the presentation of the ROUT - Output page when touch-
ing the Select Group field, and the logical outputs displayed in the rows on
the ROUT - Output page. Since the same output label may exist more than
once – e.g. in A/B desk configurations – the output ID is displayed together
with the output label in the selection list, as shown above. Selection is done
as described in chapter 6.5.19.1.

6.5.19.8 Inserts

This page defines the presentation of the ROUT - Insert page, using the set-
tings made in Inp Grps (chapter 6.5.19.1), and Master Ins (chapter 6.5.19.5).
Selection is done as described in chapter 6.5.19.1.

6-34 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.19.9 Meter Src

For both level meters on the main screen as well as for the two optional,
external meters, a list of inputs may be defined for selection with the label
button located below the corresponding meter on the main screen. Selection
is done as described in chapter 6.5.19.1.

6.5.19.10 Ducking Key Inputs (supported by OnAir 3000 only)

This page allows selecting the keying signals for the automatic ducker. Selec-
tion is done as described in chapter 6.5.19.1.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-35

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.20 I/O Sharing (Option)

I/O sharing allows accessing any signal (input, master, PFL, monitoring, etc.)
of one system by another one within the same controller network. When con-
necting several systems, some additional things must be considered during
configuration:
• Hard-wired (‘physical’) connections between the SCores (MADI, ADAT,
AES/EBU, or even analog) must be established.
• These physical connections must be defined within in the system, because
the system just needs to know which outputs and inputs are linked through
hard-wired connections. This is performed in the Config Tool of the target
system (see chapter 6.5.20.2).
• Logical connections may either be defined as static (i.e. permanently
reserved for a certain signal) or dynamic (i.e. used by the system only as
long as required, which is more economical).
• A simple point-to-point configuration called ‘single-step I/O sharing’ (as
shown in the first example below) only needs physical connections to be
defined (see chapter 6.5.20.2).
• In larger, ‘two-step I/O sharing’ configurations, Net inputs represent
objects in the star system that provide signals (e.g. Logical Input A) from
the source system to the target systems connected to the star system, as
shown in the second example below; Net inputs are defined according to
chapter 6.5.20.3.
• To make things easier :-) different systems may act as star system simulta-
neously; in the second example below, Target System 3 also acts as a Star
System by providing the Logical Input B of the (pale) Source System 7
to Star System 2 – which, in this case, acts just as another Target System.
In other words: Each system may be Net Source, Star, and Net Consumer
system at the same time.

Glossary: Physical Connection Hard-wired connection between two SCores; for these, MADI, ADAT, AES/
EBU, or even analog connections may be used.
Logical Connection Connection between two SCores running on a hard-wired Physical Con-
nection; may be defined as static (permanently reserved) or dynamic (used
by the system only as long as required). For Net Inputs, only static Logical
Connections are allowed.
Logical Input The term Logical Input not only comprises the audio signal of this input but
also its signal processing parameters, such as EQ, filters, dynamics, etc.
Net Input Object on the Star System that is provided to other systems connected to the
Star System.
Net Source Object on the Source System that has specified a local source (e.g. input,
master, external PFL input, monitoring source, etc.).
Net Consumer Object on the Target system to which a mono or stereo signal must be assigned
(e.g. input, master, external PFL input, external monitoring source, etc.).
Net Consumer Active A Net Consumer is called active as long as it is using the allocated Net Source.
Consumer Type: is active if the corresponding Net Consumer is:
assigned to a channel strip, or selected as a monitoring
Net Logical Input source, or assigned to a logical output via output routing
Net Ext. Monitoring selected as a monitoring source
Source
Net Ext. PFL switched to at least one PFL bus
Net Talkback switched to at least one talkback destination

6-36 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Notes: Processing parameters (such as EQ, filters, dynamics, panorama/bal-

ance, timer start, etc.) of Net inputs are linked to the target system when
defining the logical connection; however, they may be individually modi-
fied once the connection is established, and saved in snapshots, too.
Signaling parameters of Net inputs, such as red-light signals and dim/cut of
the monitoring speakers for microphone inputs, are automatically linked to
the parameters of the target system.

In the example below, a simple configuration shows two SCores in a point-to-

point arrangement. The left-hand system can access the output of CODEC1,
and the right-hand system also sees the MIC1 signal thanks to the physical
and logical connections between them.

In the following example, a star configuration of six SCores (Systems 1-6)

is shown, where systems 2-6 may access the logical input of source system
1 through dynamic logical connections, because it is fed to a net input of star
system 2 through a static logical connection.

Notes:
In order to benefit from the I/O sharing option, at least two consoles with
one SCore each are required. To activate this mode, a dongle chip or the ‘I/O
sharing option’ license key must be inserted on every SCore Audio Clock
Card (1.943.330.xx) within the system. If these dongles are not installed, the
I/O sharing configuration is disabled.
I/O sharing configuration is always performed on the target system.


I/O sharing configuration data are saved on the target system only.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-37

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.20.1 Distributed Control

Starting with SW V2.1, the distributed control feature has been introduced for
the Fader Start, On Master, Locate, and Ready control functions. This allows
using a GP output or input on a Net Producer system as a control output or
input for one or several Net Consumer system(s) without additional wiring.

Distributed Control:
Fader Start (without PFL) System A (Net Producer)
Logical Input A1
Channel
ON AND Fader
Start
System B (Net Consumer) OR Fader Start

GPO
Command
Logical Input B5 (Net Producer: A1)
Channel Fader
Open Audio
ON AND Fader
Start
"Distributed Ctrl"

Fader
Open Audio

In the example shown above, a playback source such as a CD player has its
fader start control input connected to one of the GPOs of Net Producer System
A, and its audio output is connected to Logical Input A1 of System A.
Net Consumer System B can access the same audio signal on its Logical
Input B5. If the corresponding channel on System B is on and this channel’s
fader is open, the fader start command is sent to Logical Input A1 of System
A, where it is OR-linked with System A’s internal fader start command. The
fader start command goes to the CD player, regardless whether it has been
generated by System A (to which the CD player is directly connected), by
the remote System B, or by any other remote system connected to the same
I/O sharing network and consuming the Logical Input A1 of System A.
Note: There exists a second fader start function ‘with PFL’ – where in each channel
is an additional OR link; in this case, the fader start output is active if Fader
Start is active or if PFL is active, or both.

The same applies for all functions listed below:

Function Parameter Used by SW Ver.
Signaling Source, Channel
Red Light CR GPO: Red Light CR 2.0
ON Master of all logical inputs in CR
Signaling Source, Channel
Red Light St1 GPO: Red Light St1 2.0
ON Master of all log. inputs in St1
Signaling Source, Channel
Red Light St2 GPO: Red Light St2 2.0
ON Master of all log. inputs in St2
Signaling Source, Channel
Red Light St3 GPO: Red Light St3 2.0
ON Master of all log. inputs in St3
Signaling Source,
Red Light Input GPO: Red Light Input 2.0
Channel ON Master
Channel ON Master Channel ON Master GPO: ON Master 2.1
Channel on/off, Fader Open, GPO: Fader Start;
Fader Start 2.1
PFL on/off Fader Start with PFL
GPI: Mic Mute
Mic Mute Mic Mute 2.0
GPO: Mic Mute Active
Remote TB Source Active (linked to Internal TB Mic Cut
TB Mic Cut 2.0
Local TB Source Active) function
Ready Ready GPI: Ready 2.1
Locate Locate GPO: Locate 2.1

6-38 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.20.2 Define Physical Connections

Using the Config Tool on the target system, select I/O Sharing - Physical
Connections and select an input with the Horizontal rotary encoder (HD
Link In 1 in the example below). Then define a source for it by first touching
the Source field that is, in our case, still empty (indicated by a ‘-’ dash).

A pop-up menu lists the names of all systems (in our case, System27 and
Star DEMO 5OG) to select from, as shown above. After having selected
System27, all its I/O frames (Int and, if available, Ext) will be listed. In our
case, this is just one frame called System27, Int, as shown below.

After having selected an I/O frame, the labels of all available outputs are
displayed.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-39

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Note: The definition must represent the actual physical (hard-wired) connections
established by MADI, AES/EBU etc. wiring.

Select one of the outputs (System27, Int, Slot 8, AES, Ch. 1) to define the
physical connection. It is displayed afterwards in the corresponding Source
field, as shown below.

In order to save this physical connection, touch the Save Config button.
Clear a Physical Connection:
In order to clear a physical connection, remove the existing relation between
an input and an output of a neighboring system. Select the input the Source
parameter of which should be cleared and touch the ‘-’ field.

If the specified input is currently in use by a Net Input, the connection cannot
be cleared, and a user message is displayed.

6-40 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.20.3 Define Net Inputs

In two-step I/O sharing, Net Inputs must be defined in order to make a neigh-
boring Net Source available, e.g. on the Star DEMO 5OG system. Start the
Config Tool on the target system and select I/O Sharing - Net Inputs. When
selecting the Net Source parameter, the Config Tool shows a pop-up menu
listing the names of all systems that can be reached by physical connections.
Net Input connections are always static.

After having selected a system, the Net Source groups pop up. Select one of
them (e.g. Extern Monitoring Source).

Then a list of all possible Net Sources pops up (in our example, all external
monitoring sources available). Select one of them, e.g. OFF AIR.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-41

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

The label of the specified Net Source is copied to the Net Input, and audio will
be connected immediately. If there is any problem connecting to the source
system, the label indicates an asterisk (*), as shown below.

To save this Net Input definition, touch the Save Config button.
Release a Net Input:
To release a Net Input, remove the existing allocation to the Net Source of the
neighboring system. Select a Net Input and clear its Net Source parameter
by touching the ‘-’ field.

If the specified Net Input is currently in use (e.g., on-air or assigned to a fader
strip), it cannot be released, and a user message is displayed.

6-42 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.20.4 Define Net Consumer Groups / Net Consumers

These two pages are used for editing the different net consumer groups (above)
and the net consumers (below). Selection is done as described in chapter
6.5.19.1.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-43

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.21 Codec Management

6.5.21.1 Basics
Sharing of common codecs, either from independent systems with the I/O
sharing option, or from an A/B desk, is called codec management.
I/O Sharing The concept is explained on a dual, I/O sharing system; the goal is that a
codec connected to system A may also be used on system B.
System B (Net Consumer) System A (Net Producer)

N–X N–X

NetLI NetPI
PO

Codec
LI

• Two logical I/O sharing connections ( ) are required.
• The net logical input (NetLI) on system B consumes the logical input (LI)
from system A.
• A net patch input (NetPI) on system A consumes the N–X bus of system
B that is specified as N–X control of NetLI.
This allows system B sending any signal to the codec, as long as NetPI is
routed to the patch output (PO) connected to the codec’s input.
Both systems may ‘listen’ to the codec’s output at the same time, but only
one system can provide its N–X bus output to PO. In the output routing, the
source for PO is either the I/O sharing NetPI, or the local N–X bus assigned
to the producer system’s (local) LI.
The source for PI is usually controlled on the desk where LI or NetLI is locat-
ed. It may also be controlled from the Routing - Output page of system A
to which the codec is directly connected (MCR).
Note: A logical output (LO) could also be used instead of a patch output (PO) for
the connection to the codec’s input. However, since patch outputs are not part
of the output routing snapshot, they will not be affected by loading an output
routing snapshot on system A.

A/B desk In case of an A/B desk configuration, I/O sharing is not required. Both desks
may ‘listen’ to the codec’s output at the same time – logical input A (LI A)
on system A, and logical input B (LI B) on system B. Only one system can
provide its N–X bus output to the patch output (PO). In the output routing,
the source for PO is either the N–X B bus specified as N–X control in LI B,
or the N–X A bus assigned to LI A.
A/B System

N–X A N–X B
LI B
PO
Codec

LI A

6-44 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.21.2 Configuration
Configuration details of the I/O sharing option see chapter 6.5.20.

Step 1: System B (Net Consumer) System A (Net Producer)

N–X N–X

NetLI
PO

Codec
LI

The codec’s input must be mapped to a patch output (PO). The codec’s output
must be mapped to a logical input (LI) that is an N–X bus owner.
In case of I/O sharing, i.e. when another system shares the codec, a net logical
input is required that is an N–X bus owner as well.

Step 2: System B (Net Consumer) System A (Net Producer)

N–X N–X

NetLI NetPI
PO

Codec
LI

On the producer system A a net patch input (NetPI) must be created, consum-
ing the N–X bus associated with the net logical input (NetLI) of system B.

Step 3: System B (Net Consumer) System A (Net Producer)

N–X N–X

NetLI NetPI
PO

Codec
LI

Finally, for both the logical (LI) and the net logical (NetLI) inputs, the source
for the patch output (PO) must be specified. This is done in the Config Tool
on the Config - LogicalInputs page. The related parameters are:

Codec Return Output Specifies the patch output (PO) to which the codec’s input is connected.
• In case of a logical input (LI, net source is 0), the Config Tool provides a
list of all logical and patch outputs of system A.
• In case of a net logical input (NetLI, net source is different from 0), the
Config Tool provides a list of all logical and patch outputs of that net
source.

Codec Return Source Specifies the source that is connected to the patch output (PO) when the (net)
logical input is assigned to a fader.
• In case of a logical input (LI, net source is 0), the Config Tool provides a
list of all N–X buses of system A.
• In case of a net logical input (NetLI, net source is different from 0), the
Config Tool provides a list of all net patch inputs on system A of that net
source that consume an N–X send from system B.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-45

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Codec Return Activation Specifies the way in which the return line is connected to the patch output
when the (net) logical input is assigned to a fader. Available selections: Con-
nect Never, Connect If Not In Use, Connect Always.

6.5.21.3 Operation
Basically, if a codec input is assigned to a fader, the corresponding return line
(N–X) can be connected manually or automatically to the codec output of the
console. Different operating scenarios are possible, depending on the Codec
Return Activation mode mentioned above: Connect Never, Connect If Not
In Use, or Connect Always.
The RET LINE rotary function (on the fader or rotary assign module) is used
to assign a rotary encoder and its adjacent key to return line activation
mode; it allows manual switching between two- and four-wire connections.

2-Wire Connection When assigning the (net) logical codec input to a fader strip on the desk, no
return line is connected to the codec’s patch output (‘listen only’ mode). The
status is indicated by a dark key. This connection type is automatically
established if Codec Return Activation is set to Connect Never.
Return Line Unused However, if the return line is not used by another console already, a four-wire
connection can be established anyway by pressing the corresponding key;
the key will then be bright.
Return Line Used If the return line should already be in use, no connection is established upon
pressing the key, and the key will flash. When touching the corresponding
rotary knob, the 8-character display shows the name of the desk container
currently using the return line output. To ‘steal’ the return line connection,
turn the rotary knob until the display shows CONNECT, and press the
key again to confirm the action; the key will then be bright. This will take
away the return line from the other console and create a user warning on its
main screen as well as in the log file of the central log screen.
The return line is released either when pressing the key again, or when
removing the codec input from the fader strip.

Conditional 4-Wire Connection

When assigning the (net) logical codec input to a fader strip on the desk sur-
face, the return line is connected to the codec’s patch output if the return line
is not used by another console already. The key will then be bright. This
connection type is automatically established if the Codec Return Activation
is set to Connect If Not In Use.
Return Line Used If the return line should already be in use, no connection is established upon
pressing the key, and the key will flash. When touching the corresponding
rotary knob, the 8-character display shows the name of the desk container
currently using the return line output. To ‘steal’ the return line connection,
turn the rotary knob until the display shows CONNECT, and press the
key again to confirm the action; the key will then be bright. This will take
away the return line from the other console and create a user warning on its
main screen as well as in the log file of the central log screen.
The return line is released either when pressing the key again, or when
removing the codec input from the fader strip.

6-46 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Forced 4-Wire Connection When assigning the (net) logical codec input to a fader strip on the desk
surface, the return line is connected to the codec’s patch output immediately,
and the key will then be bright. This connection type is automatically
established if the Codec Return Activation is set to Connect Always.
If the return line should be used by another system already, it is automatically
taken away from the other system without further user action. A user warning
is created on the other system’s main screen and in the log file of the central
log screen.

Note: Codec return line control is currently not supported by the user GUI. Opera-
tion is possible with the hardware controls only, as described above. How-
ever, codec return lines may be remotely connected and disconnected in the
Routing - Output page of the producer system, i.e., the system to which the
codec is physically connected.

Producer System Status The three different return line control modes described above can, of course,
only work out properly if the producer system is operative. If this should not
be the case, the following restrictions must be considered:
• Codec return lines can be (automatically or manually) activated only while
the producer system is running.
• If the producer system shuts down, the status of all 4-wire connections is
forced to 2-wire connection.
• If the producer system starts up while a net logical input of the consumer
system is in 2-wire connection status, this status is retained.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-47

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.22 Monitoring
6.5.22.1 Settings

LSP Dim Level Allows setting the control room and studio loudspeaker dim level attenuation
in a range of 0 to 80 dB in steps of 1 dB.
TB Dim Level Allows setting the talkback dim level (attenuation of the program while talk-
back is active) in a range of 0 to 80 dB in steps of 1 dB.
PFL Speaker Dim Level Allows setting the PFL loudspeaker dim level (attenuation of the talkback/
PFL speaker while the TB mic is active) in a range of 0 to 80 dB in steps of
1 dB.
LSP Dim on outgoing TB Selects whether the CR and studio loudspeaker levels are attenuated (DIM) or
remain unchanged (NO DIM) as long as the talkback microphone is active.
LSP Dim on incoming TB Selects whether the CR and studio loudspeaker levels are attenuated (DIM)
or remain unchanged (NO DIM) as long as incoming talkback is active.
TB to Headphone Mode If talkback to the host’s headphones is active, this parameter allows selection
of both or only one of his headphone’s channels. Selections: TB to both, TB
to left, TB to right.
CR PFL Speaker Yes defines whether an extra PFL speaker is installed in the control room
(CR).
ST1 PFL Speaker Yes defines two separate PFL circuits for control room and studio 1.
OnAir 1500/2500: Studio 1 not supported.
CR / ST1 ADD Mode If ADD is activated on the monitoring module, two sources can be monitored
simultaneously – a handy function for e.g. station takeover. If Split is selected,
the two sources are routed to the left and right monitor speakers separately; if
Mix is selected, both sources are mixed and routed to both monitor speakers.
OnAir 1500/2500: Studio 1 not supported.

6-48 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

CR / ST1 Audition DIM Mode Setting of the behavior of the CR and Studio1 monitor speakers, if the Audi-
tion bus is selected as CR monitoring source, and if a CR microphone channel
is ON. Selections: DIM (attenuate), CUT (mute), or Nothing (no action).
OnAir 1500/2500: Studio 1 not supported.
CR / ST1 HP Split: Monitoring on left channel
Either the monitor signal is on the left headphones channel, and the PFL signal
on the right one (Yes), or vice versa (No).
OnAir 1500/2500: Studio 1 not supported.
CR / ST1 HP Split: Monitor Gain Headphones monitor signal gain setting in split mode. Range: –89.9 to
+12 dB, or Mute.
OnAir 1500/2500: Studio 1 not supported.
CR / ST1 HP Split: PFL Gain Headphones PFL signal gain setting in split mode. Range: –89.9 to +12 dB,
or Mute.
OnAir 1500/2500: Studio 1 not supported.
CR / ST1 PFL to SP SRC Routes the CR or Studio 1 PFL signal to the PFL/TB speaker. Settings: Yes/
No.
OnAir 1500/2500: Studio 1 not supported.
CR / ST1 Monitoring Mode Selects Mode I (Normal) or Mode II (Nearfield). Mode II (Nearfield) con-
verts the CR/Studio 1 DJ headphones output to a nearfield speakers output
(refer to the block diagrams below).
OnAir 1500/2500: Monitoring Mode II not supported.
CR PFL

MPX MPX
CUT
SP SRC TB CR SP
CUT + MONO CUT DIM + DIM
TB
CUT PFL CR (or STUDIO 1)

TB to CR TALK
TB
CR ADD MODE
CUT CR GUEST HP
NONE
TB
with PFL SP
CR SRC TB CR MON LSP
MONO MONO CUT DIM + DIM
CR ADD SRC
MONO
SPLIT DJ HP MODE
MON
MIX
+ MON to L SP SRC
/ MON TB
MONO
TB CR DJ HP
CR SP SRC / PFL DIM +
MONO
TB
SP SRC
TB to CR HP TALK
CONTROL ROOM (or STUDIO 1)

CR / ST1 Monitoring Mode I (DJ Headphones)

CR PFL

MPX MPX
CUT
SP SRC TB CR SP
CUT + MONO CUT DIM + DIM
TB to CR TB
CUT PFL CR (or STUDIO 1)

CR ADD MODE
CR GUEST HP
NONE

CR SRC MONO MONO CR MON LSP

SPLIT DIM CUT
CR ADD SRC
MONO
LSP
+
MIX SWAP
MODE

CR SP SRC / PFL PFL CR NF LSP

DIM CUT
MONITOR

CONTROL ROOM (or STUDIO 1)

CR / ST1 Monitoring Mode II (Nearfield Speakers)

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-49

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

CR / STx LSP Mode on RedLight Selects whether the CR or studio loudspeaker levels are attenuated (DIM),
muted (CUT) or remain unchanged (Nothing) as long as a microphone is
open (and, subsequently, the red light is on). Since SW V3.2, the CUT Allow
TB function has been added; it allows talkback to loudspeakers although
a microphone is open. This function is also known as ‘Re-Injection’ or
‘Rehearsal Mode’. Re-Injection mode may be activated either with desk keys
(up to 4 per location) or, if a main screen is available, with soft buttons at its
right edge.
OnAir 1500/2500: Studio 1 / Studio 3 not supported.

6.5.22.2 Rotary

Monitoring Rotary Source Selector CR / ST1

The list of sources for the monitor speakers (MON) that can be selected with
the SELECT rotary encoder on the CR (control room) and ST1 (studio 1)
monitoring/talkback modules is defined here. Selection is done as described
in chapter 6.5.19.1.
All router inputs and outputs may be selected here for monitoring purposes.
OnAir 1500/2500: Studio 1 not supported.

6-50 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.22.3 SP SRC

SP SRC (Source Selector CR/ST1)

The list of sources for the PFL/TB speaker (SP) that can be selected with the
SELECT rotary encoder on the CR (control room) and ST1 (studio 1) moni-
toring/talkback modules is defined here (for details see chapters 5.3.1 and
5.3.2). Selection is done as described in chapter 6.5.19.1.
All router inputs and outputs may be selected here for monitoring purposes.
OnAir 1500/2500: Studio 1 not supported.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-51

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.23 Signaling
6.5.23.1 Settings

OnAir Mode Selects the condition for switching the ON AIR light on: Internal (i.e., when
at least one channel fader is open, this channel is ON, assigned to a master
output, this master is defined to be OnAir Relevant - see chapter 6.5.11 - and
the master fader is open), External (i.e., when an external on-air input on
the GPI interface is active), or Internal AND External (i.e., a logical AND
operation of both conditions).

6-52 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.24 Snapshot
6.5.24.1 Parameters
On this page either the parameters required for Local snapshot operation, or
the ones needed for accessing a central snapshot file server (Remote) can
be configured.
Snapshot Location - Local

Snapshot Location Selects the location of the snapshots displayed in the user GUI; either Local,
i.e., in the console memory, or Remote (in case of a central snapshot server).
The parameters listed below are displayed in case of Local only.
InitialSnapshot: Loading Input Fader Gain
If set Off, the initial snapshot does not contain the input fader values; i.e.
when powering the console on, the input fader values (or fader positions in
case of optional motor faders) remain as they are. If set On, the input fader
values/positions are saved with the initial snapshot and become updated with
the saved values when the console is powered on. Default: Off.
InitialSnapshot: AutoSave Desk Settings
If set On, the initial snapshot is automatically updated in intervals of 10 s
max., in order to memorize the current desk settings in case of powering the
console off (or a power outage). Default: Off.
Note: AutoSave must be switched Off whenever initial snapshot files are moved
or copied manually.
UserSnapshot: Loading Input Fader Gain
If set to Off, the user snapshots do not contain the input fader values; i.e.
when loading a user snapshot, the input fader values (or fader positions in
case of optional motor faders) remain as they are. If set On, the input fader
values/positions are saved with the user snapshot and get updated with the
saved values when the snapshot is loaded to the console. Default: Off.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-53

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

UserSnapshot: Loading Input ChannelOnOff

If set Off, the user snapshots do not contain the channel ON/OFF settings; i.e.
when loading a user snapshot, the channel ON/OFF settings remain as they
are. If set On, the channel ON/OFF settings are saved with the user snapshot
and get updated when the snapshot is loaded to the console. Default: Off.

Snapshot Location - Remote All global and user snapshots may be saved on a central file server. This is
a convenient feature whenever a user works on several different consoles
within a network; no matter on which console he is currently logged in, he
has access to his snapshots.
Note: System requirements for saving snapshots on a central snapshot file server:
• SMB file server (Windows 2003 server not supported yet), and
• WINS server must be present within the network.

Snapshot Location Selects the location of the snapshots displayed in the user GUI; either Local,
i.e. in the console memory, or Remote, i.e. on the central snapshot file server.
The parameters listed below are displayed in case of Remote only.

Remote Share The share made available by the central snapshot file server is entered here.

Remote Path (Optional) Entry of the remote path.

Username / Password For login on the central snapshot file server, the required domain and user
names and password are entered here.

6-54 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.25 TalkBack
6.5.25.1 Settings

In contrast to the studios, the control room features only one dedicated input
for talkback to the studios. If this should not be sufficient, up to four physical
inputs may be defined for use as alternate talkback sources to the studios,
such as the DJ mic, a Headset mic, etc. Only one of these four may be active
at a time.

Basic Label The basic label may be entered here as described in chapter 6.5.1.

Source Defines the physical audio input that is used to establish the mono channel
for the logical input.
Indication: Frame (Int = internal I/O cards in SCore frame; Ext # = additional,
external D21m frames), Slot #, Card type, and Input # (e.g. Int, Slot 11,
ADAT, Ch. 1), or ‘-’ (if no physical input is assigned to the logical input).

Note: In order to select these physical talkback microphone inputs in the control
room talkback sources, one desk key must be configured for each of them (in
the Desk_KeyMapping.xml file).

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-55

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.25.2 TalkBack

This page defines the physical inputs used as talkback return sources: up to
four summed microphones per studio, one external talkback source TB from
Extern, and 16 or 48 additional external talkback sources TB from Ext 1...,
depending on the DSP core configuration.
OnAir 1500/2500: Talkback from studios 1 and 3 not supported. Up to 4 external talkback
sources supported.

Basic Label The basic label may be entered here as described in chapter 6.5.1.

Source Defines the physical audio input that is used to establish the mono channel
for the logical input.
Indication: Frame (Int = internal I/O cards in SCore frame; Ext # = additional,
external D21m frames), Slot #, Card type, and Input # (e.g. Int, Slot 11,
ADAT, Ch. 9), or ‘-’ (if no physical input is assigned to the logical input).

Incoming TB Indication When selecting No, the key illumination on incoming talkback may be sup-
pressed for any external TB input. This makes sense if an external TB input
is used for listening to an external source instead of for talkback.

6-56 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.25.2.1 TB/XL Box Configuration Examples/Tutorials

The following paragraphs can be used as configuration guides for two differ-
ent XL box ‘advanced mode’ applications:
• Standard intercom
• Listening to external lines that are not assigned to a fader strip.

Intercom With XL Box Instead of using the TB section of a Monitoring/Talback module, the XL Box
may be used for talkback control; it supports:
• Software indication of the TB source (label of the LogicalInput is indicated
in the 8-character display)
• Indicate incoming TB (flashing TALK key)
• Talk to a to an external location, such as an external intercom system or a
different OnAir console (TALK key)
• Controlling the digital input gain of each TB input (±24 dB; hold the PFL
key and adjust with the rotary encoder)
• Setup of the analog gain of a mic input (Channel – Input page of the user
GUI)
• Master volume control using the rotary encoder (TB return level)
Depending on the DSP configuration, a total of up to 49 TB inputs (TBfro-
mExtern, TBfromExt1..TBFromEx48) and 49 TB outputs are supported. In
each of the four monitoring locations up to four XL boxes allow talkback
from/to 48 external locations. This makes a total of 16 XL boxes connected
to a desk, i.e. four XL boxes per location using the same listening bus.

Incoming TB:

• Config – LogicalInputs – LogicalInputX – Source(Left):

Take an unused LogicalInput for each incoming TB signal. It should not
be in any of the InputSelections as we do not want to assign it to a channel
strip. Configure it as Source (Left) of a TB input.
Note: If using a studio TB input, the studio should not be used, since the
studio LSP will DIM on incoming TB.
• Config – LogicalInputs – LogicalInputX – Input Format:
Set the input to Mono.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-57

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

• Config – LogicalInputs – LogicalInputX – Line/Mic:

Set the input to Line
• TalkBack – TalkBack – Source:
For each incoming TB signal, set the source of a TB input to the appropri-
ate LogicalInput
• Desk Common – XLSection – Listen
Specify the Listen bus for the XL Box as TB to the desired monitoring
location, where you want to listen to incoming TB.

Outgoing TB:

• Config – LogicalInputs – LogicalInputX – Source(Left):

Select a used LogicalInput for the TB mic. It should not be in any of the
InputSelections as we do not want to assign it to a StripChannel (shall not
be assigned to a channel strip).
Configure the Source(Left) to be the TB Mic signal.
• Config – LogicalInputs – LogicalInputX – Input Format:
Set the input to mono.
• Config – LogicalInputs – LogicalInputX – Line/Mic:
Set the input to mic.
• In order to setup the analog mic gain of the TB mic (must be connected
to a mic input card), assign it temporarily to a strip channel and tweak the
gain from within the Channel – Input page of the user GUI.
• TalkBack – TalkBack – Source:
Set the source of a TB input from the desired monitoring location, where
you want to talk from, to the appropriate LogicalInput.
• Desk Common – XLSection – TB Source:
Specify the TB source for the XL box to be the TB input where the Logi-
calInput is connected to.
• Config – FixedOutputs – Left Core Out:
Configure the physical output mapping of each TB destination to the des-
dired output signal.

6-58 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Listening to External Lines not assigned to a Fader (Advanced Mode, V3.2 or higher)
In contrast to the ‘legacy mode’ where the XL box usea a PFL, AUX or N–X
bus for listening, the ‘advanced mode’ provides:
• Listening to external lines that are currently not on a fader
• Automatic listening on HP, TB Speaker or monitor LSP without selecting
the XL box listening bus as monitor source
• Incoming call signaling, e.g. a DTMF decoder indicated by Ready GPInput
(PFL button light is flashing)
• Control of the digital input gain of each TB input (±24 dB; hold the PFL
key and adjust with the rotary encoder)
• Master volume control using the rotary encoder (TB return level)
• Talk to external lines (TALK key)
• Setup of the analog gain of a mic input (Channel – Input page of the user
GUI).

Configuration:
The following configuration steps only relate to the ‘advanced mode’ con-
figuration of the XL Box. It is assumed that the following configuration steps
are already done properly:
• LogicalInputs for external 4-wire connections, including N–X Control/TB
Destination
• N–X buses as return line for external 4-wire connections
• Monitoring, and
• the XL box assignment is done in the main screen ROUT – XL Assign
page.
• TalkBack – TalkBack – Source:
Use a TB Input for each LogicalInput used as external 4-wire connection.
The LogicalInput shall be the source of the corresponding TB input, e.g.
TBfromExt1-TBfromExt48 for 48 4-wire connections.
Note: If you use a studio TB input, the studio should not be used, as the
studio LSP will dimmed when listening to the external line (on incoming
TB).

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-59

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

• Config – LogicalInputs – TBMicCutEnable:

Turn OFF TBMicCut Enable of each LogicalInput used as external 4-wire
connection, since it should not be cut while listening.
Otherwise, pressing the PFL button for listening causes the TB input to
which the LogicalInput is assigned to be activated, cutting the LogicalInput
if it is on-air.
• TalkBack – TalkBack – Incoming TB Indication:
Turn OFF incoming TB indication for each TB input used for listening on
the XL box.
Otherwise, the button light of the corresponding TBtoExt output would be
flashing while listening to an external 4-wire connection input.
• Desk Common – XLSection – Listen:
Specify the XL box listening bus as TBto output of the monitoring location
where the external 4-wire connection inputs should be listened to. Listen-
ing is also possible on TBToExt1-TBToExt4.
If more than one XL Box is used in a certain location, all of them will use
the same listening bus.
• GPIOFunctions – GPInputFunctions:
Use a GPInputFunction for each LogicalInput used as external 4-wire
connection to set the READY status, in order to indicate external calls
(flashing PFL key).
• GPIOFunctions – GPInputFunctions – Source:
The GPInput coming e.g. from the DTMF decoder cards.
• GPIOFunctions – GPInputFunctions – Function Type:
Ready.
• GPIOFunctions – GPInputFunctions – Argument 1:
The LogicalInput of the corresponding external 4-wire connection.

6-60 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.26 GPIO
6.5.26.1 General
The GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) interfaces allow different console
functions being controlled by external control signals as well as generating
control signals depending on the current status of different console functions.
Assignment of functions and control signals to the GPIO connector pins as
well as the behavior of the I/O signals can be freely configured.
Distributed Control Please note that in I/O sharing applications, a GP input may also control a
function of a neighboring system, and a GP output may be controlled from a
function of a neighboring system without additional wiring; refer to chapter
6.5.20.1.
Extra GPIO Frame Systems with the Compact SCore can consist of the internal plus up to five
external frames. Since SW V2.2, one additional frame with GPIO cards only
may be used.
OnAir 1500/2500 Only 16 internal GPIOs, plus one GPIO card with 16 GPIOs in an optional,
external D21m I/O frame supported.

6.5.26.1.1 SW V3.2 Enhancements

Remote GPIO Remote logical sources for the GPIO configuration were required. Earlier,
every logic status of one particular console needed on another one had to be
distributed in the old-fashioned way via GPIO and external wiring. Typical
user applications require forwarding parameters from another console within
the network, e.g. to a local key LED. In order to avoid external wiring, Remote
GPIO was introduced. This allows accessing the local and the remote systems’
internal logic states in a comfortable way.
Custom Logic Experience showed that typical, essential functionalities (such as switching
the fader start of a channel on/off, start a device manually and indicating
device ‘ready’) could only be realized with a bunch of GPIs and GPOs.
System logic was accessible as general purpose inputs and outputs (GPI and
GPO), but only in combination with a (physical) control input or output.
Therefore, customization was coming along with additional wiring in most
cases. This has been solved with the introduction of the Custom Logic feature.
OnAir 2500 Using custom logic on an OnAir 2500 console requires a memory upgrade
to 512 MB. The configuration tool of OnAir 2500 consoles with the standard
256 MB memory will display the custom logic configuration pages, but the
number of gates is fixed to 0.

6.5.26.1.2 SW Upgrade

When upgrading an OnAir console to software V3.2 (that provides enhanced
GPIO functionality as specified above), no further user interactions are
required. The software update wizard converts the configuration in such a way
that for each V3.1 GPInput a GPInput is automatically mapped to a GPInput
Function providing the same functionality. The same applies for V3.1 GPOut-
puts. Here, the GPOutputs are automatically mapped to GPOutput Functions.

Any desired remote GPIO functionality may be configured by the system
administrator after the upgrade.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-61

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.26.2 (Remote) GPIO

Remote GPIO is a powerful building brick of the Studer RELINK concept.
In order to make GPIO ready to be used for internal Custom Logic as well as
to allow access to remote systems, GPInputs and GPOutputs have been split
up into GPInputs/GPOutputs (physical control inputs/outputs) and GPInput/
GPOutput functions.
GPInputs and GPOutputs are handled as producers and consumers in the

sense of I/O Sharing. A GPInput function can be compared to a LogicalInput,
where a GPOutput function is the counterpart of a LogicalOutput.

GPInput A GPInput consists of a control input on a D21m GPIO or Ethersound card

and the appropriate input logic.

FixedLabel
Physical Label
Level
Input Polarity
Activate

FixedLabel is defined by the system and remains ‘read only’. It contains a
text specifying the location of the physical input, such as ‘Int, Slot 3, In 2’.
Label is initialized by the software as ‘GPInput N’ by default. It can be
changed by the user.
For further details on the parameters and the ‘Level’ term, refer to chapter
6.5.26.2.1.
The number of GPInputs is configured in the D21m.xml file. It has to match
the number of available physical GP inputs in the D21m system.
GPInputs are either producers or net sources that also may be accessed from
remote systems.

GPInput Function A GPInput function consists of the part of the former GPInput function
(SW V3.1 and earlier) that had implemented the logic as specified by the
Func_Type parameter. GPInput functions are, e.g., TBFromExtern, LSP Cut,
Channel ON/OFF, etc.

Label
Func Type
Func Argument 1
Func Argument 2
Func Argument 3
Level DNet Tree
Action
Time
Triggered Edge
Activate
Source

Label is initialized by the software as ‘GPInputFunction N’ by default. It can

be changed by the user. However it does not follow the label of its producer
as the I/O Sharing consumer labels do).
Source allows defining a ‘Level Producer’ since GPInput functions are (net-)

consumers. The following producers are allowed:
• Local or remote GPInput
• Local or remote GPOutput function
• Local or remote Custom Logic

6-62 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

For further details on the parameters and the ‘Level’ term, refer to chapter
6.5.26.2.1.
The number of GPInput functions can be configured in the GPIO Func-
tions.XML file.

GPOutput Function A GPOuput function consists of the part of the former GPOutput function
(SW V3.1 and earlier) that had implemented the logic as specified by the
Func_Type parameter. GPOutput functions are, e.g., TBToExtern, FaderStart,
Channel ON/OFF, etc.

Label
Func Type
Func Argument 1
DNet Tree Level
Func Argument 2
Func Argument 3
Activate

Generator was added as a new GPOutput function. Depending on its mode
(Funct_Argument 1) it creates a static high, static low, or an alternating output
level (synchronous with the desk LEDs).
Label is initialized by the software as ‘GPOutputFunction N’ by default. It can
be changed by the user. However it does not follow the label of its producer
as the I/O Sharing consumer labels do).
For further details on the parameters and the ‘Level’ term, refer to chapter
6.5.26.2.1.
The number of GPOutput functions can be configured in the GPIO Func-
tions.XML file.
GPOutput functions are producers or net sources that can be accessed from
remote systems as well.

GPOutput A GPOutput consists of a control output on a D21m GPIO or Ethersound card

and the appropriate output logic.

FixedLabel
Label
Time
Physical
Level Polarity
Input
TriggeredEdge
Activate
Source

FixedLabel is defined by the system and remains ‘read only’. It contains a
text specifying the location of the physical ouput, such as ‘Int, Slot 3, Out 2’.
Label is initialized by the software as ‘GPOutput N’ by default. It can be
changed by the user.
Source allows defining a ‘Level Producer’ since GPOutputs are (net-) con-
sumers. The following producers are allowed:
• Local or remote GPInput
• Local or remote GPOutput function
• Local or remote Custom Logic
For further details on the parameters and the ‘Level’ term, refer to chapter
6.5.26.2.1.
The number of GPOutputs is configured in the D21m.xml file. It has to
match the number of actually available physical GP outputs in the D21m
system.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-63

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.26.2.1 GPIO Configuration Details

GP Inputs

Fixed Label (read only) The label of the corresponding frame/GPIO card/input pin is displayed here
for reference only.
Label A label may be assigned to the GPI here as described in chapter 6.5.1.
Polarity Polarity selection of the signal at the input pin: Active high is positive, active
low is negative polarity.
Activate Used to activate/deactivate an input pin. The GPInput’s output only changes
if Activate is On.

GP Input Functions

Label A label may be assigned to the GP input function here as described in chapter
6.5.1.

6-64 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Source Here it is defined where the input control signal to the GP input function
comes from: Local Source (i.e. from within the same system), Net Source
(from a networked system), or ‘–’ (nothing).
Replacement Value In case the input Level should not be available, a replacement value may be
entered here (low or high).
Function Type When touching this button, a menu appears where all available functions can
be selected from. For function/argument descriptions see table below.
Argument 1-3 Depending on the selected function, up to three different parameters (‘argu-
ments’) contribute to the internal processing of the input control signal. These
can be selected here. For function/argument descriptions see table below.
Action Action is only relevant if Triggered Edge is falling or rising. In this case, it
defines if the specified edge activates (set only high), deactivates (set only
low), or toggles the output Level (set low and high).
Usually Action is set to set low and high. set only high and set only low
are used in case of linked GP Inputs (e.g. separate ON and OFF keys).
Time Defines the minimum length that an input Level pulse must have in order to
be interpreted as ‘momentary’. Time is only relevant if Triggered Edge is
set to both. Possible values are 0 ms or 40 ms to 1 s.
Triggered Edge Defines which edge of the input Level causes the output to change: falling,
rising, or both.
Activate Used to activate/deactivate the GP input function. Its output only changes if
Activate is On.
On power up, the output status is initialized according to either the input Level
Notes:
or, if none is available, to the specified Replacement Value.
Action, Time, Polarity, and Triggered Edge must not be changed while

the GP input function is active.
For correct take-over after a modification, it is important to select Active

to On, because it is automatically set to Off when a modification is made.

There are four different types of GPInput Functions categorized by the way
they transfer the Level to the DNet Tree parameter(s).

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-65

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Defined by Triggered Edge and Action Settings (Toggle)

In contrast to the GPInput Functions specified in ‘Defined by Triggered Edge
and Action Settings (InputLevel)’ below, these functions toggle the specified
DNet parameters in cases where Triggered Edge is not BOTH and Action is
ALTERNATE.
GPI Function Arguments Description
ExtON Logical Input / Strip Channel / AUX / N–X Parallel to the ON key in the channel strip
EXT PFL / CR / * ST1 / Logical Input / Strip
PFL PFL control signal from the CAB system is active
Channel / Master
Ready Logical Input External source is ready for playback
Output x is only active if the Out function is active and the
Outgate GP Output Pin
Gate input is active
* ManualDucking SubGroup1...8 External control of manual ducking
UserKey User Function External control of the User Key status
ChannelUserKey Logical Input External control of the Channel User Key status
ExternOnAir – ON AIR LED activation (configured in ‘Signaling Settings’)
EnableOutput Desk Group 1...8 Sets the enable parameter of the corresponding DeskGroup
Routing
Sets the specified User LED parameter according to the GP
input signal.
This function connects the signal of a GP input pin to a User LED
UserLED User LED device ID Parameter. If the LED of a user key on the desk (e.g. Fader Assign
Module) is assigned to that parameter, the input can provide a
status feedback to the LED of a user key (also refer to the ‘UserKey’
GPO function).
Sets the specified User LED Parameter according to the GP
Input signal.
Logical Input / Master / This function connects the signal of a GP input pin to the specified
ChannelUserLED User Function 1 / User Function 2
Channel User LED parameter of the specified channel. If the LED
of a user key on the desk (e.g. Fader Module) is assigned to that
parameter, the GPI can provide a status feedback to the LED of a
channel user key (also refer to the ‘ChannelUserKey’ GPO function).
* OnAir 3000 only

Defined by Triggered Edge and Action Settings (InputLevel)

In contrast to the GPInput Functions specified in ‘Defined by Triggered Edge
and Action Settings (Toggle)’ above, these functions set the specified DNet
parameters according to the InputLevel given by the Input Logic in cases
where Triggered Edge is not BOTH and Action is ALTERNATE.
GPI Function Arguments Description
Links the GP input to an existing GP input function (e.g. when
two keys shall be used for an On/Off function).
Tree Parameter: GPIOFunctions - GPInputFunctions -
GPInputFunctionX - FInputLogic - InputLevel.
If Triggered Edge of the corresponding GPInput Pin equals ‘both’,
InputLevel is set according to InputLevel (momentary).
LinkInput GP Input Pin
Otherwise, if Action is either ACTIVATE or DEACTIVATE, InputLevel
is set according to Action.
Otherwise, InputLevel is set to InputLevel.
In a case where two GP Inputs are linked, the Action of the GP Input
Functions should be configured in such a way that one function
activates the InputLevel and the other deactivates it.

6-66 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Momentary and Latching User Requests

UserKey and User ON/OFF Requests.
GPI Function Arguments Description
Cough key, for mic and line inputs; input is muted, but no
Cough Logical Input change in signaling. Controls all logical inputs using the
same physical mic input; ‘time’ must not be set to >0
Source: CR / *ST1 / ST2 / *ST3 and Ext. Talkback from Source to Destination (Source = Destination
TalkBack not allowed for SW up to V3.1)
Destination: All TB destinations
LS_CUT CR / *ST1 / ST2 / *ST3 / User / Machine Monitor speakers CUT
LS_DIM CR / *ST1 / ST2 / *ST3 / User / Machine Monitor speakers DIM
* OnAir 3000 only

Event-Driven Actions
The following GPInput functions are only activated if the Input Logic sets
the InputLevel to TRUE.
GPI Function Arguments Description
* ST1 Source Selector All monitoring sources, Follow CR/ST2/ST3 Studio 1 monitor source selector
ST2 Source Selector All monitoring sources, Follow CR/*ST1/*ST3 Studio 2 monitor source selector
* ST3 Source Selector All monitoring sources, Follow CR/ST1/ST2 Studio 3 monitor source selector
Primary Desk/*Secondary Desk/Not Spec. / Recall the global snapshot with the name specified by ‘String’
Snapshot for the given location
All/CR/*ST1/ST2/*ST3 / String
LSP Mode On
Red Light
Starts the fade-in ramp of the specified LogicalInput or of the
FadeIn Logical Input / Master
LogicalInput of the specified StripChannel, respectively.
Starts the fade-out ramp of the specified LogicalInput or of
FadeOut Logical Input / Master
the LogicalInput of the specified StripChannel, respectively.
Recall of Output Routing Snapshot with the name specified
by ‘String’.
Argument 2 is either undefined (for downward compatibility),
IgnoreEnableKey, or a valid desk group 1...8.
All partial output routings with the option UseEnableKey set to ‘true’
Partial Output Routing 1...24 / need Argument 2.
OutputRoutingIn – / Ignore Enable Key / Desk Group1...8
If Argument 2 is IgnoreEnableKey partial output routings are loaded
unconditionally.
If Argument 2 is DeskGroup1...8, partial output routings check on
loading the enable status of the corresponding desk group.
If Argument 2 is not defined, the snapshot is not loaded!
Partial output routings with the option UseEnableKey set to ‘false’
are loaded unconditionally and do not need Argument 2.
Next In StartNextA/B_Request Start key
Mic Group On Request key according to specified ext. Mic
MicGroupKey MicGroup1...12
Box key is on
* OnAir 3000 only

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-67

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Example 1, Momentary Mode:

Input Input
Pin Pin

Level Level

Pin Attributes Setting Pin Attributes Setting

Activate On Activate On
Time 0 ms Time 0 ms
Polarity positive Polarity negative
Action -- Action --
Triggered Edge both Triggered Edge both
Note: In order to avoid inconsistencies, please be careful when using a GP input in
momentary mode in parallel with a desk key for the same function.

Example 2, Momentary/Latching Mode:

If the input pulse is shorter than the time specified, the level is latched. The
falling (or, in case of negative polarity, the rising) edge is ignored in this case.

Input Input
Pin Pin

Level Level

Pin Attributes Setting Pin Attributes Setting
Activate On Activate On
Time > 0 ms Time > 0 ms
Polarity positive Polarity negative
Action -- Action --
Triggered Edge both Triggered Edge both
Note: In order to avoid inconsistencies, please be careful when using a GP input in
momentary/latching mode in parallel with a desk key for the same function.

Example 3, Latching Mode:

To achieve latching mode only, the triggered edge attribute is set to rising or
falling; the time attribute is then ignored.

Input Input
Pin Pin

Level Level

Pin Attributes Setting Pin Attributes Setting
Activate On Activate On
Time -- Time --
Polarity -- Polarity --
set low and set low and
Action high Action high
Triggered Edge rising Triggered Edge falling
Note: In order to avoid inconsistencies, it is recommended to use a GP input in
latching mode if a desk key is used in parallel for the same function.

6-68 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

GP Output Functions The GP output logic generates an output signal depending on the GP output
function, its parameters, and the argument(s).

Label The label of the corresponding frame/GPIO card/output pin is displayed here
for reference.
Function Type When touching this button, a menu appears where all available functions can
be selected from, as shown above. For a function and parameter description
see the table below.
Argument 1-3 Depending on the selected function, one or more parameters (‘arguments’)
contribute to the processing of the output control signal. These can be selected
here. For a function and parameter description see the table below.

Activate Used to activate/deactivate an output pin. The Level used as input to the GP
output only changes if Activate is On.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-69

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

GP Outputs

Fixed Label (read only) The label of the corresponding frame/GPIO card/output pin is displayed here
for reference.

Label A label may be assigned to the GP output here as described in chapter 6.5.1.

Source Defines where the control signal to the GP output comes from: Local Source
(i.e. from within the same system), Net Source (from a networked system,
if available), or ‘–’ (nothing).

Replacement Value In case the Level input signal should not be available, a replacement value
may be entered here (low or high).

Time Defines the duration of the pulse at the output pin. Time is only relevant if
Triggered Edge is falling or rising.
Possible values are 0 ms or 40 ms to 1 s, in 20 ms steps.

Polarity Defines the polarity of the output pin signal: Active high is positive, active
low is negative polarity.

Triggered Edge Defines which edge of the Level input signal causes the output to change:
falling, rising, or both.

Activate Used to activate/deactivate an output pin. The Level input signal used as input
to the GP output only changes if Activate is On.

Notes: On power up, the output is initialized according to the Level input signal.
Time, Polarity, and Triggered Edge must not be changed while the GP
output is active.
For correct take-over after a modification, it is important to select Activate
to On, because it is automatically set to Off when a modification is made.

6-70 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

GPO Function Arguments Description

FaderstartWithPFL Logical Input Fader start with ON key and fader, or PFL
FaderstartWithoutPFL Logical Input Fader start with ON key and fader
RedLight_ONAIR - Active if the ON AIR LED is on
RedLight_PGMA - Active if PGM A is on air
* RedLight_PGMB - Active if PGM B is on air
RedLight_REC - Active if REC is on air
* RedLight_5.1A - Active if 5.1 A is On Air
* RedLight_5.1B - Active if 5.1 B is On Air
RedLight_CR - Active if Control Room red light indication is on
* RedLight_ST1 - Active if Studio 1 red light indication is on
RedLight_ST2 - Active if Studio 2 red light indication is on
* RedLight_ST3 - Active if Studio 3 red light indication is on
RedLight_Input Logical Input Active if specified strip channel is on
MicMuteActive Logical Input Active if mic is muted
ON Logical Input | Strip Channel | AUX | N–X Active if ON key is on
LogicalInput | StripChannel | Active if the specified input or master is assigned to the
PFL MasterFaders | ExtPFL specified PFL bus
Active if the value of the specified parameter is different from
zero (this function is normally used for factory testing only).
** TransparentOut Device ID Only 64-bit device ID numbers in hex format are accepted
as argument 1 – i.e., 0x followed by 16 digits (e.g.
0x1122334455667788)
** LinkOutput GP Output pin Links the GP output to another GPO function
UserKey Device ID of a user key parameter Active if the value of the specified user key parameter is true
Active if the value of the specified user key parameter is true.
If a channel user key on the desk (e.g. Fader Module) is assigned
Logical Input | Master | User Function 1 |
ChannelUserKey User Function 2
to a Channel User Key parameter, and the ‘ChannelUserKey’ GPO
function connects that parameter to a GP output pin, the channel
user key can control the GPO.
Sources: CR | *ST1 | ST2 | *ST3 | External Active if the specified Talkback from Source to Destination is
TB active (since SW V3.2, also Source = Destination is allowed)
Destinations: All TB destinations
Locate Logical Input Active if LOC/READY key of the logical input is on
OnMaster Logical Input Active if channel on master is active
Next_Out StartNextA/B_State Flashing if status = Ready, continuous if status = Next
MicGroupReady MicGroup Active if ext. mic group key is Ready
MicGroupActive MicGroup Active if ext. mic group key is Active or On Air
MicGroupOnAir MicGroup Active if ext. mic group key is On Air
Setup Setup1 | Setup 2 Active if the specified setup is active
PrimaryDesk / *SecondaryDesk / Not Spec. | Active if the last loaded Global Snapshot is the one with the
LastSnapshot name specified by ‘string’
All / CR / *ST1 / ST2 / *ST3 | String
Active if the cross points of the specified partial output routing
OutputRoutingOut Partial Output Routing
are set as specified by ‘string’
** ForwardInput GP Input Pin Active if the specified input pin is active
Creates the Level according to the mode specified by
Argument 1.
StaticHigh: Level is always high
Generator StaticHigh / StaticLow / Alternate
StaticLow: Level is always low
Alternate: Level is alternating synchronously to the parameter Config
- Flashers - Flasher - FOutput - Level
CR / *ST1 / ST2 / *ST3 | Dim / Cut / Nothing
* LSPModeOnRedLight Indicates LSPModeOnRedLight
/ Cut, but allow TB
* OnAir 3000 only.
** See paragraph ‘Notes’ at the end of this chapter.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-71

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Example 1, Inactive
If the output is deactivated, the output signal remains constant, regardless of
the ‘Level’ attribute.

Level Level

Output Output
Pin
Pin

Pin Attributes Setting Pin Attributes Setting

Activate Off Activate Off
Time -- Time --
Polarity positive Polarity negative
Triggered Edge both Triggered Edge both

Example 2, Normal Output Mode

To make the output follow the ‘Level’ attribute, the ‘Active’ attribute must
be set, and the ‘Triggered Edge’ attribute must be set to ‘both’. The ‘Time’
attribute is ignored in such a case.

Level Level

Output Output
Pin Pin

Pin Attributes Setting Pin Attributes Setting

Activate On Activate On
Time -- Time --
Polarity positive Polarity negative
Triggered Edge both Triggered Edge both

Example 3, Latching Mode:

To get the level latched at the output pin, the ‘Triggered Edge’ attribute must
be set to either ‘rising’ or ‘falling’, the ‘Time’ attribute must be 0 ms.

Level Level

Output Output
Pin Pin

Pin Attributes Setting Pin Attributes Setting

Activate On Activate On
Time 0 ms Time 0 ms
Polarity positive Polarity negative
Triggered Edge rising Triggered Edge rising

Level Level

Output Output
Pin Pin

Pin Attributes Setting Pin Attributes Setting

Activate On Activate On
Time 0 ms Time 0 ms
Polarity positive Polarity negative
Triggered Edge falling Triggered Edge falling

6-72 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Example 4, Pulse Output Mode

To get a pulse at the output pin, the ‘Triggered Edge’ attribute must be set
to either ‘rising’ or ‘falling’, the ‘Time’ attribute (> 0 ms) defines the pulse
duration.

Level Level

Output Output
Pin Pin

Pin Attributes Setting Pin Attributes Setting

Activate On Activate On
Time > 0 ms Time > 0 ms
Polarity positive Polarity negative
Triggered Edge rising Triggered Edge rising

Level Level

Output Output
Pin
Pin

Pin Attributes Setting Pin Attributes Setting

Activate On Activate On
Time > 0 ms Time > 0 ms
Polarity positive Polarity negative
Triggered Edge falling Triggered Edge falling

Notes: • TransparentOut Function

Active if the value of the specified parameter is different from zero. This
function is normally used for factory testing only.
However, by entering the address of a parameter (i.e., the device ID
number), a particular function may be monitored by a GP output. In this
way it is possible to check, e.g., whether any channel is set to PFL.
Only 64-bit device ID numbers in hex format are accepted as argument
1 – i.e., ‘0x’ followed by 16 digits, such as 0x1122334455667788.
This function is intended for experts only, since localizing a device ID
number requires the ‘Tree Viewer’ application and its handling.
• LinkOutput Function
This function can be used to link a GP output to another GPIO function.
The linked output may then be set to answer to the same input conditions,
but with different logic – such as a pulse signal, whereas the original GP
output is a continuous signal.
• ForwardInput
This function can be used to mirror a GP input status of a remote stage
box on a GP output of the console I/O system, if the remote stage box is
connected to the I/O system via a MADI link.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-73

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.26.3 Custom Logic

Custom logic was introduced in order to replace external wiring. It is configu-
rable in the ConfigTool during commissioning the console, its setup during
manufacturing, but also later by the system administrator. By combining sev-
eral custom logic gates of any predefined type, logic circuits can be designed
that are processed in real time by the core host software. Any combination
of up to 10 cascaded gates is allowed. Feedback loops are not allowed. If
doing so anyway, an error message will be displayed. This means that no RS
flip-flops can be implemented using gates.
A custom logic gate is understood as a logical function. The status at its output
(High or Low) depends on a Boolean operation and on a certain amount of
logical inputs (arguments).
The following Boolean functions are defined as custom logic gates:
• AND (2 to 6 inputs)
• OR (2 to 6 inputs)
• XOR (exclusive OR, 2 inputs)
• NOT (inverter, 1 input).
Restrictions Please note that there are no RS flip-flops available.
Using custom logic on an OnAir 2500 console requires a memory upgrade to
512 MB. The configuration tool of OnAir 2500 consoles with the standard 256
MB memory displays the custom logic configuration pages, but the number
of gates is fixed to 0.

6.5.26.3.1 Custom Logic Gates

AND Gates Custom logic AND gates can be defined with up to six sources (‘inputs’).
The output of an AND gate only goes High if all defined sources are High;
or, in other words, it goes Low if at least one of the defined sources is Low
(the remaining sources do not matter then, i.e. ‘–’). Refer to the truth table
examples for two and six sources below.
In1 In2 Out
L L L
L – L
– L L
H H H
In1 In2 In3 In4 In5 In6 Out
L L L L L L L
L – – – – – L
– L – – – – L
– – L – – – L
– – – L – – L
– – – – L – L
– – – – – L L
H H H H H H H

OR Gates Custom logic OR gates can be defined with up to six sources (‘inputs’). The
output of an OR gate goes High if at least one of the defined sources is High
(the remaining sources do not matter then, i.e. ‘–’); or, in other words, it only
goes Low if all defined sources are Low. Refer to the truth table examples for
two and six inputs below.

6-74 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

In1 In2 Out

L L L
H – H
– H H
H H H
In1 In2 In3 In4 In5 In6 Out
L L L L L L L
H – – – – – H
– H – – – – H
– – H – – – H
– – – H – – H
– – – – H – H
– – – – – H H
H H H H H H H

XOR Gate Custom logic XOR gates always have two sources (‘inputs’) only. The output
of an XOR gate goes High if the two defined sources are different; or, in other
words, it goes Low if both defined sources are either High or Low. Refer to
the truth table below.
In1 In2 Out
L L L
H L H
L H H
H H L

NOT Gate Custom logic NOT gates always have one single source (‘input’). The output
of a NOT gate goes High if the defined source is Low, and vice versa. The
simple ‘truth table’ below has been added for completeness.

In Out
H L
L H

Common for AND and OR Gates Undefined sources are ignored, which means that the gate has just as many
inputs (2...6) as defined with the configuration tool.
The default value of the (output) level is Low.
Common for XOR and NOT Gates The output level is always Low as long as at least one of the sources (‘inputs’)
is undefined.
Common for All Gates The following is valid for all types of custom logic gates:
The default value of the output level is Low. It is used for defined local sources
that are unavailable.
The default value of the ‘Replacement Value’ is Low. It is used for defined
remote sources that are unavailable.
The labels are initialized by the software as ‘AND nnn’, ‘OR nnn’, ‘XOR
nnn’ or ‘NOT nnn’, respectively.
The number of available gates is defined in the CustomLogics.xml
file; the maximum number of gates allowed is defined in the corresponding
Configuration Limits implementation Note for OnAir3000 or Route6000.

Since custom logic gates are (net-) consumers, they also allow the definition
of a ‘level producer’. The following producers are allowed:
• Local or remote GPInputs
• Local or remote GPOutput Functions
• Local or remote Custom Logic.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-75

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.26.3.2 Synchronization
In order to provide stable and significant output signals of any user-configured
circuit, all operations of the custom logic elements within a system are pro-
cessed synchronously. The logical operations are processed in three steps:
• Latching all input levels to the custom logic ‘cloud’
• Processing all logic operations
• Latching the output levels to the custom logic ‘cloud’.
This cycle takes 20 ms, resulting in a latency of max. 20 ms for any circuit
up to the permitted limit of ten cascaded logical operations.

6.5.26.3.3 Consumer Details

The Custom Logic synchronization mechanism requires all consumers (GPIn-
put functions and GPOutputs).
OutputLevelReady
LevelProducer Consumer

LogicTarget
Replacement Value
HoldLevel GPInput Function
False
Level Source GPOutput

Switch 1 Switch 2

The setting of switch 1 depends on the ‘Level Producer’ specified by the

corresponding Source of an Input.
Source SWITCH 1
Local or Remote GPInput Level
Local or Remote GPOutput function Level
Local or Remote Custom Logic Hold Level

For cases where the ‘Level Producer’ is a remote system that may not always
be available for any reason, a replacement value can be defined. This is done
individually for every input in the ConfigTool.

The setting of switch 2 is defined as follows:

Source SWITCH 2
If the source of the local system is not available
Low
(container missing or not ready yet, missing tree parameter, etc.)
If the source is from a remote system currently not available Replacement value
Otherwise Source

6-76 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.26.3.4 Custom Logic Configuration

A ‘Custom Logic’ submenu has been added to the configuration menu tree.
It contains a subpage for each of the four gate types described above.

Defining a Source Defining a ‘Level Producer’ as a source for a consumer (Gate input, GPOut-
put or GPInput function) is the same for producers of both local and remote
systems. The Source selection procedure is similar to the one for I/O Sharing
audio NetConsumers. It consists of several levels.
When remote systems are available in the network, the source selection menu
offers a remote systems selection field (–/Local Source/Net Source), other-
wise only local sources are selectable (–/Local Source).
-
Local Source
Net Source System 1
FixFrame GPInputs
Modulo GPOutput Functions
ANDs GPIn1 : FaderStartCD1
ORs
XORs
NOTs
Generators GPIn32 : not used

Once the system is selected, a submenu opens, showing a selection of producer
categories. These are:
• GPInputs
• GPOutput Functions
• AND Gates
• OR Gates
• XOR Gates
• NOT Gates
• Generators (can be used for applications such as make a key LED flash).
Selecting one of these categories provides another selection, showing the ID
and Label of all ‘Level Producers’ of that category, such as
• ‘GPOut 1: FaderStartCD1’ for the GPOutput Functions category, or
• ‘AND 67: EnableFaderStartCD1’ for the AND Gates category.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-77

 true
GPO
Fader
true
CL 2 - Manual Fader Start

GPI 'READY' LED

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles AND
false

START key Rising

6.5.26.3.5 Custom Logic Examples edge,
300 ms
1 - Fader Start Application: For enabling/disabling the fader start function of a particular channel strip,
the USR1 key can be used in this example (illuminated in case of ‘enabled’).
In addition, the playout device (such as a CD player) controlled by the fader
start switch may also be started manually using the USR2 key. This key’s LED
is used to indicate that the playout device is playing. It is stopped again either
with a second press on the USR2 key or by closing the fader.

GPOutputFunction 2
FaderstartWithoutPFL

Fader Start Enable

Key/LED
GPInputFunction 4
ChannelUserLED1 1
1 Device: Fader Start
AND
GPOutputFunction 4 2 1 OR GPOutput y
ChannelUserKey1 2 1

Manual Start Key

with Ready LED
GPOutputFunction 11
ChannelUserKey2
Device: Playing
GPInputFunction 11 GPInput z
ChannelUserLED2

2 - Signaling Between Consoles:

i.e., from a console 1 (C1, OnAir 3000) to a console 2 (C2, OnAir2500).
The C1 operator can send a call signal to the control room of C2 by pressing
a user key (F5 in our example). User key F5 on C2 flashes to indicate the
incoming call. User key F5 on C1 flashes as well and indicates that the call
has been sent out.
However, the call signal is sent only if C2 is not on-air (i.e., the red-light
signal of C2 is off). This is indicated to the C1 operator by an illuminated F5
key.
The C2 operator can confirm the call signal by pressing his (flashing) F5 key
which goes dark afterwards; F5 on C1 goes dark, too, to indicate to the C1
operator that his signal has been received.
If no confirmation takes place at C2, the call signal can be canceled by press-
ing F5 on C1 a second time – it will then be illuminated again, provided that
C2 remains off-air.

OnAir 3000 (C1) OnAir 2500 (C2)

1 NOT GPOutputFunction 16
GPInputFunction 11 XOR 1 RedLight OnAir
UserLED5 1 2 GPOutputFunction 1
Generator

1 1
AND AND GPInputFunction 5
1 2 2 3 UserLED5

GPOutputFunction 11 1
UserKey5 AND
2 2
Flashing: Call Initiated
Flashing:
F5 Bright: Call Enabled
Caller Indication
F5
Dark: Call Disabled
1
GPInputFunction 17 AND
UserKey5 4 2 GPOutputFunction 5
UserKey5

6-78 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

1st Case Let’s assume that C2 is off-air for a start (i.e., GPOutputFunction 16 of C2
is low). The F5 user key on C2 is dark. The F5 user key on C1 is illuminated,
indicating that a call signal from C1 to C2 is allowed.
• The C1 operator presses his F5 key; GPOutputFunction 11 and input 1 of
AND2 go high. The output of AND2 goes high, too
• The output of AND3 alternates with the rate of GPOutputFunction 1
(generator), and the GPInputFunction 5 of C2 makes the C2 F5 key
(UserLED5) flash.
• The output of AND1 alternates too and makes the F5 key on C1 (UserLED5)
flash via XOR1.
• Operator C2 confirms the call signal by pressing his flashing F5 key. Input
2 of AND4 goes high. Since input 1 of AND4 (output of AND2) is high as
well, the output of AND4 goes high and turns, via the GPInputFunction
17, the GPOutputFunction 11 off again.
2nd Case If C2 is on-air (i.e., GPOutputFunction 16 of C2 is high), the C1 F5 key is
dark.
• The C1 operator presses his F5 key; GPOutputFunction 11 and input 1 of
AND2 go high.
• Since input 2 of AND2 is low (output of NOT1 is low), the ouptut of AND3
remains low and the F5 key on C2 remains dark; the C2 operator is not
disturbed.
• The output of AND1 still alternates and makes the F5 key on C1 flash,
telling the C1 operator that his call has been sent out.
• As soon as C2 goes off-air, the output of NOT1 changes from low to high,
opening the call signal path to C2; the F5 key on C2 flashes.
• Operator C2 confirms the call signal by pressing his flashing F5 key. Input
2 of AND4 goes high. Since input 1 of AND4 (output of AND2) is high as
well, the output of AND4 goes high and turns, via the GPInputFunction
17, the GPOutputFunction 11 off again.
Notes As can easily be seen from the diagram above, the whole logic is implemented
in console C1. This is not mandatory, but allows implementing custom logic
in a system that also incorporates OnAir 2500 consoles without a memory
upgrade.

Configuration Procedure Although the logic diagram is not very complicated, a structured procedure
is recommended. Implementing the desired functionality is much easier if a
diagram is available where also the gate inputs are numbered.

First of all, since no hardware GPIOs are used, neither GPInputs nor GPOut-
puts need to be configured in our case – all that needs to be done takes place
in the GPIOFunctions and CustomLogic sections of the configuration tool.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-79

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

C1 Configuration Console 1 is an OnAir 3000, its identifier is FixFrame in our example.

Step 1 GPInputFunction 11 is set to UserLED and Funct 5; this way, with its
input signal, the LED of user key no. 5 can be turned on or off (of course this
needn’t be GPInputFunction 11; just select the first free function available).
After scrolling down, the parameters Time are set to 0 ms, Triggered Edge
to both, and Activate to On.

Step 2 GPInputFunction 17 is set to UserKey and Funct 5, which means that user
key no. 5 may also be operated remotely instead of manually. The control
Source is the output of AND 4. Since its Action parameter is set to set only
low, it can only be turned off remotely. After scrolling down, the parameters
Time are set to 0 ms, Triggered Edge to rising Edge, and Activate to On.

6-80 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Step 3 GPOutputFunction 11 is set to UserKey and Funct 5, with the Active

parameter set to On.

Step 4 GPOutputFunction 1 is set to Generator and Alternate, with the Active

parameter set to On. This is used to make the key LEDs flash.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-81

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Step 5 In the AND section, perform the settings as shown below; the gate and gate
input designators correspond to the ones in the logic diagram above.

Step 6 Set all ReplacementValues for the AND gates 1-4 to Low.

Step 7 In the AND – InputLevels page (this is a read-only page) you will see the
input no. 1 levels of AND gates 1 and 3 alternating since they are connected
to the generator’s output.

6-82 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Step 8 ‘Connect’ the inputs 1 and 2 of XOR 1 to NOT 1 and AND 1, as shown
below.

Step 9 Set the ReplacementValues of XOR 1 to Low.

Step 10 Set the NOT 1 parameters as shown below.

Now, the console 1 configuration is done; on console 2, only three more steps
remain.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-83

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Step 11 On console 2, set the GPInputFunction 5 parameters as follows:

After scrolling down, the parameters Time are set to 0 ms, Triggered Edge
to both, and Activate to On.

Step 12 Set the GPOutputFunction 5 parameters on console 2 as follows:

6-84 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Step 13 Set the GPOutputFunction 16 parameters on console 2 as follows:

Now we’re ready for a test:

• Console 2 (the OnAir 2500) is currently not on-air, so the F5 key on console
1 is dark.
• Press F5 on console 1 (the OnAir 3000).
• The console 2 F5 key starts to flash. The F5 key on console 1 flashes too,
indicating that the call has been sent.
• The console 2 operator can confirm the incoming call by pressing his F5
key which turns dark again. The F5 key on console 1 goes dark, too.
• In the mean time, console 2 has been switched on-air, and the F5 key on
console 1 indicates this by illuminating.
• Press F5 on console 1 (the OnAir 3000).
• The console 2 F5 key remains dark in order to not disturp the operator. The
F5 key on console 1 flashes, indicating that the call has been sent.
• As soon as console 2 is no more on-air, its F5 key starts to flash.
• The console 2 operator can confirm the incoming call by pressing his F5
key which turns dark again. The F5 key on console 1 goes dark, too.

If the test was successful and you want to keep this functionality, remember

to save both console 1 and console 2 configurations.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-85

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.26.3.6 Error Handling

GPIO
If the number of installed GPIO cards doesn’t match the number of GPInputs
specified in the D21m.xml file, the following user message appears in a
modal dialog during power-up:
User Warning 3035: I/O 21, Missing GPIO Card(s). 32
GPInputs configured, 16 GPIOs found.
If the number of installed GPIO cards doesn’t match the number of GPOut-
puts specified in the D21m.xml file, the following user message appears in
a modal dialog during power-up:
User Warning 3036: I/O 21, Missing GPIO Card(s). 32
GPOutputs configured, 16 GPIOs found.

Custom Logic
If the DNet connection to a remote system from which at least one one of its
‘Level Producers’ is consumed by a Custom Logic, GPOutput or GPInput
function, the following user warning appears in a modal dialog:

User Warning 8800: CUSTOM LOGIC, Connection to CORE
‘System71’ lost. Remote GPIO and Custom Logic from
that CORE are not available.
In order to keep the system stable and with good performance, the Custom
Logic configuration is validated during configuration of the sources of
Custom Logic gates. The system keeps track of each connection between
gates and creates one of the user warnings described below. Custom logic will
automatically clear the source. This makes sure that no erroneous configu-
ration can be saved in the console configuration (initial snapshot.
cfg).
If a Source is configured that exceeds the limit of maximum 10 cascades, the
following user warning is displayed:
User Warning 8805: CUSTOM LOGICS, More than 10 gates
cascaded at Gate ‘AND 11’! Source cleared.
To help identifying the cascade, a software warning is written into the log file
of a running Logger, as shown below.

If a Source is configured that creates a feedback, the following user warning

is displayed:
User Warning 8806: CUSTOM LOGICS, Feedback
detected at Gate ‘AND 1’. Source cleared.
To help identifying the feedback loop, a software warning is written into the
log file of a running Logger, as shown below.

6-86 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.27 Desk Common

6.5.27.1 Mon, TB Keys
OnAir 3000

This page allows assigning monitoring sources to the CONTROL ROOM / moni-
tor and talkback destinations to the talkback key fields of the monitoring/
talkback modules in the control room and in the studios. The Rotary param-
eter stands here for the  key (no. 17) in the CONTROL ROOM / monitor
field. These keys are duplicated by the 20 buttons on the MON - CR and
MON - ST1-3 GUI pages, as well as by the 16 buttons on the MON - TB
SP GUI page.
Both fields contain 20 keys/buttons (16 in case of the MON - TB SP GUI
page), their numbering is given in the illustrations below. Normally, for the
talkback field only 16 keys are used, and the keys 17-20 are labeled F11
to F14 (user functions). For special requirements these keys may be defined
as talkback keys as well.

Mon/TB Module Key Nos.:

CONTROL ROOM RED LIGHT

1 2 3 4 ON AIR CR 1 2 3

5 6 7 8
TALKBACK

1 2 3 4
9 10 11 12
5 6 7 8
13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12
17 18 19 20
13 14 15 16
PFL TO MON

Tel1 ADD
SELECT

(17) (18) (19) (20)

MONO PFL

CUT PFL / MON TB RETURN

DIM MON MPX MASTER

CR DJ SP DJ

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-87

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

OnAir 3000 ST1-ST3 Key Nos.:

1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20

OnAir 3000 TB SP Key Nos.:

1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16

6-88 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

OnAir 2500

This page allows assigning monitoring sources to the CR monitor and talk-
back destinations to the talkback key fields of the console’s central module.
The Rotary parameter stands here for the  key (no. 6) in the CR monitor
field. These keys are duplicated by the 20 buttons on the MON - CR and
MON - ST2 GUI pages, as well as by the 12 buttons on the MON - TB SP
GUI page. The key/button numbering is given in the illustrations below.

CR MONITOR/TALKBACK Key Nos.:

1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4
5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8
9 10 9 10
11 12 11 12

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-89

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

OnAir 2500 ST2 Key Nos.:

1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20

OnAir 2500 TB SP Key Nos.:

1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12

6-90 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.27.2 Cue Keys

OnAir 3000

This page allows assigning ten selected cue feeds (i.e., any available input,
output, or bus) to the CUE button field of the GUI MON - CR CUE and
MON - ST1 CUE pages (in the control room and in studio 1).

1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-91

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

OnAir 2500

This page allows assigning ten selected cue feeds (i.e., any available input,
output, or bus) to the CUE button field of the on the GUI MON - CR CUE
page (in the control room).

1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10

6-92 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.27.3 Output Routing Keys

This page allows assigning up to 24 Partial Output Routings to the output
routing keys. Which hardware keys this will be on the desk must be defined
in the Desk_KeyMapping.xml file.

6.5.27.4 XL Section

The AUX bus required to listen to outside sources as well as the talkback
source location are defined on this page. Per default, AUX 1 is assigned to
the XL box in the control room, AUX 2 to the XL box in studio 1, AUX 3
to the one in studio 2, and AUX 4 to the one in studio 3. Source selection is
performed in the user GUI’s Route – XL Assign page (also refer to chapter
5.11.5.5).

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-93

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

SW V3.0 and later allow assigning up to 20 different XL boxes.

Since SW V3.2, the XL box configuration features ‘advanced’ and ‘legacy’
modes. Advanced mode is supported by systems with SCore Live and console
configuration C109 only. It allows listening to a maximum of 48 external
sources not being assigned to a fader, as well as comfortable intercom func-
tions. Legacy mode only supports all XL box functions available before V3.2;
it is active as long as any of the ‘conventional’ buses (such as PFL, N–X or
AUX) is selected in the Listen field; advanced mode is automatically entered
if one of the TB matrix outputs is selected.
OnAir 2500 AUX3/4 and studio 1/3 not supported; only up to two XL boxes supported;
advanced mode not supported.

6.5.28 Pro-Bel
The Pro-Bel extension provides an interface to remotely set or remove audio
connections in the output routing of a controlled device. A remote device can
send messages through a serial COM port or via TCP/IP, using the ‘Pro-Bel
General Switcher Communication Protocol’. This protocol provides a robust
and asynchronous method of controlling routers and is the preferred method
of communication.
Supported Physical Connections: Protocol Serial via RS232/422 TCP/IP via Ethernet SW Version
SW-P-02 Yes Not supported V1.1
SW-P-08 Yes Yes V2.1.6

6.5.28.1 Settings

On this page the ‘connected’ or ‘disconnected’ user messages can be enabled
or disabled (default setting: Off).

6-94 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.28.2 Routable Sources

CLEAR Sources The top left CLEAR Sources field is colored brighter than the others; it can
be used to clear all configured sources. If it is touched, clearing the sources
has to be confirmed in a dialog box.
L1, L2,... define the physical audio inputs used to establish the logical input.
After touching one of the L... fields, a list appears for selection of the routable
sources. When touching e.g. the Logical Inputs field, a list for selection of
all possible logical inputs appears.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-95

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.29 Audio Clock

6.5.29.1 Settings

On this page the current audio clock parameters are displayed in the right
State (Read Only) column; settings are made in the Setup column.
Auto Select Defines the behavior of the console once the external clock should fail. If Off
is selected, the console will automatically switch to its internal clock when-
ever the selected external Sync Source clock is missing. If On is selected,
the priority of the external clock signals is as follows:
Priority Audio Clock (Sync) Source
1 Video Clock
2 AES/EBU Clock
3 Word Clock
4 Internal

Note: (OnAir 2500 only): If MADI Clock is selected, Auto Select must be set to
Off.
Sampling Rate can be selected from 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. The coefficients of any filter or
EQ frequency are automatically modified when changing the sampling rate;
frequency parameters are always displayed correctly.
Sync Source can be selected from Internal, AES / EBU Clock, Word Clock, and either
Video Clock (OnAir 3000 only) or MADI Clock (OnAir 2500 only).
Word Clock On/Off status display.
Supported by SW V3.0 and up. The following (or higher) firmware releases
are required for compatibility:
• Compact SCore: S943.095421 on Audio Clock card
• SCore Live: S943.092822 on Bridge card.
AES / EBU Clock On/Off status display.
Video Clock On/Off status display (supported by OnAir 3000 only), or
MADI Clock On/Off status display (supported by OnAir 2500 only).

6-96 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.30 User (User Management)

6.5.30.1 Admin

The system administrator (‘Admin’, user no. 1) automatically has access to
all features of the console and its configuration; for him, only the Admin
policy (no. 1) is valid. No other policy may be assigned to him; however, the
Admin policy may be assigned to other users, if required.
The administrator’s user name and his password may be changed using the
pop-up keyboard; the factory default settings are Admin for his user name,
and admin for his password. Please note that the password is case-sensitive
– this is important for correct log-in.

Since SW V3.2 an additional setting can be made here: Either the standard
FaderScaleMode
+10 dB on Fader Top or the new 0 dB on Fader Top. This can be set
individually for every user.
Depending on the used fader modules and the physical fader positions, dif-
ferent behaviours have to be considered; however, the functionality has been
designed in such a way that the switchover either causes no level jump at all
or that an unavoidable level jump is kept as small as possible. During every-
day operation, the function is switched over only when a different user logs
in and the faders are down.
Switchover Behaviour: When switching from 0 dB on Fader Top to +10 dB on Fader Top: No
level jumps occur in any case.
When switching from +10 dB on Fader Top (standard) to 0 dB on Fader
Top:
Motor Fader Module • Physical fader position below the 0 dB marker: The fader knob moves up
by 10 dB, no audio level jump occurs.
• Physical fader position above the 0 dB marker: The fader motor is turned
off; upon touching the fader knob, the audio level jumps down by 10 dB;
this cannot be avoided, except if taking care that the faders are below the
0 dB marker on switchover.
Non-Motor Fader Module The fader goes into take-over mode, regardless of its physical position; when
moving the fader button until the physical and the electrical fader positions
match again, no level jump occurs in any case.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-97

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.30.2 Default User

For the default user (‘Default’, user no. 2) only the Default policy (no. 2)
is valid, no different policy can be assigned to him; however, the Default
policy may be assigned to other users too, if required. The default user’s
name is Default; it may be changed using the pop-up keyboard, if required.
No password is available or required for the default user.

FaderScaleMode The 0 dB on Fader Top function is available for the default user, too – refer
to chapter 6.5.30.1.

6-98 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.30.3 Users

The Users page is used to enter the names and passwords for users no. 3-20
(or up to 64 if defined in the user.xml file) on a standalone system. For
the system administrator (Admin, user no. 1) and the default user (Default,
user no. 2) separate pages are available, as mentioned above. If more than
64 users and/or more than 16 policies are required, central user management
must be used (refer to chapter 5.8.9).
When touching one of the Username or Password fields, the same keyboard
appears that is used for label entries. Please note that the password is case-
sensitive – this is important for correct user log-in.
By setting User Valid to Off, access for a particular user can be blocked.

Users – Policies For managing user access rights, one or more Policies may be assigned to all
users except the Admin and Default users. If more than one policy is assigned
to a user, this results in a logical OR combination of the policies. For more
information on user privileges and policies, please refer to chapter 5.8.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-99

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Users – Departments For snapshot management, one or more departments can be assigned to each
user. In addition, it can be defined whether the user can only read snapshots
from a certain department (Read Only), or whether he is allowed to modify
or create department snapshots (Read/Write).

6.5.30.4 Policies, Departments

Policies A set of eight policies is available per default. Policy no. 1 (Admin) grants
access to all parameters and is normally assigned to the system administrator
only; it may, however, be assigned to other users as well, if required (refer
to chapter 6.5.30.3, Users – Policies). The maximum number of policies
is 16 (unless central user management is operated from an extra computer.
Then the maximum number of policies is 255); it is defined in the user.
xml file.

6-100 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

The default setting for the policies no. 2-8 grants access to most of the console
parameters, except from some typical administrator-only settings, such as
fader calibration, date/time settings, console configuration, or screen calibra-
tion. The screen above shows a part of the configurable functions, such as
Chan::Input (channel – input parameters), Chan::DeEs (channel – de-esser
parameters). Grant is displayed for a function if at least one parameter or one
parameter group of this function is set to Grant in the parameter groups page
shown below.

Access to the different parameter groups can be granted (Grant) or denied

(Deny). If denied, the main screen buttons corresponding to that parameter
or parameter group are blanked. For details on the parameters contained in
the parameter groups please refer to chapter 5.8.7.

Departments The purpose of this page is entering particular names, such as NEWS, for
the eight departments available. When touching one of the matrix fields the
pop-up keyboard appears for entering the desired name.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-101

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.31 License Manager

6.5.31.1 Information

On this page the System Identification (System ID) code is displayed. When
adding an option to the system, this code is used (by copying it to the clip-
board) together with the option’s license key, in order to generate the Option
Key code that has to be entered for this option (see below).

6.5.31.2 Options

When adding an option (such as I/O sharing, Subgroups + HP/LP Filter
+ Ducking, or 5.1 channel, MPX, CAB, ProBel or CMS support) to the
system, the System ID code is used together with the option’s license key
in order to generate the Option Key code that is entered here. Unavailable
options (such as Subgroups or MPX for OnAir 1500/2500) are not dis-
played.

6-102 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.32 Desk
6.5.32.1 Fader Assign 1 - Group 1

This page is used to assign functions to the fader rotary assign keys. Additional
tree items may appear in case of split desk or A/B desk configurations.
OnAir 3000 16 keys on the optional fader assign module(s), see below/left.
OnAir 2500 12 ROTARY ASSIGN keys in the central section, see below.
These keys allow selecting the functions of the rotary encoders in the fader
strips. For F 1 to F 5 refer to the configuration examples in chapters 6.5.27.1
and 6.5.27.2; for SNAP 1 to SNAP 6 refer to chapter 6.5.32.6. The Selection
Label fields allow modifying the 8-digit labels that appear in the display if
required; for this purpose the screen keyboard pops up.

Pan

1 2
1 2 3 4
3 4
5 6 7 8
5 6
9 10 11 12
7 8
13 14 15 16
9 10
11 12

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-103

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.32.2 Rotary Assign 2 - Group 2 (supported by OnAir 3000 only)

This page is used to assign functions to the 16 rotary assign keys of the
OnAir 3000’s optional rotary assign module(s), see below. These keys allow
selecting the functions of the rotary encoders of the optional rotary modules
(usually installed above the fader modules).

1 2
AUX1
3 4
5 6
AUX2
7 8

9 10
AUX3
11 12
13 14
AUX4
15 16

6-104 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.32.3 Assignable Rotary Functions

(Fader Module) (Rotary Module)

Key 2:  
Key 1:  

Function Name Rel. in SW Rotary Function Key 1 Function Key 2 Function

* 51AssignmentMode V2.2 5.1 Assignment Mode - -
* 51Divergence/CenterLevel V2.2 5.1 Divergence/Center Level - -
* 51FrontRearPan V2.2 5.1 Front/Rear Pan - -
* 51LR_PanBal V2.2 5.1 LR Pan/Bal - -
Aux1 V1.0 Aux 1 Level Aux 1 On/Off Aux 1 Pre/After
Aux2 V1.0 Aux 2 Level Aux 2 On/Off Aux 2 Pre/After
* Aux3 V1.0 Aux 3 Level Aux 3 On/Off Aux 3 Pre/After
* Aux4 V1.0 Aux 4 Level Aux 4 On/Off Aux 4 Pre/After
Balance V1.0 Pan Pan On/Off -
Cal V1.0 Cal - -
Codec_ReturnLine V2.1 Codec Return Line Rotary Codec Return Line -
Comp_Attack V1.0 Compressor Attack Time Dynamics On/Off Compressor On/Off
Comp_Gain V1.0 Compressor Gain Dynamics On/Off Compressor On/Off
Comp_Ratio V1.0 Compressor Ratio Dynamics On/Off Compressor On/Off
Comp_Release V1.0 Compressor Release Time Dynamics On/Off Compressor On/Off
Comp_Threshold V1.0 Compressor Threshold Dynamics On/Off Compressor On/Off
Deesser_Attenuation V2.1 Deesser Attenuation Deesser On/Off -
Deesser_Freq V1.0 Deesser Frequency Deesser On/Off -
Deesser_Q V1.0 Deesser Q Deesser On/Off -
Deesser_Ratio V1.0 Deesser Ratio Deesser On/Off -
Deesser_Threshold V1.0 Deesser Threshold Deesser On/Off -
* Delay V3.0 Delay Time Delay On/Off Delay Time Format
* Ducker_AttackTime V2.1 Ducker Attack Time Ducker Manual -
* Ducker_Attenuation V2.1 Ducker Attenuation Ducker Manual -
* Ducker_HoldTime V2.1 Ducker Hold Time Ducker Manual -
* Ducker_ReleaseTime V2.1 Ducker Release Time Ducker Manual -
* Ducker_Threshold V2.1 Ducker Threshold Ducker Manual -
EQ_HF_Freq V1.0 Equalizer HF Frequency Equalizer On/Off -
EQ_HF_Gain V1.0 Equalizer HF Gain Equalizer On/Off -
EQ_HF_Q V1.0 Equalizer HF Q Equalizer On/Off -
EQ_HMF_Freq V1.0 Equalizer HMF Frequency Equalizer On/Off -
EQ_HMF_Gain V1.0 Equalizer HMF Gain Equalizer On/Off -
EQ_HMF_Q V1.0 Equalizer HMF Q Equalizer On/Off -
* EQ_HP_Freq V2.0 Equalizer HP Frequency Equalizer On/Off Equalizer HP On/Off
* EQ_HP_Slope V2.0 Equalizer HP Slope Equalizer On/Off Equalizer HP On/Off
EQ_LF_Freq V1.0 Equalizer LF Frequency Equalizer On/Off -
EQ_LF_Gain V1.0 Equalizer LF Gain Equalizer On/Off -
EQ_LF_Q V1.0 Equalizer LF Q Equalizer On/Off -
EQ_LMF_Freq V1.0 Equalizer LMF Frequency Equalizer On/Off -
EQ_LMF_Gain V1.0 Equalizer LMF Gain Equalizer On/Off -
EQ_LMF_Q V1.0 Equalizer LMF Q Equalizer On/Off -
* EQ_LP_Freq V2.0 Equalizer LP Frequency Equalizer On/Off Equalizer LP On/Off
* EQ_LP_Slope V2.0 Equalizer LP Slope Equalizer On/Off Equalizer LP On/Off
Exp_Attack V1.0 Expander Attack Time Dynamics On/Off Expander On/Off
Exp_Ratio V1.0 Expander Ratio Dynamics On/Off Expander On/Off
Gate_Threshold V1.0 Gate Threshold Dynamics On/Off Gate On/Off
InputSelect V1.0 Input Select Input Select Enter -

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-105

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

(Fader Module) (Rotary Module)

Key 2:  
Key 1:  

Function Name Rel. in SW Rotary Function Key 1 Function Key 2 Function

Lim_Attack V1.0 Limiter Attack Time Dynamics On/Off Limiter On/Off
Lim_Release V1.0 Limiter Release Time Dynamics On/Off Limiter On/Off
Lim_Threshold V1.0 Limiter Threshold Dynamics On/Off Limiter On/Off
* NXBus1-16Level (** 1-8) V1.0 N–X 1-16 Master Send Level N–X 1-16 Master On/Off -
* NXBus1-16LevelOnly (** 1-8) V1.0 N–X 1-16 Master Send Level - -
N–X 1-16 Master
* NXBus1-16LevelFullReturn (** 1-8) V2.1 N–X 1-16 Master Send Level -
Full Return On/Off
N–X Bus 1-16
* NXBus1-16ContrLevel (* 1-8) V2.1 N–X 1-16 Contr Level -
Contr On/Off
* NXBus1-16ContrLevelOnly (** 1-8) V2.1 N–X 1-16 Contr Level - -
* NXBus1-16ContrLevelFullReturn N–X*** Master
V2.1 N–X 1-16 Contr Level -
(** 1-8) Full Return On/Off
N–X 17-48 Master
* NXBus17-48Level V3.2 N–X 17-48 Master Send Level -
On/Off
* NXBus17-48LevelOnly V3.2 N–X 17-48 Master Send Level - -
N–X 17-48 Master
* NXBus17-48LevelFullReturn V3.2 N–X 17-48 Master Send Level -
Full Return On/Off
N–X Bus 17-48
* NXBus17-48ContrLevel V3.2 N–X 17-48 Contr Level -
Contr On/Off
* NXBus17-48ContrLevelOnly V3.2 N–X 17-48 Contr Level - -
N–X*** Master
* NXBus17-48ContrLevelFullReturn V3.2 N–X 17-48 Contr Level -
Full Return On/Off
NXSend V1.0 N–X*** Master Send Level N–X*** Master On/Off -
N–X*** Master Cue
NXSendCue V2.1 N–X*** Master Send Level -
On/Off
NXSendLevelOnly V1.0 N–X*** Master Send Level - -
PGMA_OnOff V2.0 - PGM Bus A On/Off -
* PGMB_OnOff V2.0 - PGM Bus B On/Off -
Rec_OnOff V2.0 - Rec Bus On/Off -
* SubGroup1_OnOff V2.0 - Sub Group 1 On/Off -
* SubGroup2_OnOff V2.0 - Sub Group 2 On/Off -
* SubGroup3_OnOff V2.0 - Sub Group 3 On/Off -
* SubGroup4_OnOff V2.0 - Sub Group 4 On/Off -
* SubGroup5_OnOff V2.0 - Sub Group 5 On/Off -
* SubGroup6_OnOff V2.0 - Sub Group 6 On/Off -
* SubGroup7_OnOff V2.0 - Sub Group 7 On/Off -
* SubGroup8_OnOff V2.0 - Sub Group 8 On/Off -
* Group_VCA1_2_OnOff V3.2 - Sub Group 2 On/Off Sub Group 1 On/Off
* Group_VCA3_4_OnOff V3.2 - Sub Group 4 On/Off Sub Group 3 On/Off
* Group_VCA5_6_OnOff V3.2 - Sub Group 6 On/Off Sub Group 5 On/Off
* Group_VCA7_8_OnOff V3.2 - Sub Group 8 On/Off Sub Group 7 On/Off
Surround 5.1 Bus A
* Sur51BusA V2.2 - -
On/Off Rotary
Surround 5.1 Bus B
* Sur51BusB V2.2 - -
On/Off Rotary
TimerSelectA..D V2.1 - Timer Select A-D -
* not supported by OnAir 1500/2500
** supported by OnAir 1500/2500
*** of the N–X bus controlled by the corresponding logical input

6-106 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.32.4 Assignable Global Functions

Global functions are not channel strip-related. They allow assigning a func-
tion to a desk element in the Desk_KeyMapping.xml file (refer to the
‘Assignable to-’ columns below).

Function Assignable to: Details

Display Module

Rotary Unit
Key Group
Rel.

Key Unit

Display
in

LED
SW
Bus functions
Aux1-4_Master_On/Off V2.1 ●
Aux1-4_PFL_On/Off V2.1 ● PFL ControlRoom
Aux1-4_PFLStudio_On/Off V2.1 ● PFL Studio1
NX1-16MasterOnOff V2.1 ●
assign to a KeyGroup, use dummy Keys (not existing
element no) for not used NX modes: Key 0=PGMA,
NXBus1-16Mode V2.1 ●
1=PGMB, 2=REC, 3=AUX(PF), 4=AUX(AF), 5=N-1,
6=5.1A, 7=5.1B
Ducker_ManDuck_SubGroup1-8 V2.1 ● sets manual ducking of the corresponding sub group bus
PFLActive_CR V2.0 ● reset PFL CR function, shows if PFL CR is active
PFLActive_ST1 V2.0 ● reset PFL ST1 function, shows if PFL ST1 is active
Rec_PFActive V2.0 ● reset Rec PF function, shows if Rec PF is active
RecordActive V2.0 ● reset (Off Air) Record function, shows if Record is active
Extern PFL functions
ExtPLF1toCR_On/Off V1.0 ●
ExtPLF1toS1_On/Off V1.0 ●
ExtPLF2toCR_On/Off V1.0 ●
ExtPLF2toS1_On/Off V1.0 ●
Setting & assignment functions
assigns one of the configured AssignUnitFunction to
AssignSubGroup V1.0 ● ● ● all of the AssignSubGroup subordinated AssignUnits
(RotaryUnits)
switches within the AssignGroup the StripDisplays form
StripDisplay_Selector V2.1 ● InputLabel to RemoteSystem name, key in momentary
mode
ChannelScrDeEsser V2.2 ● show DeEsser parameters on the ChannelScreen
ChannelScrLayout V2.2 ● toggle between DeEsser and 5.1 panning parameters
ChannelScrNX48 V3.2 ● show all 48 N-X bus parameters on the ChannelScreen
ChannelScrSur51 V2.2 ● show 5.1 panning parameters on the ChannelScreen
Cue V1.0 ● signal for PFL bus is taken post-fader (Cue/notPFL=On)
PFL V1.0 ● signal for PFL bus is taken pre-fader (Cue/notPFL=Off)
assign to a KeyGroup: Key 0=GRM Comp/Lim, 1=GRM
MeterGRM_Mode V1.0 ●
Deesser
assign to a KeyGroup: Key 0=Inp. Level PF, 1=Inp. Level
MeterLevel_Mode V1.0 ●
AF, 2=NXSend Level
DisplayBright V1.0 ● sets the display brightness
LedBright V1.0 ● sets the LED brightness
MicGroup functions
set the MicGroup on and off, signals: 0=OFF, 1=ACTIVE
MicKey1-10 V2.0 ●
(LED2), 2=READY (LED1), 3=ONAIR (LED2)

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-107

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Function Assignable to: Details

Display Module

Rotary Unit
Key Group
Rel.

Key Unit

Display
in

LED
SW
Monitoring ControlRoom (CR) functions
assign to a KeyGroup: Key 0=CR MON, 1=CR MON/PFL,
MonHPDJMode V1.0 ●
2=PFL
sets either the HPVolume (default) or HPSplitBalance
MonHPDJVol V1.0 ●
depends on the MonSetHPSplitBalToHPVol function
assign the HPSplitBalance to the MonHPDJVol control,
MonSetHPSplitBalToHPVol V3.0 ●
key in momentary mode
assign the HPSplitBalance to the MonHPDJVol control,
MonSetHPSplitBalToHPVol_LO V3.0 ●
key in latching mode
MonHPGuestVol V1.0 ●
MonLsCRCut V1.0 ●
MonLsCRDim V1.0 ●
MonLsCRMono V1.0 ●
MonLsCRVol V1.0 ●
sets either the PFLSpeaker¬Vol (default),
TBReturnVol, MPX¬Vol or HPSplitBalance depends
MonPFLSPVol V1.0 ●
on the MonSetTBRetVol, MonSetMPXVol and
MonSetHPSplitBal functions.
assign the HPSplitBalance to the MonPFLSPVol control,
MonSetHPSplitBal V2.1 ●
key in momentary mode
assign the MPX-Vol to the MonPFLSPVol control, key in
MonSetMPXVol V1.0 ●
momentary mode
assign the MPX-Vol to the MonPFLSPVol control, key in
MonSetMPXVol_LO V1.0 ●
latching mode
assign the TBReturnVol to the MonPFLSPVol control, key
MonSetTBRetVol V1.0 ●
in momentary mode
assign the TBReturnVol to the MonPFLSPVol control, key
MonSetTBRetVol_LO V1.0 ●
in latching mode
MonSrcAdd V1.0 ●
MonSrcFollowS1_CR V2.1 ●
MonSrcFollowS2_CR V2.1 ●
MonSrcFollowS3_CR V2.1 ●
for possible monitoring sources see chapter ‚Monitoring
MonSrcKey1-20 V1.0 ● Source Key‘ of: OA3000 Implementation Notes Input
Output Selections.doc
MonSrcPFLtoMON V1.0 ●
selects either the rotary source (default) or the 3rdHP
MonSrcRotary V2.1 ●
source depends on the MonSrcSetHPSource function
Display function, shows either the selected rotary
MonSrcRotary3rdHPDisplay V3.0 ● source or the selected 3rdHP source depends on the
MonSrcSetHPSource function
DisplayMode function, is used to dim the display of the
MonSrcRotary3rdHPActive V3.0 ●
MonSrcRotary3rdHPDisplay function
MonSrcRotaryDisplay V3.0 ● Display function, shows the selected rotary source
DisplayMode function, is used to dim the display of the
MonSrcRotaryActive V3.0 ●
MonSrcRotaryDisplay function
MonSrc3rdHPDisplay V3.0 ● Display function, shows the selected 3rdHP source
DisplayMode function, is used to dim the display of the
MonSrc3rdHPActive V3.0 ●
MonSrc3rdHPDisplay function
assign the 3rdHPSource selector to the MonSrcRotary
MonSrcSetHPSource V2.1 ●
control, key in momentary mode

6-108 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Function Assignable to: Details

Display Module

Rotary Unit
Key Group
Rel.

Key Unit

Display
in

LED
SW
assign the 3rdHPSource selector to the MonSrcRotary
MonSrcSetHPSource_ON V2.1 ●
control, key can only switch on
remove the 3rdHPSource selector from the
MonSrcSetHPSource_OFF V2.1 ●
MonSrcRotary control
assign the 3rdHPSource selector to the MonSrcRotary
MonSrcSetHPSource_LO V2.1 ●
control, key in latching mode
switches the monitoring mode between mode I and mode
NearfieldPFL_CR V2.0 ●
II
Monitoring Studio1 (S1) functions
MonHPDJMode_S1 V2.0 ● see MonHPDJMode
MonHPDJVol_S1 V1.0 ● see MonHPDJVol
MonSetHPSplitBalToHPVol_S1 V3.0 ● see MonSetHPSplitBalToHPVol
MonSetHPSplitBalToHPVol_S1_LO V3.0 ● see MonSetHPSplitBalToHPVol_LO
MonHPGuestVol_S1 V1.0 ●
MonLsCut_S1 V1.0 ●
MonLsDim_S1 V1.0 ●
MonLsMono_S1 V2.0 ●
MonLsVol_S1 V1.0 ●
MonPFLSPVol_S1 V1.0 ● see MonPFLSPVol
MonSetHPSplitBal_S1 V2.1 ● see MonSetHPSplitBal
MonSetMPXVol_S1 V2.2 ● see MonSetMPXVol
MonSetMPXVol_S1_LO V2.2 ● see MonSetMPXVol_LO
MonSetTBRetVol_S1 V2.0 ● see MonSetTBRetVol
MonSetTBRetVol_S1_LO V2.0 ● see MonSetTBRetVol_LO
MonSrcAdd_S1 V2.0 ●
MonSrcFollowCR_S1 V1.0 ●
MonSrcFollowS2_S1 V2.1 ●
MonSrcFollowS3_S1 V2.1 ●
MonSrcKey1-20_S1 V1.0 ● see function MonSrcKey1-20
MonSrcPFLtoMON_S1 V1.0 ●
MonSrcRotary_S1 V2.1 ● see MonSrcRotary
MonSrcRotary3rdHPDisplay_S1 V3.0 ● see MonSrcRotary3rdHPDisplay
MonSrcRotary3rdHPActive_S1 V3.0 ● see MonSrcRotary3rdHPActive
MonSrcRotaryDisplay_S1 V3.0 ● see MonSrcRotaryDisplay
MonSrcRotaryActive_S1 V3.0 ● see MonSrcRotaryActive
MonSrc3rdHPDisplay_S1 V3.0 ● see MonSrc3rdHPDisplay
MonSrc3rdHPActive_S1 V3.0 ● see MonSrc3rdHPActive
MonSrcSetHPSource_S1 V2.1 ● see MonSrcSetHPSource
MonSrcSetHPSource_S1_ON V2.1 ● see MonSrcSetHPSource_ON
MonSrcSetHPSource_S1_OFF V2.1 ● see MonSrcSetHPSource_OFF
MonSrcSetHPSource_S1_LO V2.1 ● see MonSrcSetHPSource_LO
NearfieldPFL_ST1 V2.0 ● see NearfieldPFL_CR

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-109

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Function Assignable to: Details

Display Module

Rotary Unit
Key Group
Rel.

Key Unit

Display
in

LED
SW
Monitoring CR & S1 functions
function is depending on the module location which is
MonNearField V2.2 ●
either ‚ControlRoom‘ or ‚Studio1‘
MonNearFieldVol V2.2 ●
MonTBRetVol V3.2 ●
MonSurExtDownmixOff V2.2 ●
MonSurExtDownmixOn V2.2 ●
MonSurFormat51 V2.2 ●
MonSurFormatStereo V2.2 ●
MonSurLSP_Center V2.2 ●
MonSurLSP_Left V2.2 ●
MonSurLSP_LeftSur V2.2 ●
MonSurLSP_LFE V2.2 ●
MonSurLSP_Right V2.2 ●
MonSurLSP_RightSur V2.2 ●
MonSurModeDirect V2.2 ●
MonSurModeStereo V2.2 ●
MonLsOnRedLight_Dim V3.2 ● set the LS behaviour to DIM if RedLight is active
MonLsOnRedLight_Cut V3.2 ● set the LS behaviour to CUT if RedLight is active
MonLsOnRedLight_Nothing V3.2 ● set the LS behaviour to Noting if RedLight is active
set the LS behaviour to CUT allow TB if RedLight is
MonLsOnRedLight_CutAllowTB V3.2 ●
active
Monitoring Studio2/3 (S2, S3) functions
MonHPDJVol_S2/3 V1.0 ●
MonHPGuestVol_S2/3 V1.0 ●
MonTBRetVol V3.2 ●
MonLsCut_S2/3 V1.0 ●
MonLsDim_S2/3 V1.0 ●
MonLsVol_S2/3 V1.0 ●
MonSrcFollowCR_S2/3 V1.0 ●
MonSrcFollowS1_S2/S3 V2.1 ●
MonSrcFollowS2_S3 V2.1 ●
MonSrcFollowS3_S2 V2.1 ●
MonSrcKey1-20_S2/3 V1.0 ● see function MonSrcKey1-20
MonLsOnRedLight_Dim V3.2 ● set the LS behaviour to DIM if RedLight is active
MonLsOnRedLight_Cut V3.2 ● set the LS behaviour to CUT if RedLight is active
MonLsOnRedLight_Nothing V3.2 ● set the LS behaviour to Noting if RedLight is active
set the LS behaviour to CUT allow TB if RedLight is
MonLsOnRedLight_CutAllowTB V3.2 ●
active

6-110 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Function Assignable to: Details

Display Module

Rotary Unit
Key Group
Rel.

Key Unit

Display
in

LED
SW
MPX functions
MPX_CR_OnOff V2.2 ●
to define the MPX configuration with the StripSelect func-
MPX_CR_Selection V2.2 ● tion, this temporarily invalidates the common interaction
of StripSelect and UserGUI
MPX_ST1_OnOff V2.2 ●
MPX_ST1_Selection V2.2 ● see MPX_CR_Selection
Snapshot & PartialOutputRouting functions
a key with the Snapshot_SLATE function is required to
Snapshot_SLATE V2.0 ● recall a snapshot by a desk snapshot key, both keys has
to be pressed simultaneously
Snapshot1-80 V2.0 ● recalls the corresponding snapshot
to define a snapshot strip filter, this temporarily invalidate
DefineStripFilter V2.2 ●
the common interaction of StripSelect and UserGUI
PartialOutputRoutingKey1-1024 V2.2 ● recall the corresponding partial output routing
PartialOutputRoutingEnableKey V3.1 ● set the enable option of the modules desk group
Signaling functions
OnAir V1.0 ● LED function
OnAirPGMA V2.0 ● LED function
OnAirPGMB V2.0 ● LED function
OnAirREC V2.0 ● LED function
RedLight_CR V1.0 ● LED function
RedLight_ST1-3 V1.0 ● LED function
Next functions
StartNextA V2.0 ●
StartNextB V2.0 ●
TalkBack functions
TBActiveFrom_CR V2.0 ● reset TB from CR function, shows if TB fromCR is active
reset TB from Extern function, shows if TB fromExtern is
TBActiveFrom_Extern V2.0 ●
active
TBActiveFrom_ST1-3 V2.0 ● reset TB from ST function, shows if TB fromST is active
assign to a KeyGroup, use dummy Keys (not existing
TBCRMicSelector V1.0 ● element no) for not used TB CRMics: Key 0=CRMic1,
1=CRMic2, 2=CRMic3, 3=CRMic4
for possible TB destinations see chapter ‚TB Destination
TBKey1-20 V1.0 ● Key‘ of: OA3000 Implementation Notes Input Output
Selections.doc
TBKey1-20_S1-3 V1.0 ● see TBKey1-20
TBKeyMO1-20 V2.0 ● momentary function of TBKey1-20
TBKeyMO1-20_S1-3 V2.0 ● momentary function of TBKey1-20_S1-3
User and CAB button functions
CABButton1-48 V2.0 ●
function without LED, key mode is momentary for long-
UserButton1-20 V1.0 ●
press and latching for short-press actions
UserButton21-64 V2.1 ● see UserButton1-20

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-111

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Function Assignable to: Details

Display Module

Rotary Unit
Key Group
Rel.

Key Unit

Display
in

LED
SW
function without LED, key mode is always latching for
UserButtonLO1-20 V1.0 ●
long-press and short-press actions
UserButtonLO21-64 V2.1 ● see UserButtonLO1-20
function without LED, key mode is always momentary for
UserButtonMO1-20 V1.0 ●
long-press and short-press actions
UserButtonMO21-64 V2.1 ● see UserButtonMO1-20
UserLed1-20 V1.0 ● only LED function
UserLed21-64 V2.1 ● see UserLed1-20
UserLedAlwaysOn1-20 V2.0 ● only LED function, LED lights always
UserLedAlwaysOn21-64 V2.1 ● see UserLedAlwaysOn1-20
UserLedButtonState1-20 V2.0 ● only LED function, shows the user button state
UserLedButtonState21-64 V2.1 ● see UserLedButtonState1-20
Watch functions
FaderStopWatch1_Label V2.1 ● Display function
FaderStopWatch1_Time V2.1 ● Display function
FaderStopWatch2_Label V2.1 ● Display function
FaderStopWatch2_Time V2.1 ● Display function
GUITime V2.1 ● Display function
StopWatch1 V2.1 ● Display function
StopWatch1_Start V2.1 ●
StopWatch1_Stop V2.1 ●
StopWatch2 V2.1 ● Display function
StopWatch2_Start V2.1 ●
StopWatch2_Stop V2.1 ●
StopWatch3 V2.1 ● Display function
StopWatch3_Start V2.1 ●
StopWatch3_Stop V2.1 ●
StopWatch4 V2.1 ● Display function
StopWatch4_Start V2.1 ●
StopWatch4_Stop V2.1 ●
XL Box functions
XL_Bus_MixLevel V2.1 ●
XL_Line1-12_Bus_On/Off V2.1 ●
XL_Line1-12_InputLabel V2.1 ● Display function
XL_Line1-12_TB V2.1 ●
Central UserGUI module functions
CentralRotary1IncDec V3.0 ●
CentralRotary2IncDec V3.0 ●
CentralRotary3IncDec V3.0 ●
CentralRotary4IncDec V3.0 ●
CentralRotaryStart V3.0 ● start button of the stop watch, function without LED
CentralRotaryStop V3.0 ● stop button of the stop watch, function without LED

6-112 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.32.5 Assignable Channel Strip Functions

Channel strip functions are related to a channel strip. They normally refer to
the input or bus currently routed to this channel strip and allow assigning a
function to a desk element in the Desk_KeyMapping.xml file. Please
note that the color of the key illumination is depending on the module type
(one or two LEDs per key).
Two LEDs per Key (red/yellow) • on all fader modules
• on the editor module (OnAir 3000)
One LED per Key (yellow) • on rotary and rotary assign modules (OnAir 3000)
• on fader assign modules (OnAir 3000)
• on monitoring modules
• on the XL module
• on the central module (OnAir 2500)
Function Assignable to: Details
Rel. Module with Module with
in 2 LEDs per key 1 LED per key
SW (red & yellow) (yellow)
Channel On/Off functions
Channel_Mute V1.0 red yellow Inverse function of Channel_On/Off
Channel_Off V1.0 - -
Channel_On V1.0 red yellow
Channel_On/Off V1.0 red yellow
Channel_On/Off_Both V2.0 orange yellow
red/orange/
Channel_On/Off_CMS V2.1 yellow
yellow
Channel_On/Off_Yellow V2.0 yellow -
red/orange/
Channel_On_CMS V2.1 yellow
yellow
PFL & TalkBack functions
if BroadcastPFL mode is set to 1 it lights orange while
PFL_LocMomentary V2.0 yellow/ orange -
the PFL signal is cut
if BroadcastPFL mode is set to 1 it lights orange while
PFL_On/Off V1.0 yellow/ orange -
the PFL signal is cut
if BroadcastPFL mode is set to 1 it lights orange while
PFL_On/Off_momentary V2.0 yellow/ orange -
the PFL signal is cut
red/orange/ two LEDs: red (TALK), yellow (PFL), orange
PFL_TBMomentaryfromSrc1-4 V2.0 -
yellow (TALK&PFL active)
TBfromSrc1 V1.0 red yellow common used TB function for CR, ST1-3
TBfromSrc2-4 V1.0 red yellow TB source 2-4 only for ST1-3 available
TBfromSrcMO1 V2.0 red yellow momentary function of TBfromSrc1
TBfromSrcMO2-4 V2.0 red yellow momentary function of TBfromSrc2-4
this function sets TB and PFL simultaneously but indi-
TBPFLfromSrc1 V1.0 red yellow
cats only TB stats, see also TBfromSrc1
this function sets TB and PFL simultaneously but indi-
TBPFLfromSrc2-4 V1.0 red yellow
cats only TB stats, see also TBfromSrc2-4
TBPFLfromSrcMO1 V2.0 red yellow momentary function of TBPFLfromSrc1
TBPFLfromSrcMO2-4 V2.0 red yellow momentary function of TBPFLfromSrc2-4
red/orange/ two LEDs: red (TALK), yellow (Ready), orange (TALK
TBREADYfromSrc1 V3.2 -
yellow & READY active)
red/orange/ two LEDs: red (TALK), yellow (Ready), orange (TALK
TBREADYfromSrc2-4 V3.2 -
yellow & READY active)
red/orange/
TBREADYfromSrcMO1 V3.2 - momentary function of TBREADYfromSrc1
yellow
red/orange/
TBREADYfromSrcMO2-4 V3.2 - momentary function of TBREADYfromSrc2-4
yellow

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-113

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Function Assignable to: Details

Rel. Module with Module with
in 2 LEDs per key 1 LED per key
SW (red & yellow) (yellow)
Strip select functions
SelectPage_Ass V3.0 red yellow
SelectPage_AUX V3.0 red yellow
SelectPage_DeEs V3.0 red yellow
SelectPage_Dyn V3.0 red yellow
SelectPage_EQ V3.0 red yellow
SelectPage_Input V3.0 red yellow
SelectPage_Ins V3.0 red yellow
SelectPage_NX V3.0 red yellow
StripSelect V1.0 yellow -
StripSelect_LED1 V3.0 red yellow
this function doesn‘t have any effect on the UserGUI it
StripSelect_SplitDesk V2.1 yellow -
is used only for snapshot filter
StripSelect_SplitDesk_LED1 V3.0 red yellow see StripSelect_SplitDesk
Channel Input(Status) functions
ChannelActiv V1.0 orange yellow LED only, condition: Ch_open & Master_assigned
ChannelOnAir V1.0 red yellow LED only, condition: Ch_onMaster & OnAir_relevant
ChannelOnMaster V2.0 red yellow LED only, condition: Ch_activ & Master_fdr_open
Joker functions: TALK, LOC/RDY, PFL/TALK, PFL/LOC
red/orange/
JokerFct V1.0 yellow/- two LEDs: red (TALK, RDY), yellow (PFL)
yellow
one LED: yellow (TALK, RDY), dark (PFL)
momentary only of above Joker functions, PFL/TALK
red/orange/
JokerFctMO V2.0 yellow/- and PFL/LOC only TALK and LOC respectively can
yellow
bee operated
Locate V1.0 - -
Locate/Ready V1.0 yellow -
Ready V1.0 yellow - LED only
Next V1.0 yellow - obsolete, same as NextA
NextA V2.0 yellow -
NextA_LED1 V3.0 red yellow
NextB V2.0 yellow -
NextB_LED1 V3.0 red yellow
TimerSelectA-D V2.1 red yellow
TimerSelectA-D_Yellow V2.1 yellow -
Channel user functions
ChannelUserFct1_Button V3.1 red yellow momentary and latching
ChannelUserFct1_ButtonLO V3.1 red yellow latching only
ChannelUserFct1_ButtonMO V3.1 red yellow momentary only
ChannelUserFct1_Led V3.1 red/yellow yellow LED only
ChannelUserFct2_Button V3.1 red yellow mementary and latching
ChannelUserFct2_ButtonLO V3.1 red yellow latching only
ChannelUserFct2_ButtonMO V3.1 red yellow momentary only
ChannelUserFct2_Led V3.1 red/yellow yellow LED only
Bus assignment functions
bus assignment (red/yellow), temporary off state
PGMBusAOnOff V1.0 red/orange yellow
(orange/yellow)
PGMBusAOnOff_Rotary V1.0 red yellow without temporary off state signaling

6-114 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Function Assignable to: Details

Rel. Module with Module with
in 2 LEDs per key 1 LED per key
SW (red & yellow) (yellow)
bus assignment (orange/yellow), temporary off state
PGMBusAOnOff_Both V2.0 orange/red yellow
(red/yellow)
PGMBusAOnOff_Yellow V2.0 yellow/ orange - bus assignment (yellow), temporary off state (orange)
PGMBusBOnOff V1.0 red/orange yellow see PGMBusAOnOff
PGMBusBOnOff_Rotary V2.1 red yellow see PGMBusAOnOff_Rotary
PGMBusBOnOff_Both V2.0 orange/red yellow see PGMBusAOnOff_Both
PGMBusBOnOff_Yellow V2.0 yellow/ orange - see PGMBusAOnOff_Yellow
Rec_PF V1.0 red yellow
RecBusOnOff V1.0 red/orange yellow see PGMBusAOnOff
RecBusOnOff_Rotary V2.1 red yellow see PGMBusAOnOff_Rotary
RecBusOnOff_Both V2.0 orange/red yellow see PGMBusAOnOff_Both
RecBusOnOff_Yellow V2.0 yellow/ orange - see PGMBusAOnOff_Yellow
Record V2.0 red yellow
SubGroup1-8OnOff V2.0 red/orange yellow see PGMBusAOnOff
SubGroup1-8OnOff_Rotary V2.0 red yellow see PGMBusAOnOff_Rotary
Sur51BusAOnOff V2.2 red/orange yellow see PGMBusAOnOff
Sur51BusAOnOff_Rotary V2.2 red yellow see PGMBusAOnOff_Rotary
Sur51BusAOnOff_Both V2.2 orange/red yellow see PGMBusAOnOff_Both
Sur51BusAOnOff_Yellow V2.2 yellow/ orange - see PGMBusAOnOff_Yellow
Sur51BusBOnOff V2.2 red/orange yellow see PGMBusAOnOff
Sur51BusBOnOff_Rotary V2.2 red yellow see PGMBusAOnOff_Rotary
Sur51BusBOnOff_Both V2.2 orange/red yellow see PGMBusAOnOff_Both
Sur51BusBOnOff_Yellow V2.2 yellow/ orange - see PGMBusAOnOff_Yellow
Aux1-4_On/Off V1.0 red/orange yellow see PGMBusAOnOff
Aux1-4_On/Off_Rotary V1.0 red yellow see PGMBusAOnOff_Rotary
Aux1-4_Pre/After V1.0 red yellow
NXBus1-16OnOff V1.0 red/orange yellow see PGMBusAOnOff
NXBus1-16OnOff_Rotary V1.0 red yellow see PGMBusAOnOff_Rotary
NXBus17-48OnOff V3.2 red/orange yellow see PGMBusAOnOff
NXBus17-48OnOff_Rotary V3.2 red yellow see PGMBusAOnOff_Rotary
NXMasterCueOnOff V2.2 red yellow
NXMasterOnOff V1.0 red yellow
Dynamic, EQ & Pan functions
Comp_On/Off V1.0 red yellow
Deesser_On/Off V1.0 red yellow
Delay_On/Off V3.0 red yellow
Dyn_On/Off V1.0 red yellow
EQ_HP_On/Off V2.0 red yellow
EQ_LP_On/Off V2.0 red yellow
EQ_On/Off V1.0 red yellow
Exp_On/Off V1.0 red yellow
Gate_On/Off V1.0 red yellow
Lim_On/Off V1.0 red yellow
Pan_On/Off V1.0 red yellow

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-115

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.32.6 Snapshot Keys

OnAir 2500 By default, the OnAir 2500 desk has six snapshot keys SNAP 1 to SNAP 6
available. They are used to recall the six global snapshots SK1 to SK6 con-
tained in the factory configuration. At time of delivery they are identical with
the initial snapshot but may be modified anytime by the system administrator.
These snapshots can be recalled by any user when holding down the ENABLE
key, then pressing one of the SK1 to SK6 keys; they may, of course, also be
recalled from the main screen’s Snapshot page, as usual. For OnAir 2500
consoles the LocationFilter parameter must always be set to Off.
OnAir 3000 The same applies as mentioned above for OnAir 2500 consoles; however, the
snapshot recall keys are not defined by default. Definition of any desk key as
a snapshot key is possible via the corresponding XML file; up to 80 snapshot
keys are possible if this should be required.
Split desk configurations usually have individual snapshots and snapshot keys
for every desk, so the LocationFilter parameters must be set accordingly.

Global Snapshot Recall via GPI Global snapshots may also be recalled via GPI control inputs. For more
information on GPIO configuration refer to chapter 6.5.26.

Last Snapshot Indication via GPO The last recalled global snapshot may also be communicated via GPO; GPO
configuration is identical with the GPI configuration given above, except that
the Function Type must be LastSnapshot, and there exists no Action item.

6-116 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.32.7 Settings

This page is used to set some parameters valid throughout the whole desk.

AutoTakeoverWindows The size of the AutoTakeoverWindows is set here (1-5); for normal opera-
tion, the default setting of 3 is recommended.

Disable FaderTouch In case of problems with the fader touch sensor it can be deactivated here
by setting Disable FaderTouch to On. This is also the default setting if no
(optional) motor fader modules are installed.

ScreenSaver ... WaitTime These four parameters were introduced with V3.1 in order to increase the
life time of the LED and OLED displays in the fader, fader assign, rotary
assign, monitoring/talkback and XL modules. The displays are automatically
dimmed after a selectable time (1-120 min), individually per location. The
original display brightness setting (adjustable with the Display rotary knob
on the Admin - Brightness page) is independent from this ScreenSaver,
and it will automatically be restored as soon as one of the touch-sensitive
desk controls or screen buttons is touched, or a key or a fader is operated.
Note: The desk LEDs, the desk key illumination and the screen backlight are not
affected by the ‘screen saver’ feature.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-117

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6.5.33 User GUI

6.5.33.1 Settings

This page is used for user GUI settings.

Clock Type Selects the type of the real-time clock displayed in the upper left corner of
the main screen.
Available selections: Analog Clock, Radio Clock, or Digital Clock (below,
left to right).

Time Format Selects 12 hours AM/PM or 24 hours time display format for the Radio Clock
and Digital Clock types shown above.

Date Format Selects the date display format. Selections: DD.MMM.YYYY (shown in the
examples above), or MMM-DD-YYYY.

Keyboard Layout Selects the national character set of the pop-up keyboard; currently, English
US or Danish are available.
Note: This selection is only valid for the pop-up keyboard and the console. Keyboard
layout and language settings of the computer running the Remote Console
application are automatically valid for the Remote Console application; this
cannot be changed here.

6-118 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12

 OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

Facility When touching this field, the keyboard appears for entering a facility ID used
for displaying labels imported from a VSM router control system, and/or for
communication with the Studer Call Management System (CMS). Also refer
to chapter 5.13 as well as to External Router Destination and External
CMS Fader, chapter 6.5.1
In addition, the corresponding settings in the ProBel.xml and probel_
contr_ext.ini files or in the cms_contr_ext.ini file must be
entered, respectively.

Channelscreen Layout Selects the layout of the channel screens (Standard, 5.1 Pan or N–X Con-
tribution) for the whole console.
OnAir 2500 Since the OnAir 2500 console doesn’t feature channel screens, this setting is
not supported.

6.5.33.2 Desk Resources (supported by OnAir 3000 only)

This page contains a part of the most important settings for A/B desk con-
figuration, such as the number of the first StripChannel, of the first AUX
bus, of the first N–X bus, etc., and their respective number for this desk.

Date printed: 27.01.12 SW V4.1 Configuration 6-119

OnAir Digital Mixing Consoles

6-120 Configuration SW V4.1 Date printed: 27.01.12